Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
RF-14-1669
1 Ll Inspection Worksheet Miami Shores Village 10050 N.E.2nd Avenue Miami Shores, FL Phone: (305)795-2204 Fax: (305)756-8972 Inspection Number: INSP-217051 Permit Number: RF-7-14-1669 Scheduled Inspection Date: November 06,2014 Permit Type: Roof Inspector: Rodriguez,Jorge Inspection Type: Final Roof Owner: , BARRY UNIVERSITY Work Classification: Flat Job Address: 11300 NE 2 Avenue Garner Building Miami Shores, FL 33138-0000 Phone Number Parcel Number 1121360010160-22 Project: BARRY UNIVERSITY Contractor: CERTIFIED ROOFING SPECIALIST INC Phone: (954)781-7663 Building Department Comments DATA CENTER RENOVATION. INTERIOR RENOVATION IPassed Comments CONSISTING OF DEMOLITION OF EXISTING DOORS, INSPECTOR COMMENTS False FRAMES, HARDWARE, FINISHES, HVAC, FIRE PROTECTION AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS TO RECEIVE NEW LAYOUT. CONVERTING OF TWO ROOMS INTO ONE FOR MORE DATA EQUIPMENT SPACE. Inspector Comments Passed Failed Correction ❑ Needed Re-Inspection Fee No Additional Inspections can be scheduled until re-inspection fee is paid. For Inspections lease call: (305)762-4949 November 05,2014 p p ( ) Page 8 of 35 • Miami Shores Villagers Building Department ju ° �- ���� 10050 N.E.2nd Avenue,Miami Shores,Florida 33138 V,r, Tel:(305)795-2204 Fax:(305)756-8972 INSPECTION LINE PHONE NUMBER:(305)762-4949 FBC 20 Q� BUILDING Master Permit No. �C4( PERMIT APPLICATION Sub Permit No.�— �y L ❑BUILDING ❑ ELECTRIC M ROOFING ❑ REVISION ❑ EXTENSION ❑RENEWAL ❑PLUMBING ❑ MECHANICAL ❑PUBLIC WORKS ❑ CHANGE OF ❑ CANCELLATION ❑ SHOP CONTRACTOR DRAWINGS JOB ADDRESS: 11300 NE 2nd Avenue City: Miami Shores County: Miami Dade Zia: Folio/Parcel#: 11-2136-000-0050 Is the Building Historically Designated:Yes NO x Occupancy Type: Load: Construction Type: Flood Zone: BFE: FFE: OWNER:Name(Fee Simple Titleholder): BarryUniversity Phone#: Address: 11300 NE 2nd Avenue City: Miami Shores State: FL Zip: 33138 Tenant/Lessee Name: Phone#: Email: CONTRACTOR:Company Name: Certified Roofing Specialists, Inc. Phone#: 954-781-7663 Address: 3440 NW 25th Avenue City: Pompano Beach State: FL Zip: 33069 Qualifier Name: Eugene O. FallPhone#: 954-781-7663 State Certification or Registration#: ccc027419 Certificate of Competency#: DESIGNER:Architect/Engineer: Bruns-Pak Phone#: 732-248-4455 Address: City: State: Zip: Value of Work for this Permit:$ C Old Square/Linear Footage of Work: 600SF Type of Work: ❑ Addition IN Alteration ❑ New ❑ Repair/Replace ❑ Demolition Description of Work: Interior Renovation consisting of demolition of existing doors, frames, hardware, finishes, HVAC, fire protection and electrical systems to receive new layout. Converting of two rooms into one for more data equipment space:'Q.A&t> 4.0 (&or— tW-t Am epIgV �'O a�, �� mg,Q Specify color of color thru tile: Submittal Fee$ ► Permit Fee$ �" CCF$ 0_ CO/CC$ 10 Scanning Fee$ Radon Fee$ DBPR$ Notary$ Technology Fee$ C-) Training/Education Fee$ Double Fee$ Structural Reviews$ Bond$–0 TOTAL FEE NOW DUE$ e (Revised02/24/2014) ► t Bonding Company's Name(if applicable) N/A Bonding Company's Address City State Zip Mortgage Lender's Name(if applicable) Mortgage Lender's Address City State Zip Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet the standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRIC, PLUMBING, SIGNS, POOLS, FURNACES,BOILERS,HEATERS,TANKS,AIR CONDITIONERS,ETC..... OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. "WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT." Notice to Applicant: As a condition to the issuance of a building permit with an estimated value exceeding$2500, the applicant must promise in good faith that a copy of the notice of commencement and construction lien law brochure will be delivered to the person whose property is subject to attachment. Also,a certified copy of the recorded notice of commencement must be posted at the job site for the first inspection which occurs seven (7) days after the building permit is issued. In the absence of such posted notice, the inspection will not be approved and a reinspection fee will be charged. Signature '�-' - ��LJ Signatur OWNER or AGENT CONT CTOR The ore Ing instrument was acknowledged before me this The fore • g instrument w s acknowledged before me this dav 0 20--f�by 9th day of �Uly 20 14 ,by o is p�rsonall kn ,•,�+�_ Eugene O. Fall who is personally known to me or who has produced as m or who has produced as identification and who did take an oath. identification and who did take an oath. NOTARY PUBLIC: NOTARY P ELIC: 9 W0-&46Sign aLw Si Print: d Print: 116 LAURICELLA Seal: 'NA'1'k'P J cd, Seal: . MY COMMISSION#EEB68716 ���Q. ,MISSIOp,C'•..;� s��$ - `o:�sy,.• EXPIRES February 03,2017 • O `�gt�e `Tp Ea07)398.0153 F wWallotarySendce.com Ftp. OF :4 �A APPROVED BY 'f' '•l �• �� Plans Examiner Zoning tic STNAt'N'NO, Structural Review Clerk (Revised02/24/2014) r, STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD (850) 487-1395 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET •0 w• TALLAHASSEE FL 32399-0783 FALL, EUGENE O CERTIFIED ROOFING SPECIALISTS INC 3440 NW 25TH AVE POMPANO BEACH FL 33069 STATE OF KoRMA AUS L, 3 6- Ek j Congratulations! With this license you become one of the nearly one million DLPARTNEiiTT OF BUSINESS- AND j Floridians licensed by the Department of Business and Professional Regulation. PRO 'ESSIOI+� REGULATION Our professionals and businesses range from architects to yacht brokers,from boxers to barbeque restaurants,and they keep Florida's economy strong. CCCO274: 9 07/31/12 128024719 Every day we work to improve the way we do business in order to serve you better. For information about our services,please log onto www.myfloridalicense.com. CERTIFIED 1bOF- G C�?TTRACTOR There you can find more information about our divisions and the regulations that + FALL, EIIGE�1iiffi i Impact you,subscribe to department newsletters and learn more about the CERTIFIED ('!f�°FI�TG tl�ECUTSTS IN Department's initiatives. Our mission at the Department is:License Efficiently,Regulate Fairly.We constantly strive to serve you better so that you can serve your customers. I IS CERTIFIED under the provisions of Ch 489 Fs Thank you for doing business in Florida,and congratulations on your new license! II I Expiration nates AUC} 31, 2014 L12073101$04 I DETACH HERE AC# 6:236624 STATE OF FLORIDA: I DEPARTMENT 60 BIISINESS PROFESSIONAL GULATION CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD ISEW L12073101904 LICENS NBR , s 3, h 707/31 2012 128024719 CCC.02`��k19r The ROOFING .CONTRAC`t6 Oamed below It CrRTIFIED . �t Under the provisic ris of Chapt ;r,��9 4 � � � 7, Expiration date: AUG 31, 20144 - s ±fie � z FALL. EUGENE `O s CERTIFIED ROOFING SPECIALISV,S L_C-1- 3440 NW 25TH AVE I POMPANO BEACH FL. 33069 I RICK SCOTT KEN LAWSON GOVERNORSECRETARY DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW BROWARD COUNTY LOCAL BUSINESS TAX RECEIPT 115 S. Andrews Ave., Rm. A-100, Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33301-1895—954-831-4000 VALID OCTOBER 1,2013 THROUGH SEPTEMBER 30,2014 DBA: Receipt#:ROOFING%SHEET METAL CONTRACTOR Business Name: 16 CERTIFIED ROOFING SPECIALISTS INC Business Type: (ROOFING) Owner Name:EUGENE O FALL Business Opened:02/03/1986 Business Location:3440 NW 25 AVE State/County/Cert/Reg:CCCO27419/40-OU-88 POMPANO BEACH Exemption Code: Business Phone:954-781-7663 Rooms Seats Employees Machines Professionals 10 For Vending Business Only Number of Machines: Vending Type: Tax Amount Transfer Fee NSF Fee Penalty Prior Years Collection Cost Total Paid 27.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 27.00 THIS RECEIPT MUST BE POSTED CONSPICUOUSLY IN YOUR PLACE OF BUSINESS THIS BECOMES A TAX RECEIPT This tax is levied for the privilege of doing business within Broward County and is non-regulatory in nature. You must meet all County and/or Municipality planning WHEN VALIDATED and zoning requirements. This Business Tax Receipt must be transferred when the business is sold, business name has changed or you have moved the business location.This receipt does not indicate that the business is legal or that it is in compliance with State or local laws and regulations. Mailing Address: CERTIFIED ROOFING SPECIALISTS INC Receipt #108-12-00004391 3440 NW 25 AVE Paid 07/31/2013 27.00 POMPANO BEACH, FL 33069 2013 - 2014 BROWARD COUNTY LOCAL BUSINESS TAX RECEIPT 115 S. Andrews Ave., Rm. A-100, Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33301-1895—954-831-4000 VALID OCTOBER 1, 2013 THROUGH SEPTEMBER 30, 2014 DBA: CERTIFIED ROOFING SPECIALISTS INC Receipt#: 185-716 Business Name: Business Type:ROOFING/SHEET METAL CONTRACTOR (ROOFING) Owner Name:EUGENE O FALL Business Opened:02/03/1986 Business Location: 3440 NW 25 AVE State/County/Cert/Reg:CCCO27419/40-OU-88 POMPANO BEACH Exemption Code: Business Phone: 954-781-7663 Rooms Seats Employees Machines Professionals 10 Signature For Vending Business Only Number of Machines: Vending Type: Tax Amount Transfer Fee NSF Fee Penalty Prior Years Collection Cost Total Paid 27.00 0.00 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.00 27.00 Receipt #108-12-00004391 Paid 07/31/2013 27.00 5 +►��, % '+ ,�` ���� � RQFSfiRAT10N1 NO, fano Y MOW , c h F.k WMA $It���}ies lnt� st W@7Q�lljk ,jz :. i �i f}'tz�ut-iy}v�`:• ...1�.� 5 l rp ?�' pY•�y?-'��- f A,- � {' as- -i ,� F d.+ d `� 1.F e sl t if t h G-t '� F5 l• f z 3 :'i��S`5 1'i'.'?t, C i t "•p e,.. .}t hj .x+ 'f� tr„Yl v r'` y,�iy�(t�"" :,: Y` h s a'It >Y- 5x Y{:...ti l� i l '�x j rk1 � r x �.,ea J t t ty •t Y rWYi 1 F r �t i�Lr� z ' � �fe T...,� ' f ,1 -�t ,,[[,pr�.}� 5,e? �} ) �Y Y 1 d }'.,:!• r nt r`L.t may' yy.�� �i.�i r,f _yywy �+ -,-7. i "n—A will tw rr F AMU:a155 1 a o ?` v a y {..7t''- s m 6 lly on i JOB ! : ot § 5FX F u ✓_� { 44 !"6�1y Y� SL - No W -1. 'Y . + Ts�F�ISYI1 �. 17 C Y -.r job V t NOW 4Y�A.a� G i �s4i'✓, th:;a n q-. z,, afti",.FI" NY`sdmt}ry•N v / �' yr Yr..,e:. J`O iSrsx A' Il � iy1x. rK a} "'' AMP . �t ' ,x. s:_ A sr r'`t,� '^'r.s� � ^ -��YK 'rt `• Zvi _�� �` -yMtE r3 'R4ri�t �i'41� W.$�}v. �W �c� C-A `,7 K.�r� _ T•ln�!� r $ ti>,. r %i �•S*1 �tl��f' •7'S�d4Fi .cG t U� ,4 Y'S3' y! t5'N'� fS !: W , ^1'.,�1 � }A fi rr �r R( 1♦0"t, - �`4'n� } k .:.'.t 1. ,t { r r x fi`�' 1 ! Q.x;y,�•'i Ld ,r".v ,i �n t_; 1 �1tWiMONP �►I�1!�Nt1tE iC �►. A!�������i;Ylos i .l 1 IF y ���i! It�$�� "�M��R �s 'P�A�• `���d�t��lE 1�Ai�(�Q��I1 k�It��B�''�d+K HP—DIPJ SHAI 4 Np7 . $$IVIE ?►j(VI1FV ,". �NN' 11OF 1HFS+? �A11 �1$IiIQILI E" S` A� � 1i@b$� tECItaTBE6 �UFDi98:•'IkJt1pE(��t�FfiHEL1fY, 1C 5 c1 �SYMpE1NtdE O�l F1E/►PPd(dPNT 7A TR11h1$A��BIJRIl1J $.. v �--- - :e CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE D /DDIYYY1r) 7/29/29i2o14 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: if the certificate holder Is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(les)must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder In lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CoTACT NAME: Frank H. Furman, Inc. PHONE (954)943-5050 FAX 943-5417 1314 East Atlantic Blvd. AD 1314 P. 0. BOX 1927 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC 9 Pompano Beach FL 33061 INSURER A AmTrust Int'1 Underwriters Ltd 08072 INSURED INSURER BNational Fire Ins of Hartford 20478 Certified Roofing Specialists Inc. INSURER CAmerican Guarantee 6 Liability 26247 3440 N W 25 Ave INSURER D American Casualty Cc of Reading 0427 INSURER E:Continentall Casualty Co 20443 Pompano Beach FL 33069 INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:Kay 2014 B REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. ILTRR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER MMMO EFF MPOMLICD EXP LIMPfS GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PREMISES Ea occurrence $ 100,000 A CLAIMS-MADE FX-1 OCCUR PAL105083000 /1/2014 /1/2015 MED EXP(Any one person) $ EXCLUDED PERSONAL BADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GE ML AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY X PRO- LOC $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED itSINGLE UM17 1,000,000 B X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ AAL ED SCHEDULED 092127836 /1/2014 /1/2015 BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ OS AUTOS XX NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE HIRED AUTOS AUTOS Per accident $ Uninsured motorist BI split limit $ 10,000 X UMBRELLA LIA,B X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 L. EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 DED I X I RETENTION$ a ILUCS34616309 /1/2014 /1/2015 $ D WORKERS COMPENSATIONX WC STATU- OTH- AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY Y I N I TORY LIMITS ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? NIA (Mandatory In NH) 5092127853 /1/2014 /1/2015 E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT 1$ 1,000,000 E LEASED/Rm;TED EQUIPMENT 2076243854 /1/2014 /1/2015 ANY ONE ITEM $350,000 DEDUCTIBLE $2500. PER OCCURRENCE $350,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS/VEHICLES(Attach ACORD 101,Additional Remarta Schedule,If more space is required) RE: Contractors License Number CCCO27419 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION 13057568972@efaxsend.com SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN Miami Shores Village ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Building Department 10050 NE 2nd Avenue AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Miami Shores, FL 33138 Dirk DeJong/CS ACORD 25(2010/05) ©1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. INS025 r9nlnRril n1 Tho Ar`npn name and Inn^arc ronlatcrad martrc of AnnRr1 r- , CC. t L —I �6 t�•(� m Q l�•4-�, e�f�,�r,,-�c QA)OC— 9&2*10 * CC t LI - 14a1MMINDUSTMM � �F TM SPIKUM ROOMS TWE MMEM OCT 20 2014 y w BY: x > .. Jim p", 04wik X13` sovow M. .. for U11,111":um F* kotdMim am wit: .. . sum PNRR6.VM% " _ .. lim. :, ,. 4. IT PVliami Shares Vilia'e 00 goo 0 APPROV.E0 F3Y is cv. DATE • . . . .. . . . ZOfVING DEPT" . /o . .. mm Ong r BLDG DEPT.. c3 vOn- • ... SUBJECT Y(0 CCb7Pl 'NCE WrrH ALL FEDERAL • • • • • • • • •• STATE ANfj CC'-JPV iy r1UL2S AND REGUTATIONS _ one • �U��'�� '���L ��GG ti!- t 666 ••��' .'U..:. cxA+�t�.n. uc.• r :a X I WIN inwy HAI �' t'^fi^ J� 777= sign, � p _ .. �;r'r'^�y��,�,r,a.., �e. n", ��Pfi IN `w" ''S"��' t -`�,? r E �.,%.. ���:"�r ✓. �., r �F 9 � vV ✓-P'L -a�s�f� f Oil Ism v; x 4M �¢ f i /1 A 1 I-1 1 V � e l �i f. i{ i f 0000• 00 • • • • 0• • • 0.0000 •006 • 00 •00• 0 ••000• • • • •00.0• r U L Applicant ID No: 100039-032 Service Center No 1 Expires: 31-MAR-2015 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE THIS IS TO CERTIFY that the Alarm Service Company indicated below is included by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL)in its Product Directories as eligible to use the UL Listing Mark in connection with Certificated Alarm Systems. The only evidence of compliance with UL's requirements is the issuance of a UL Certificate for the Alarm System and the Certificate is current under UL's Certificate Verification Service. This Certificate does not apply in any way to the communication channel between the protected property and any facility that monitors signals from the protected property unless the use of a UL listed or Classified Alarm Transport Company is specified on the Certificate. Listed Service From: MIAMI LAKES, FL Alarm Service Company:(100039-032) Service Center:(100039-032) CHI ALARMS INC. CHI ALARMS INC. 14070 NW 82ND AVE 14070 NW 82ND AVE MIAMI LAKES FL 33016-1547 MIAMI LAKES FL 33016-1547 The Alarm Service Company is Listed in the following Certificate Service Categories: File-Vol No. CCN Listing Category S24065-1 UUFX [Signal and Fire Alarm Equipment and Services](Protective Signaling Services)Central Station i *"'THIS CERTIFICATE EXPIRES ON 31-MAR-2015 "LOOK FOR THE UL ALARM SYSTEM CERTIFICATE" 007553 Local Business Tax Receipt Miami—Dade County, State of Florida TINS IS NOTA BILL - DO NOT PAY 4 LB 3999365 BUSINESS NAMEfLOCA470N RECEIPT No. EXPIRES CHI ALARMS INC RENEWAL SEPTEMBER 30 201 w 14070 NW 82 AVE 4173795 = � Must be displayed at place of business MIAMI LAKES FL 33016 Pursuant to County Codex` Chapter SA-Art 9&10 OWNER SEC.TYPE OF BUSINESS CHI ALARMS INC 196 SPEC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PAYMENT RECEIVED Worker(s) 2 EF0000876 BY TAX COLLECTOR $45.00 07/18/2014 ECHECK-14-140144 This Local Business Tax Receipt only confirms payment of the Local Business Tax.The ReMpt is not a lice, permit are certification of the bolder"s quanfications,to do business. Holder must comply with any governmental or nongovernmental regulatory latus and requirements which apply to the busineaL The RECEIPT NO.above must be displayed on all commercial vehicles-Miami-flade Code Sec ga-276. For more information,visit wmn mlamidade.aovhaxcoli eor RICK SCOTT,G MERNOR KEN LAWSON,SECRETARY STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS LICENSING BOARD EF0000876 The ALARM SYSTEM CONTRACTOR I Named below IS CERTIFIED Under the provisions of Chapter 489 FS. Expiration date: AUG 31,2016 CHI, RENE CHI ALARMSINC .,,.. 14070 NW 87`NO WE .> MIAMI LAOS- ISSUED: AOS ISSUED: 05/13/2014 DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW SEQ# L1405130001251 (For the protection of our professional license holders,this license contains hidden security features to prevent counterfeiting. Unauthorized reproduction is strictly prohibited.and will be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law) The Department of Business and Professional Regulation(DBPR),issues licenses for many licensed businesses and practitioners in the State of Florida. DBPR is changing the way you interact with state government. Many of DBPR's services are available online at www.MyFloridaLicense.com We encourage you to utilize these services to make address changes,licensing changes or to renew your license. Name changes require legal documentation verifying the name change,which must be mailed to the DBPR. An original,a certified copy or a duplicate copy of an original or certified copy of a document that shows the legal name change will be accepted,unless the DBPR has a question about the authenticity of the document. If applicable,the DBPR will send a renewal notice to your last known address or email address of record. If you have not received your renewal notice,please call our Customer Contact Center at 850.487.1395 or online at www.MvFloridaLicense.com/contactus. Please refer to your profession's governing statutes and Administrative codes for fiuther information regarding renewals. These may be accessed from our website. Ac# 439746 CHI ALARMS, INC. Serving South Florida for Over 20 Years. L Listed Installer of Alarmrm systems S24065. Notifier-Nesco/Fire-Lite Authorized 14070 NW 82nd Ave. Miami Lakes, FL 33016 Distributor Tel: 305'827-2856 Fax: 305-825-2144 State License#EF0000876 Email: rchi@chialarms.com Prepared by: Rene Chi Proposal y Honeywell Date: 11/26/2014 Attn: Richard/Albert Dade Electric Job name: Barry University Garner Hall Bldg. Job address:11300 NE 2nd Ave. Tel/ Fax: Project: Fire Alarm Devices Qty Description 1 Misc. electrical material. 1 Labor to interconnect local fire alarm system on Data Center to main Fire Alarm 1 Signed and sealed AutoCAD shop drawings. 1 Electrical and fire alarm permit. 1 Electrical and fire alarm inspections. Note: Permit fee not included. Thank you for your business Total $4570.00 Revised 1. Price cover only the material listed above.Any additional equipment shall be paid for by the Customer. 2. Sales are subject to cxi ALARMS,INC.standard credit terms and conditions. 3. Payments:50%deposit,25%at rough electrical inspection,15%at fire final inspection and balance at final electrical. 4. All payments are due upon receipt of invoice.On balance more than 30 days old,it is agreed that a Finance Charge of 1.5%per month will be made.Should the service of an attorney be required to enforce any pad of a credit agreement,or for the collection of a delinquent account,it is agreed that the Debtor will pay all costs of collection including attorney fees. 5. Equipment t0 become property of the Customer upon payment of Selling Price indicated above in full. 6. Customer to provide dedicated 110-volt line and 2 telephone lines to the FACP. 7. The above price is valid for 120 days from date of quotation. 8. All alar equipment is warranty for one full year. 9. Local authorities may require additional devices. 10. Customer to supply building floor plans. 11. Ia no event shall Chi Alarms,Inc.be liable for any special,incidental,indirect,speculative,remote,consequential,punitive or exemplary damages,whether arising out of or as a result of breach of contract,warranty,tort(including negligence)ansing from,relating to,or connected with the services,equipment,materials,or any goods provided hereunder. 12. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein,if a portion of the services involves the installation and/or maintenance of system associated with security and/or detection of and/or reduction of risk of loss associated with fire,Chi Alarms,Inc.total liability arising out of or as a result of its'performance underthis agreement shall not exceed the amount of this agreement. 13. Third Party Indemnification.When Customer has persons,or the property of others on the premises,or the system extends to protect property or others,Customer agrees to and shall indemnify,defend and hold harmless Chi Alarms, Inc.its employees and agents for and against all claims brought by parties Other than the parties to this agreement.This provision shall apply to all claims regardless of cause,including Chi Alarms,Inc.performance or failure to perform and including defects in products,design,installation,maintenance,operation or non-operation of the System,whether based upon negligence,active or passive,warranty,or strict or product liability on the part of Chi Alarms, Inc.its employees or agents,but this provision shall not apply to claims for loss or damages solely and directly caused by an employee of Chi Alarms,Inc.while on Customers premises. 14. Painting,patching and trenching if required not included. 15. Customer agrees to pay for any expenses incurred by Chi Alarms,Inc.due to interruptions in the installation and work schedule of the fire alar system proposed due to customers'inability to provide access to the project location and installation area as per approved plans and design.Expenses include but are not limited to expired permits,failure to attend scheduled appointments,non-payment according to schedule of payments and failure or refusal to authorize a change order and payment for additional work required by the authority having jurisdiction(AHJ).If additional work is required by AHJ and customer refuses to authorize such work within 30 days,Chi Alarms,Inc.reserves the right to proceed with the work as required by AHJ to complete the installation and close the peril.If this should occur customer acknowledges that Chi Alarms,Inc.will be legally entitle to such payment as outlined in the proposed change order.Customer understand that Chi Alarms,Inc.may place a hold on any existing open permit related to the work described above due to the customer inability to provide access to the entire installation area as required. 16. Sales tax not included. 17. Permit fee not included. Customer acceptance In accepting this proposal the Customer agrees to the terms and conditions contained herein.It is understood that they shall prevail over any variation in terms and conditions on any purchase order or other document that the Customer may issue. Purchaser Signature Date Bill to address Print name Title City State Zip Telephone no. I T S LEN IAL . CO�f1ERC IQVIGHT FIRE SYSTEMS® FIRE ALARMS ` m a � vMk ���c�,. Y�` `k ............ • Eight zones, 6 Style A(class B)and 2 Style D(class A). 8 Expander Zones are Style A(class B). Zones a are interchangeable using the Model 7181 Zone a � Converter. • UL, FM, MEA(BSA), CFM Listed and Approved. ` • Event memory. alfIF " • Fuseless design can reduce service time. • Field selectable, 12 or 24 VDC power supply. • Six amp current output at 12 volts,five amps at A� 24 volts. 4 ? • Compatible with 2-and 4-wire smoke detectors as r well as water flow and sounding devices. • ANSI Cadence Pattern Output. • Four programmable (Style Y) supervised signal 411V, circuits, including steady, pulse and temporal. ` —4, " z • Programmable smoke verification,pre-alarm delay, and cross-zoning can minimize false alarms. m • Four general purpose relays(Form C 24 volts at 2.5 5207 amps resistive). • Built-in approved digital communicator with UL required priorty reporting. • Flexible programming capabiities including up/ or system problems,exist. If the 5207 encounters a fire downloading and use of remote annunciator. No or trouble condition, it sends a report to a central "desktop"programmer required. monitoring station (if applicable),and,typically,sounds an audible/visual warning in the local area. • Accu-Zone® diagnostics facilitate local and remote troubleshooting. The 5207's microprocessor constantly runs programs to • Individual zone Walk Test. check inputs and carry out other routine functions. If the program ever stops running, a watchdog circuit will detect it and reset microprocessors to resume normal DESCRIPTION: operations. The Model 5207 is an all-in-one fuseless local fire The Model 5207 conducts an automatic self-test every evacuation control panel and digital 24 hours—at a time you select—and sends a report to communicator designed for applications requiring the central station (if applicable). manual fire alarm, automatic fire alarm and water flow for sprinkler system supervision. The basic unit offers Other features of the system include English-language fire alarm for one to eight zones,expandable to 16 with remote annunciation simplifying"Step Programming"of the optional 5210 expansion module.' It is compatible custom options. Remote downloading of system with both two-and four-wire smoke detectors. Compact, configurations can eliminate the expense of sending out easy to install and service,it delivers the features you'd a service technician for reprogramming. System provides expect to find in fire systems costing much more. a built-in fire drill procedure. The exclusive Accu-Zone° During normal operation, the 5207 constantly checks feature measures and displays zone voltages, so you smoke and other sensing devices for fire conditions. It can set up and test the system without separate testing also conducts system checksto determine if anytroubles, equipment. Fuseless circuit board design eliminates one of the most likely causes for service calls. PROGRAMMING ANNUNCIATION The 5207 includes an annunciator inside the cabinet. Its six LEDs (for alarm, trouble, silenced, AC/low battery, event memory, time settreporting) are visible without opening the cabinet. The annunciator allows for easy operation of all functions. It features dual seven-segment display and 14 uniquely assigned function keys. Keys a� 3 ° are: ENTER,CLEAR,SILENCE,SHUNT and 0-9 used y.. " forALARM RESET,CLEAR ALARM MEMORY,DIALER RESET,REQUEST DOWNLOAD,DISPLAY MEMORY, TEST, DISPLAY TROUBLES, SET DATE and SET TIME. Remote annunciation is available through the Model 5230. This four-wire, 16-zone remote annunciator is % ° h easy to operate. Its fourteen function keys can perform 5521 the same operations as the main system annunciator, On-site programming is available through the optional including silencing, resetting,and displaying of alarms, Model 5521 Desktop Programmer or through any troubles and alarm memory. Use of access codes remote annunciator. prevents unwanted tampering. In addition the Model 5230 can be used to program all programmable options Remote programming can be accomplished through the for both the local control and digital communicator. use of 5521 programmer and 5530 modem, or through the use of an IBM or compatible personal computer and Features include LCD display, backlighting, English- the Model 5541 Downloading Software (requires the language annunciation. Model 5530 Downloading Modem). Upto seven 5230s can be attached to one 5207. Standby More than 60 programmable options are available for current draw per 5230 is 60 mA,alarm current is 120 mA. customizing system configurations and end-user features, including zone type (fire, panic, tamper, sprinkler, water, heat, cold, local); zone options (pre- alarmdela ed smoke verification delayed,zone disable); Y Y mmable P r and zone location descriptions. rog a dialer _. . .. ,�. _ options include total numberof reporting attempts,Touch- Tone" or rotary dialing, one or two telephone lines. Several time delay features,including number of seconds to alarm in pre-alarm,smoke delay conditions, number of hours before loss of AC hours report,and 24-hour test 1101. time, can be programmed. ZONE EXPANSION The optional Model 5210 Zone Expander doubles the 5230 number of zones available to the 5207 from 8 to 16. The 5210 adds eight additional style A(class B).zones to the 5207, enabling use of both two- and four-wire COMMUNICATIONS/REPORTIN smoke detectors. The 5207 is equipped with a UL listed digital dialer Voltage Ranges: Using 24-VDC power: 17.8-27.4 VDC. which has the ability to seize the telephone line(s) to Using 12-VDC power: 8.5-11.8 VDC. report alarms and troubles to a central station. It can supervise the telephone lines and activate a trouble- alert if aline failure is sustained for 45 seconds or longer. Other communications/reporting features include: Built- IV %,r=� it y i in ring detector; re-try if communication failed; fail-to communicate output;one or two phone lines option; up r s 5 to four phone number capability(plus computer phone for downloading);Touch-Tone®and rotary compatible. ' The 5207 is compatible with all major reporting formats including SIA(security industry standard), SK, 5210 FSK, SK 4/2, Radionics BFSK. Format selectable by account number. SPECIFICATIONS Model 7181 Fire Zone Convertor ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Converts Style A zones to Style D and vice versa. • Primary AC: 120 VRMS at 60 HZ, 2A • Total Accessory Load: 5A at 24 VDC 6A at 12 VDC -` INDICATOR LIGHTS: • AC/DC POWER(Green)-On when system is running on AC power;flashes when using DC. • ALARM (Red)-On for supervisory alarm;flashes for 5220 Direct Connect Module fire alarm. Used for City Box and polarity reversing direct • TROUBLE(Yellow)-On when trouble condition exists. wire applications. • SILENCED (Yellow)-On when alarm or trouble has been silenced but not yet cleared. _ ' • EVENT MEMORY (Yellow) - On when an alarm condition has been reset. j f • SET MODE/REPORT(Yellow)-On when system is in test or program mode,including Date/Time set mode. Flashes when system is reporting. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS: 5530 Downloading Modem • Dimensions: 16 in.W x 26.4 in. H x 4 in. D SIA format modem for remote programming of 5207. (40.6cm W x 67cm H x 10.2cm D) • Weight: 25 lbs. (11.4 kg.) • Color: Red TELEPHONE REQUIREMENTS: • FCC Registration No.:AC6USA-65475-AL-E • Type of Jack: RJ31X(2 required) APPROVALS: 5541 Downloading Software • UL Listed For remote programming with IBM PC and compatible • FM Approved computers. Can be used with 5207. Requires 5530 • CFM Approved modem. Software/modem package may be ordered • New York City MEA(formerly BSA) as a 5561. • NFPA -Central Station Reporting qr"'� -Local Protective Signaling System -City Box y -Polarity Reversal -Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems ' 5260 Printer Interface OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Allows connection of a standard computer printer to Model 4180 Status Display Module provide a printed record of 5207 system activity. Simple Provides 16 outputs to give alarm and trouble conditions plug-in connection. (Printer not supplied.) by zone. Two units can be connected to annunciate all 16 zones on a 5207 control. Can be used to drive LED ' or graphic annunciators. (Non-supervised) k�< 8 i ea y _ ARCHITECT/ENGINEER SPECIFICAVONS The contractorshall provide a complete electrically supervised shall be programmed to operate on(1)pre-alarm,(2)tamper fire alarm and communications system. The system shall alarm, (3) special alarm, (4) fire alarm, (5) trouble, (6) no- contain a fire alarm control/communicator and panel to silence, (7) alarm by specific zone (1-16). The relays shall supervise and operate heat and smoke detection devices, remain energized until the panel is silence reset orthe trouble alarm signal devices, visual annunciators and an integral condition is cleared, unless"no-silence"is selected. digital communicator to transmit fire alarm and supervisory signals to a central station.The control/communicator shall be The control/communicator shall have an integral annunciator UL Listed or FM approved for use under NFPA 71,72A,726, to indicate sequentially zones in alarm,zones in trouble,and 72C and 72D standards. It shall provide power and control for system functions. LEDs shall augment the display to make eight supervised detection zones,four supervised alarm signal clear to an operator the system status. An integral touchpad circuits and a dual digital communicator. The control/ shall be provided to operate, set up, and interrogate the communicator shall be expandable to sixteen supervised system. Vital operations such as alarm silencing or reset shall detection zones and shall be able to communicate to a central be simple and obvious to an operator. Authorization pass station in SIA,SK FSK1,SK 4/2 or Radionics BFSK formats. codes may or may not be used. The control/communicator shall be Model 5207 or approved equal. The control/communicator shall have the capability to supervise two telephone lines,seize the phone line,and send the alarm There shall be two Style D and six Style A detection zones. signal on one or both lines without the addition of any more They shall accommodate heat detectors, products of equipment. It shall sound a local trouble signal if the telephone combustion detectors, manual pull stations, sprinkler flow service is interrupted for longer that 45 seconds and it shall switches and gate valve supervisory switches intermixed as transmit a signal indicating the loss of phone line service to the desired and permitted by NFPA 71,72A,72B,72C,and 72D. central station over the remaining phone line. A signal shall Products of combustion detection may be either two-or four- also be transmitted indicating the restoral of phone service. wire and shall be cross listed by ULfor use on the system.The The control/communicator shall be able to report the loss of detection zones shall be programmed to(1)be cross zoned so either phone line without regard to which phone line failed first. that two individual zones must sense products of combustion, If both lines fail,a local signal shall sound. (2)automatically reset a detector to verify that smoke exists, (3)see a single detector in alarm—before the alarm is sounded The control/communicator shall have the ability to send a test and a signal is transmitted to the central station. signal to the central station every 24 hours. The test signal shall be able to be transmitted at a specific time of day or night There shall be four 1 amp supervised (Style Y)alarm signal by setting a program within the panel. circuits. They shall cause the bells/horns to ring steady/ pulsing/temporal throughout the premises until reset or The alarm signals transmitted to the central station shall silenced. Two 1 amp outputs can be combined to provide one indicate which of the eight zones is in alarm and which zones 2 amp output. are in trouble,depending on which format is used. Restoral from alarm or trouble shall also be transmitted by zone. The The control shall be equipped with four auxiliary relays that control/communicator shall be capable of communicating to Silent Knight, Rad ion ics orAdemco central station receivers. ga.SEi aes f#.r#d' •.••... :.4a*zv^mb�+. ,y.,...a ..�:rte; ae�Y bit 'K.4,K.4 r:: - -�4s£CPdtltGAa^k. �- Esu�,gs�%a$sF�- � N" r�,�x; y, di,Fa�ite b4a:£3s��-slas N4 MODEL 5207 BLOCK DIAGRAM-TYPICAL INSTALLATION 7750 Meridian Circle,Maple Grove,MN 55369-4927 MADE IN SILENT 1-800-046-6444 or in Minnesota(612)493-6435 AMERICA KNIGHTFAX:(612)493-6475 Form#150376(Rev 9/96) 13FIRE SYSTEMS® III ' I © SINGLE HAZARD , CATALOG NUMBER - - Protection Systems 2002 BINDLE HAZARD PANEL I.I.L. Listed S2203 F.M.Approved MEA CSFM e rotnot on eyateme Engineer and Architect Specifications into a single, reliable package. The SHP uses several an y software algorithms as well as hardware designed to fle ensure reliability. Averaging is used on initiating cir- cuits to filter noise spikes and to ensure proper signals. Each Analog to Digital (A to D) channel monitoring initi- ating circuit is calibrated during each change in state to ensure proper operation of the associated hardware. Key code building is used during each portion of the program to ensure that the proper software sequence is used prior to activating any output. The release circuits are protected by an Intelligent Transistor which impedes noise spikes and microprocessor failure from inadvertently activating release outputs (Agent Release and Solenoid). y , The SHP provides 8 Status LEDs (AC Normal, Alarm, Pre-Discharge, Release, Supervisory, Trouble, • Suited for Multiple Types of Suppression: Clean Alarms Silenced and Abort) for instant feedback. A Agent, Carbon Dioxide and Sprinkler Pre- diagnostic LED display is provided to help troubleshoot Action/Deluge Systems. any potential field problems, provide current status and • Microprocessor Based with hardware and soft- retain stored events. A Reset and Silence switch is ware integration designed to guarantee RELIA- provided to allow control of the system outputs and BILITY. operation. • Cross Zone, Sequential, Manual Release, Abort, The SHP can be configured for either one or two Waterflow and Supervisory Detection Types. conventional detection circuits. The detection circuits can be configured for sequential detection, cross zone • Three Class B Notification Appliance Circuits or single detector release. rated for 2.0 amps @ 24VDC. Depending on the configuration selected, the SHP • Dedicated Release Circuit compatible with Agent also provides up to three initiating circuits to monitor Release or Solenoid actuation. contact devices (Abort, Manual Release, Waterflow or • Four Class B Initiating Circuits. Supervisory switches). Four different Abort types are • Optional Class A module for Initiating Circuits. available including a special NYC option. All four initiat- • Alpha-numeric LED display for Troubleshootinging circuits can be converted to Class A operation via • Programmable Pre-Discharge and Discharge the SHP Class A Input Module, P/N 10-2172. All SHP Timers. initiating circuits are inherently power limited. A ten position dip switch is used to set all options. • Resettable and continuous auxiliary output Three notification appliance circuits, rated for 2.0 power. amps @ 24VDC,are available. Each circuit, depending • Integral 2.6 amp power supply. Expandable to on the configuration, will provide distinct signaling for 10.0 amps. Alarm, Pre-Discharge, Release, Waterflow or • Small surface or flush mount enclosure with Supervisory conditions. A separate Agent Release or removable door. Solenoid circuit is provided to operate the suppression • Approved for Releasing Device Service and system. A dedicated Disable switch is provided for the Sprinkler Supervisory. release outputs. All output circuits, including solenoid and agent release circuits,are power limited. Description The SHP provides dedicated alarm and trouble The Fike SHPTm provides a reliable system for use with SPDT contacts for annunciation and control. If addi- fire suppression and sprinkler pre-action/deluge sys- tional outputs are required, SHP SRM4 Relay Modules tems. The SHPTm is a microprocessor based system can be added. with sophisticated software and hardware integrated The SHP is available in multiple hardware configura- tions, depending on the input power source (120 VAC gprtction or 208/240 VAC) and the enclosure color (Gray or Systems June1996 Division Fike Corporation Revised Issue 704 South 10th Street•P.O.Box 610 •Blue Springs,Missouri 64013-0610 U.S.A. •Telefax(816)229-4615 Red). The system comes equipped with a 2.6 amp @ 10-051-R-1 SHP Control System consisting of: 24VDC power source. SHP Controller The system has been designed to comply with the fol- Red Enclosure, 120 VAC Transformer lowing standards: 10-051-G-2 SHP Control System consisting of: 4 NFPA 12 Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems SHP Controller NFPA 12A Halon 1301 Extinguishing Systems Gray Enclosure,208/240 VAC Transformer NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems 10-051-R-2 SHP Control System consisting of: NFPA 15 Water Spray Fixed Systems SHP Controller NFPA 16 Deluge, Foam-water and Foam-spray Red Enclosure,208/240 VAC Transformer Systems 10-2171 SHP Controller NFPA 70 National Electric Code 10-2172 SHP Class A Initiating Module NFPA 72 Installation, Maintenance and Use of 10-2176 SHP SRM4 Relay Module Protective Signaling Systems 10-2190-1 SHP Battery Pack,7 AH NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems 10-2190-2 SHP Battery Pack, 17 AH Com OnentS See SHP Installation Manual, P/N 06-130 for a com- p plete listing of compatible initiating, indicating and out- 10-051-G-1 ut10-051-G-1 SHP Control System consisting of: put devices. SHP Controller Gray Enclosure, 120 VAC Transformer Nr3 N� �� r. r • iii x 1 P 14 Is 14 12 14 P2 • 22• • • • • • �_2�- + - + + - - + - +•� ®O I I I j OPTIONAL j I CLASS A MODULE I OtA010811C O O I 1Fn I P4 O°ae-MMuaa O Asa REM ALARM C • 27 P7 O11 • NC • 28 mma is O MANS MOM a NO • 28 1 • AC In O AN" • � C • 30 2 • AC SOCI O 0 m NO • 3 • BAT+ • 4 • COM • S • AUX+ • i®-----------.- _----® ® WI n OPTIONAL O i RM4 MCOULE O —<+P=21VW + - + SEE MAWAL eAtr n sAn Poet ALL WIRING IS SUPERVISED EXCEPT RELAY AND AUX +24V out. INSTALL WIRING PER THE MANUAL LIMITATIONS. s1C+ + N DETECTOR CIRCUITS HAVE COUNTING ZONE CAPABILITY. 120 VACt I x D N o P7 CIRCUITS ARE NON-POWER LIMITED. AC Oona" ARC5 - (C sr I I 5"+ + 210 VAC 2 2 175E OILY2.201. I x-Fanr I o 208 YAC S CK OPTION , sm- LJ C AC NEUTRAL STANOOFi avas FORM NO.D2002 Copyright 0 1996 by Fike Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A. SYS TEM SEA ISOR Photoelectric Smoke Detectors 31 System Sensor i3'"series smoke detectors represent ;'� ' significant advancement in conventional detection. The i3 family is founded on three principles:installation TM ease,intelligence,and instant inspection. Features Installation ease.The 1-3 line redefines installation ease with its •Plug-in detector line,mounting base included plug-in design.This allows an installer to pre-wire bases(included with heads).The large wire entry port and in-line terminals provide Large wire entry port ample room for neatly routing the wiring inside the base.The base •In-line terminals with SEMS screws accommodates a variety of back box mounting methods as well as •Mounts to octagonal and single-gang back boxes,4-square back direct mounting with drywall anchors.To complete the installation,i3 boxes,or direct to ceiling heads plug into the base with a simple Stop-Drop'N Lock'action. •Stop-Drop'N Lock attachment to base Intelligence.13 detectors offer a number of intelligent features •Removable detector cover and chamber to simplify testing and maintenance.Drift compensation and •Built-in remote maintenance signaling smoothing algorithms are standard with the i3 line to minimize nuisance alarms.2-wire i3 detectors can generate a remote LED- indicated maintenance signal when connected to the 2W-MOD2 •Simplified sensitivity measurement loop test/maintenance module or a panel equipped with the i3 •Wide-angle,dual-color LED indication protocol.The SENS-RDR,a wireless device,displays the sensitivityof i3 Loop testing via EZ Walk detectors in terms of percent-per-foot obscuration. • •Built-in test switch Instant inspection.The i3 series provides wide-angle red and green LED indicators for instant inspection of the detector's condition:normal standby,out-of-sensitivity,alarm,or freeze trouble. When connected to the 2W-MOD2 loop test/maintenance module or a panel with the i3 protocol,the EZ Walk loop test feature is available on 2-wire 13 detectors.This feature verifies the initiating loop wiring by providing LED status indication at each detector. Agency Listings UL <Fnn > • MEA MSFM LISTED � approved approved 0_ 5911 3011446 7272-1653:152 290-01-E 2093 3180932 Smoke Detector Specifications Smoke detector shall be a System Sensor P Series model number listed to Underwriters Laboratories UL 268 for Fire Protection Signaling Systems.The detector shall be a photoelectric type(Model 2W-B,4W-B)or a combination photoelectric/thermal(Model 2WT-B,4WT-B)with thermal sensor rated at 135°F (57.2*C).The detector shall include a mounting base for mounting to 31/-inch and flinch octagonal,single-gang,and 4-inch square back boxes with a plaster ring,or direct mount to the ceiling using drywall anchors.Wiring connections shall be made by means of SEMS screws.The detector shall allow pre-wiring of the base and the head shall be a plug-in type.The detector shall have a nominal sensitivity of 2.5 percent-per-foot nominal as measured in the UL smoke box.The detector shall be capable of automatically adjusting its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algodthms.The detector shall provide dual- color LED indication that blinks to indicate power up,normal standby,out of sensitivity,alarm,and freeze trouble(Model 2WT-B,4WT-B)conditions.When used in conjunction with the 2W-MOD2 module,2-wire models shall include a maintenance signal to indicate the need for maintenance at the alarm control panel and shall provide a loop testing capability to verify the circuit without testing each detector individually. Operating Voltage Nominal: 12/24V non-polarized Minimum: 85V Maximum:35V Maximum Ripple Voltage 30%peak to peak of applied voltage Standby Current 2-wire:50 NA maximum average;4-wire:50 NA maximum average Maximum Alarm Current 2-wire:130 mA limited by control panel;4-wire.20 mA @12 V 23 mA @ 24 V Peak Standby Current 2-wire:100 lj&-4-wire:n/a Alarm Contact Ratings 2-wire:n/a;4-wirc-.0-5 A @ 30 V AC/DC Dimensions(including base) a 5.3 inches(127 mm)diameter,2.0 inches(51 mm)height Weight 6.3 oz(178 g) Operating Temperature Range 2W-B and 4W-B:32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49*C);2WT-B and 4WT-B:32°F to 100°F(0°C to 37.8°C) Operating Humidity Range 0 to 95%RH non-condensing Thermal Sensor 135°F(57.2°C)fixed Freeze Trouble 2WT-B and 4WT-B only:417(5°C) Sensitivity 25%/ft nominal Input Terminals 14 to 22 AWG Mounting 31/2-inch octagonal back box 4-inch octagonal back box Single-gang back box 4-inch square back box with a plaster ring Direct mount to ceiling W5mm ME 0 I`E "MIRM �i LED Mode Green LED Red LED Condition Duration Power up Blink every 10 seconds Blink every 10 seconds Initial LED status indication 80 seconds Normal(standby) Blink every 5 seconds Off Out of sensitivity Off Blink every 5 seconds Freeze trouble Off Blink every 10 seconds Alarm off Solid Ordering Information 2W-B No 2-wire 130 mA max limited by control panel 2WT-B Yes 2-wire 130 mA max limited by control panel 4W-B No 4-wire 20 mA @ 12 V,23 mA @ 24 V 4WT-B Yes 4-Wire 20 mA @ 12 V,23 mA @ 24V Accessories 2W-MOD2 2-wire loop test/maintenance module RT Removal/replacement tool SENS-RDR Sensitivity reader A77-AB2 Retrofit adapter bracket,6.6 inch(16.76 cm)diameter. OM System Smwn 3825 Ohio Avenue-St.Charles,IL 60174 Pmdua sMaficau =ubjm W�ge WiM=�e VM V M fm �t podw hf—nkn hiducfing the la"�-mw of ths data 0�. SENSOR, Phone:800-SENSOR2-Fax:630-377-6495 A05-0318-M7.6/09-82169 CONVENTIONAL FIRE CONTROLACCESSORY SILENT PS-DA and PS-SA KNIGHT Conventional Pull-stations m by Honeywell Easy to Install and Operate The PS-DA/PS-SA Pull Stations are non-coded manual pull stations which provide a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)with a single alarm initiating input signal.The PS-DA/PS-SA pull stations includes both single-action and dual-action models equipped with key lock/reset. It was designed to meet multiple applications with the installer and end-user in mind. Its innovative design, durable construction, and multiple mounting options make the PS- DA and PS-SA simple to install, maintain, and operate. Operation The single-action pull-station is activated by a single pull-down of ..�� the alarm handle.The dual-action1 versions require pushing in the #ACTlV/aTED+' handle, then pulling the handlePUSH IN ., down for activation.The PS- DOWN �f " DA/PS-SA manual pull stations are UL listed and meet the ADA ° requirement of a 5-lbs. maximum pull force to activate.Operating instructions are molded into the handle along with Braille text. / Molded terminal numbers can be found adjacent to the wiring termi- / nals. Models: PS-DA PS-DASP PS-SA—Single action with 'pigtail' Features: Specification: connections and a key lock reset. - UL Listed Dimensions: Pigtail wires are provided for con- Height: 5-1/2°(13.97 cm) nection to the Fire Alarm Control CSFM Listed width: a^(10.16 cm) Panel's (FACP)initiation circuit. Meets ADA requirements Depth: 1-7/16"(3.65 cm) Operating instructions are mold- Operating PS-DA—Dual action model with ed into the handle along with temperature: 32-F to 120'F screw terminal connections and a Braille text. (0-C to 49-C) key lock reset. - Made of durable Lexan Electrical: PS-DAH—Same as PS-DA except - Available in Spanish switch contact p Rating: 0.25 A @ 30 VAC with hex lock reset. - Key resettable or VDC PS-DALOB—Same as PS-DA with - Easy to Install and operate Accessories: "outdoor use" listing. Includes SB- - Single or dual action SB-I/O Surface Mount 1/0 backbox and sealing gasket. - Surface mount box available Back-box PS-DASP—Same as PS-DA BG-TR Trim Ring except with both English and Spanish operating instructions. CONVENTIONAL FIRE CONTROLPANEL ACCESSORY PS-DA and PS-SA Conventional Pull-Stations Engineering Specification Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non-code,with a key-operated reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so designed that after actual Emergency Operation, they cannot be restored to normal except by use of a key.An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected as activated. Manual stations shall be constructed of red colored LEXAN®(or polycarbonate equivalent)with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover.The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in white letters, 1.00 inches (25.4 mm)or larger.*Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching back-box SBA 0; or semi-flush mounting on a standard single-gang, double-gang, or 4" (10.16 cm)square electrical box, and shall be installed within the limits defined by the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA)or per national/local require- ments. Manual Stations shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed. *NOTE:The words"FIRE/FUEGO"on the PS-DASP shall appear on the front of the station in white letters, approximately 3/4" high. t+ACU TED 0 � III fi��ay, r4 �L I PS-SA Front View PS-DA Front View PS-SA Rear View PS-DA Rear View SILENT This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes.We try to MADE IN AMERICA ® KNIGHT keep our product information up-to-date and accurate.We cannot cover all speck applications or anticipate all requirements.All specifications are sub- P/N 350241 Rev.D ject to change without notice.For more information,contact Silent Knight 12 ©2011 Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell Clintonville Road Northford,CT 06472-1610 Phone:(800)328-0103, Fax:(203)484-7118.www.slientknight.com \ l l p C IA17" l a" Q' 3 a - zs., N a >� potgw ® ® / T n ss x�r Models Available sk DH100ACDC14wire Ionization Detector ' DH100ACDCP 4-wire Photoelectronic Detector E� �ET v�bl L a E: �" l +sem •E ��'�1� Features • Outside mounting tabs System Sensor DH100ACDC 4-wire duct duct smoke • Telescoping sampling tube* detector is available as either an ionization or • Built-in reset button photoelectric model. This new design allows for simplified • Interconnectability* for multi-fan shutdown (up to ten cleaning and maintenance, or a change in application air handlers) without removing the duct housing.The DH100ACDC • Cover tamper trouble signal* samples air currents passing through a duct and gives • Easy to clean dependable performance for management of fans,blowers, • 24 VAC/DC or 120/240 VAC operation and air conditioning systems,preventing the spread of • High-Low voltage barrier tonic smoke and fire gases through the protected area. • Ion or photo models available • Remote test station option WARNING:Duct smoke detectors have specific limitations. • Remote sounder option DUCT DETECTORS ARE: • Air velocity rating from 500 to 4000 FPM • Equipped with two DPDT Form C relay contacts NOT a substitute for an open area smoke detector, • Easy and quick mounting to round or rectangular ducts NOT a substitute for early warning detection, and from 1'-12'wide NOT a replacement for a building's regular fire • Textured cover for convenient visual inspection detection system. • UL 268A listed • 3-year warranty Refer to NFPA 72 and 90A for additional duct detector application information. Specifications Length: 143/8 inches (14 cm.) Operating Depth: 23/4 inches (7 cm.) Humidity Range: 10% to 93% relative humidity Shipping Weight: 3.75 lbs. (1.7 kg.) noncondensing Operating Air Duct Velocity: 500 to 4000 ft./min. Temperature Range: 230 to 131° F (-51 to 55° C) * Patent pending ®System Sensor 1/98 This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. A05-977-00 Architectural/Engineering Specifications The air duct smoke detector shall be a System Sensor for Duct Applications.The housing shall be capable of Model DH100ACDC Series Duct Smoke Detector. The mounting to either rectangular or round ducts without detector housing shall be UL listed per UL 268A adapter brackets.An integral filter system shall be specifically for use in air handling systems.The detector included to reduce dust and residue effects on detector shall operate at air velocities of 500 feet per minute to and housing,thereby reducing maintenance and servicing. 4000 feet per minute.The unit shall be capable of Sampling tubes shall either be telescoping or be easily controlling up to ten (10) air handling systems when installed by passing.through the duct housing after the interconnected with other detectors. The detector shall be housing is mounted to the duct.The unit shall provide a capable of providing a trouble signal in the event that the spacial separation of no less than 1/4"and/or a physical front cover is removed. It shall be capable of local testing barrier between the high and low voltage terminals. The via magnetic switch or remote testing using the enlosure shall meet all applicable NEC and NFPA RTS451KEY Remote Test Station. The unit shall be reset by standards regarding electrical junction boxes.Terminal local reset button or remote test station.The duct detector connections shall be of the strip and clamp method housing shall incorporate an airtight smoke chamber in suitable for 12-18 AWG wiring. compliance with UL 268A, Standard for Smoke Detectors Electrical Ratings - DH100ACDC (Includes Detector) Power supply voltage: 20-29 VDC 24 VAC 50-60-Hz 120 VAC 50-60 Hz 220/240 VAC 50-60 Hz Input capacitance: 270µF max. 270µF max. N/A N/A Reset voltage: 3.0 VDC min. 2.0 VAC min. 10 VAC min. 20 VAC min. Reset time (with RTS451): .03 to 0.3 sec. .03 to 0.3 sec. .03 to 0.3 sec. .03 to 0.3 sec. Reset time (by power down): 0.6 sec. max. 0.6 sec. max. 0.6 sec. max. 0.6 sec. max. Power up time: 34 sec. max. 34 sec. max. 34 sec. max. 34 sec. max. Alarm response time: 2 to 17 sec. 2 to 17 sec. 2 to 17 sec. 2 to 17 sec. Sensitivity Test: See detector label See detector label See detector label See detector label Power Supply Voltage 20-29 VDC 24 VAC 50-60 Hz 120 VAC 50-60 Ha 220/240 VAC 50-60 Ha CURRENT REQUIREMENTS(USING NO ACCESSORIES) Max.standby current 15 mA 35 mA RMS 25 mA RMS' 15 mA RMS' Max.alarm current 70 mA 125 mA RMS 35 mA RMS' 25 mA RMS' CONTACT RATINGS ACCESSORY CURRENT LOADS AT 24 VDC Alar Initiation contacts(SPST) 2.OA @ 30 VDC(resistive) DEVICE STANDBY ALARM Alar auxiliary contacts(DPDT) 10A @ 30 VDC APA451 12.5mA Max.30MA Max. 1 OA @ 250 VAC PA400 OmA 15mA Max. Note:Alar auxillary contacts must switch 100 mA minimum at 5VDC.Alar auxiliary contacts shall not be RA40OZ OmA 10mA Max. connected to Inititaing circuits of control panels.Use the alar Initiation contact for this purpose. RTS4611 RTS451 KEY 12mA 7.5mA Max. NOTE:When a unit Is powered at the 120VAC or 2201240VAC Input,any Trouble contacts(SPOT) Z.OA 30 VDC(resistive) combination of accessories may be used such that the given accessory loads are: 60 mA or lase In the standby state, 110 mA or less in the alar state. Page 2 A05-977-00 DH100ACDC Wiring Guide -------------- ------------- AVAILABLE POWER INPUTS I I AVAILABLE POWER INPUTS I CONNECT POWER SOURCE ACCEPT NALS 4 VBAC 5p.g0 I 3 10 A B C I I 8 10 A B C I OF EEAACCHDDETECTOR SEES 1120 VA�O HZ.OR I I I `,(\'�J `,(\�) I SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONNECT POWER SOURCE I I �+ Y ADO FORMATION. SUPPLY LLL L I L J L I INFORMATION. OP EACH DE�TECCTTOa.�INALs I 24V �� I I zav V� I I 220/140 I I 720!240 I FOR WIR MIRING OF AUXILIARY VAC VAC DEVICES REFER TO ALARM AUXILIARY CONTACTS I I ALARM AUXILIARY CONTACTS I INSSTTUALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR FAN SHUTDOWN,ETC. I FOR FAN SHUTDOWN,ETC. I pR CONTACT MANUFACTURER AUX.CONTACT RATINGS I 18 S 17 7 1S S I I 1B B 17 7 18 S I 10A 30 VDC RE8ISTME I I NOTE:THE SUPERVISORY RELAY NOW 10A 250 VA M C9 5 VDC ///��� ///''��� PROVIDES SUP RM S CONTACT FOR CO 2SO VAC OR I � CUSTOM12ED APPLICATIONS. NOT INTENDED F I N.O C. N.O. ?%- ALARM C. .C. I I N.C. C. N.O. O. C. I FOR STANDARD APPLICATIONS,ONLY CONNECTION TO CONTROL I I PANELS. I I THE TIO'CONTACT IS USED II I I AUXILIARY CONTACTS SHOWN IN I I ALARM AUXILIARY CONTACTS SHOWN IN I NNTACTS BANSFER DUPJNG STANDBY. NDIAALARM AS INDICATED E ARROWS. ALARM AS INDICATED TRANSFERACTS E ARROWS. TROUB�E V�.grNG I SUPERVISORY TROUBLE CONTACTS i I SUPERVISORY TROUBLE CONTACTSZIJA 3 14 I I 3 14 I I I I I F D�ORP�OWERO�P�WYEO OR WI�PI TA RFEATURE T@dE80UT.OPEN REM DOR WIB?1 TdE80UTOPENMACB 610NAL TROUBLE fANDR10N TO PANEL CONIACTB 6.�ONAL TROUBLE CONDITION TO PANEL + I I I I I I 4 4 I ALARM ALARM CONTACTS SHOWN ALARM OPEN IN SHOWN INITIATION INITIATION OPEN IN STANDBY. INITIATION OPEN N TANDBY. LOOP \ 'CONTACTS a IN ALARM. E CONTACTS S IN ALA CONTACTS I I -------------I -------------I I UL LISTED 4-WIRE FIRST DETECTOR IN THE LOOP LAST DETECTOR IN THE LOOP EOL RESISTOR 6PECIFIED BY cc NTRCL PANEL OH103ACDC DH100ACDC PANEL MANUFACTURER System wiring diagram for 4-wire duct smoke detectors(detectors powered from Initiating circuit) DH100ACDC APA451 Alarm Signal 15 2 Alarm Aux.Power+ 19 Sup.N.O. 14 3 Power DH100ACDC RTS451KEY Alarm Signal 15 1 (Red LED)Alarm Sup.COM 3 Aux.Power+ 19 6 (Green LED)Power Aux.Power— 20 1 Common Sup.N.O. 14 2 Common Sup.COM 3 3 Reset NOTE: Wiring diagram shown Is for DH100ACDC 4-wire duct dectector system equipped without a control panel. Aux.Power— 20 4 Common Reset 2 Wiring diagram for DH100ACDC to APA451 s Test Test 11 Interconnect+ 0: NOTE: Wiring diagram shown is for DH100ACDC 4-wire duct Interconnect— 1 detector system equipped without a control panel. DH100ACDC 12 1 Wiring diagram for DH100ACDC to RTS451KEY and Interconnect feature Page 3 A05-977-00 Ordering Information Part No. Description RTS451KEY Remote test station with key lock(see below) DH100ACDCI 4-wire ionization duct detector RTS451 Remote test station A DH100ACDCP 4-wire photoelectronic duct detector APA451 Remote annunciator with piezo alarm A5052-00 Replacement ionization sensor board MOD40OR Sensitivity test module A5069-00 Replacement photoelectronic sensor head RA40OZ Remote annunciator alarm LED (see below) A5064-00 4-wire power board F36-09-00 Replacement air filters (two per package) Accessories M02-04-00 Test magnet ST-1.5 Metal sampling tube duct widths 1'-2' P48-21-00 End cap for metal sampling tubes ST-3 Metal sampling tube duct widths 2'-4' S08-39-01 Photo replacement screen ST-5 Metal sampling tube duct widths 4'-8' PA400B Mini-Alert sounder ST-10 Metal sampling tube duct widths 8'-12' PS24LOB Mini-Alert add-on strobe T80-71-00 Replacement telescoping sampling tube PS12/24LENSC Ceiling-mount"SMOKE"lens P48-55-00 Replacement end cap for T80-71-00 PS12/24LENSW Wall-mount"SMOKE"lens Accessories System Sensor provides system flexibility with a variety of annunciation. As with our duct detectors,all duct detector accessories, including two remote test stations,and several accessories are UL listed. different means of visible and audible system _ E I B0 � `® F_t�v E B 0 B APA451 RTS451KEY PA400 with RTS451 RA40OZ Piezo Remote Test PS24LOW Add-on Strobe Remote Test Remote Annunciator Station with Key (PS12/24LENSW Station Annunciator (UL 54011) (UL S2522) smoke lens option available) (UL S2522) (UL S2522) (UL S3593) System Sensor Worldwide Manufacturing & Distribution In Canada: In the Far Fast: In Italy: In the United Kingdom: Telephone:905-812-0767 Telephone:852-2191-9003 Telephone:39-40-9490-111 Telephone:44-1403-276500 Fax:905-812-0771 Fax:852-2736-6580 Fax:39-40-382137 Fax:44-1403-276501 In China: In India: In Singapore- Telephone:852-2191-9003 ingapore:Telephone:852-2191-9003 Telefax:91-022-8202564 Telephone:65-273-2230 Fax:852-2736-6580 Fax:65-273-2610 Page 4 A05-977-00 PROJECT MANUAL 1 ' PREPARED FOR: --- lqdA 7 UNIVERSITY �I DATA CENTER RENOVATION ' JAMES G. GARNER HALL 11300 NE 2ND AvENuE MIAMI SHORES, FL 33,161-6695 PREPARED BY: - JUL 3 204BY: 999 NEW DURHAM ROAD EDISON,NJ 08817 BRUNS-PAK PROJECT#9707-2 ISSUED FOR PERMIT/BID: JUNE 25, 2014 tPROJECT MANUAL for DATA CENTER RENOVATION BARRY UNIVERSITY JAMES G.GARNER HALL 11300 NE 2ND AVENUE MIAMI SHORES,FL 33161-6695 ' Issued for Owner Review: June 25,2014 TABLE OF CONTENTS ' DIVISION 00—PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS PAGES Document00 010 1: Project Title Page...............................................................................................................l Document00 01 07: Seals Page..........................................................................................................................1 Document 00 01 15: List of Drawing Sheets.......................................................................................................2 ' DIVISION O1—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 00: Summary.... ' Section 01 23 00: Alternates..................................................................................................................................2 Section 0125 00: Substitution Procedures............................................................................................................3 Section 01 31 00: Project Management and Coordination....................................................................................7 Section 01 31 20: Mechanical and Electrical Coordination....................... 4 Section 0133 00: Submittal Procedures..............................................................................................................12 Section 01 41 00: Regulatory Requirements....................................................................................................... 2 Section 01 50 14: Temporary Facilities and Controls,Alterations........................................................................6 t Section 0173 29: Cutting&Patching ..................................................................................................................5 Section 0173 50: Unloading and Rigging.............................................................................................................2 Section 0174 14: Computer Room Cleaning........................................................................................................3 Section 01 74 19: Construction Waste Management and Disposal.......................................................................2 Section 01 77 00• Closeout Procedures ... ...................................................................................................6 Section 0178 23: Operation and Maintenance Data..............................................................................................3 Section 0178 36: Warranties and Guarantees.......................................................................................................3 Section 0178 39: Project Record Documents.......................................................................................................3 ' Section 0178 43: Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials....................................................................................2 Section 01 91 13: General Commissioning Requirements....................................................................................2 ' DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 84 13: Penetration Firestopping...........................................................................................................6 DIVISION 08-OPENINGS Section 08 11 13: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames .............................................................................................6 ' Section 08 7100: Door Hardware ........................................................................................................................8 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -i- i DMSION 09—FINISHES PAGES ' Section 09 26 00: Gypsum Wallboard Systems.....................................................................................................3 Section09 65 50: Vinyl Base................................................................................................................................2 Section 09 69 00: Access Flooring........................................................................................................................7 Section 09 90 00: Painting&Finishing.................................................................................................................5 Section 09 9100: Concrete Floor Sealer...............................................................................................................3 DIVISION 21—FIRE SUPPRESSION ' Section Requirements ltSuppression Work ................................................................ Section 14 0Commonsus for Fire Suppression...........................................................................9 Section 2105 0• pe Testing... ................. ...........................................................................................2 1 Section 2109 00: Supports&Anchors.................................................................................................................4 Section 2150 50: HFC-125(FE-25)Suppression System....................................................................................7 ' Section 2199 10: Testing and Approval...............................................................................................................1 DIVISION 23-HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING ' Section 23 00 10: General Requirements for Mechanical Work ........................................................................14 Section 23 05 00: Common Work Results for HVAC....................................................................................... 12 , Section 23 05 10: Acceptance Testing...................................................................................................................2 Section 23 05 19: Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping....................................................................................17 Section 23 05 23: General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping ..................................................................................9 Section 23 05 53: Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.................................................................... 5 ' Section 23 05 93: Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing for HVAC........................................................................ 4 Section 23 09 00: Supports and Anchors ..............................................................................................................5 Section23 17 00: Motors.................................................................................................................................... 4 Section 23 21 13: Hydronic Piping......................................................................................................................13 ' Section 23 2133: Hydronic Specialties .............................................................................................................. 7 Section23 23 00: Refrigerant Piping...................................................................................................................l l Section 23 24 20: Vibration Isolation ................................................................................................................. 4 ' Section 23 25 00: Piping Insulation..................................................................................................................... 4 Section 23 63 13: Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers..........................................................................................6 Section 23 77 55: In-Row Cooler(DX).................................................................................................................6 Section23 99 10: Testing and Approval...............................................................................................................1 DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL Section 26 00 10: General Requirements for Electrical Work.............................................................................14 , Section 26 00 15: Electrical Alteration Provisions................................................................................................3 Section 26 05 00: Common Work Results For Electrical Work............................................................................3 ' Section 26 05 10: Acceptance Testing...................................................................................................................3 Section 26 05 19: Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables............................................................7 Section 26 05 23: Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables.................................................................................8 Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.......................................................................4 ' Section 26 05 29: Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems...........................................................................5 Section 26 05 33: Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems..........................................................................11 Section 26 05 36: Cable Trays for Electrical Systems...........................................................................................6 Section 26 05 44: Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling...............................................3 ' Section 26 05 48: Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems............................................................6 Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems.........................................................................................8 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -ii- i 1 DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL PAGES Section 26 05 73: Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Stud .................................................. Section26 24 16: Panelboards...............................................................................................................................6 Section26 27 26: Wiring Devices.........................................................................................................................6 ' Section 26 28 16: Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers..................................................................................4 Section 26 43 13: Lightning&Surge Protection Unit...........................................................................................4 Section26 5100: Interior Lighting........................................................................................................................7 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL 1 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 1 S,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL DIVISION 00—PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REOUIREMENTS PAGES ' Document 00 010 1: Project Title Page...............................................................................................................I Document00 01 07: Seals Page..........................................................................................................................1 Document 00 01 15: List of Drawing Sheets.......................................................................................................2 a 1 1 1 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANU SHORES,FL - 1 DOCUMENT 00 010 1 -PROJECT TITLE PAGE PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 1—Permit/Bid Set Data Center Renovation B University James G.Garner Hall 11300 NE 2nd Avenue Miami Shores,FL 33161-6695 ' Architect/Engineer Project No. 9707-2 ' BRUNS-PAK 999 New Durham Road Edison,NJ 08817 Phone: 732-248-4455 ' Fax: 732-393-0328 Web Site: www.bruns-nak.com ' Issued: June 25,2014 Copyright©2014,BRUNS-PAK. All rights reserved. ' END OF DOCUMENT 00 01 01 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 1 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 2 5,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - DOCUMENT 00 0107- SEALS PAGE 1.01 DESIGN PROFESSIONALSO F RECORD ARCHITECT Warren T.Widawsky,R.A. AR93994 Division 01,Division 07,Division 08, .� Division 09 J 1 1 FIRE- Joshua A.Tiner,P.E. 4010V ♦♦ A'.T�/� PROTECTION/ 74234 ♦ ��.''�,�G E NS'L`l�•.0 HVAC/ Division 21,Division 23,Division 26 * No 74234 ELECTRICAL ENGINEER * ' ' STATE OF • ' O' •�,,,'��s�` set • END OF DOCUMENT 00 0107 1 1 1 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 ' NIIANU SHORES,FL - 1 - t t DOCUMENT 00 01 15-LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 1.01 LIST OF DRAWINGS A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled Permit/Bid dated June 25,2014, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications. B. List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of type indicated: t1 DESCRIPTION CS COVER SHEET t __.._..............__.._o....--.._.._.. ---......_..._---............_._.....–.......- --- ARCHITECTURAL A-000 ARCHITECTURAL LEGENDS,ABBREVIATIONS&GENERAL NOTES t ............................._........................_..._ A-100 ARCHITECTURAL EQUIPMENT PLANS .. ..................... ......... ................................_........ ........_......._........ .............. _._ A-200 NOT USED _........—_...........<................_....................__....__._....._................ .........................---------------..........................................................._........._....................-- -._..................................—......................... .........A-300 ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLANS —_..................._......_ A-400 ARCHITECTURAL ACCESS FLOOR PLANS&DETAILS ----—........... --._._........__.�__..__. —._----............... A-401 ARCHITECTURAL PARTITION TYPES AND DOOR DETAILS —_.............'._...._ ......._.........................—_.........-----_. ....................._........................----- MECHANICAL M-000 MECHANICAL LEGENDS,ABBREVIATIONS&GENERAL NOTES M7091 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES — M-100 MECHANICAL SINGLE LINE&CONTROL DIAGRAMS .............._ ...__...... ......._........_......__....._...--.........._......_.... _._...__. ._...........----....__...................-- MD110 MECHANICAL DEMOLIITON PIPING PLAN __... ...._......_.............. ......._...._.__......-............_ ..._.._..........._. ............... ....................... ..._._........... .......__ M-110 MECHANICAL PIPING PLAN —.._......._..........._.__......_..........................- ..._.._...................._ ......--.._..................—..._.__.....................-....—._._................_.—_..........................–......._–............................ __. M-200 MECHANICAL DUCTWORK PLAN t ..........__. .._......;.._ _........._._...__..._.._...._._....----.........._..---..........._ _............._. ...............----...........-----._........................... _ M-300 MECHANICAL DETAILS FIRE PROTECTION M FP-000 FIRE PROTECTION LEGENDS ABBREVIATIONS&GENERAL NOTES FP-100 FIRE PROTECTION PLANS&DETAILS t FIRE DETECTION _.......... FD-100 FIRE DETECTION PLANS,NOTES&DETAILS BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION , OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAIVII SHORES FL - 1 - t DOCUMENT 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS DANIG. DESCRIPTION ' ELECTRICAL E-000 ELECTRICAL LEGENDS,ABBREVIATIONS,GENERAL NOTES&SCHEDULES E-100 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAM �� , E-200 ELECTRICAL POWER PLANS E-210 ELECTRICAL COMPUTER POWER PLAN E-300 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLANS E-400 NOT USED E-500 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING,LEAK DETECTION,EPO&SECURITY PLANS ...._........._.................................._...._..._. __............._.._..._............................._..._..--- ---.._...._..---._..._._..._................_._...............................---......._ E-600 NOT USED E-700 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES END OF DOCUMENT 00 01 15 , i t BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- i DMSION 01—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGES rSection 01 10 00: Summary...................................................................................................................................5 Section01 23 00: Alternates..................................................................................................................................2 Section 012100: Substitution Procedures............................................................................................................3 Section 01 31 00: Project Management and Coordination....................................................................................7 Section 01 31 20: Mechanical and Electrical Coordination...................................................................................4 Section 0133 00: Submittal Procedures..............................................................................................................12 Section 01 41 00: Regulatory Requirements.........................................................................................................2 Section 0150 14: Temporary Facilities and Controls,Alterations........................................................................6 Section0173 29: Cutting&Patching ..................................................................................................................5 Section 0173 50: Unloading and Rigging.............................................................................................................2 ' Section 0174 14: Computer Room Cleaning............................................................................................ 3 Section 01 74 19: Construction Waste Management and Disposal.......................................................................2 Section 0177 00: Closeout Procedures.................................................................................................................6 Section 0178 23: Operation and Maintenance Data..............................................................................................3 ' Section 0178 36: Warranties and Guarantees.......................................................................................................3 Section 0178 39: Project Record Documents.......................................................................................................3 Section 0178 43: Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials....................................................................................2 ' Section 01 91 13: General Commissioning Requirements....................................................................................2 r r r i 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL, - 1 - t SECTION 01 10 00-SUMMARY PART1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work by Owner. 1 5. Work by Others. 6. Purchase contracts. 7. Access to site. 8. Use of Premises. 9. Coordination with occupants. 10. Work restrictions. 11. Specification and drawing conventions. B. Related Requirements: 1. 01 31 00"Project Management and Coordination." 2. 0150 14"Temporary Facilities and Controls,Alterations." 1.02 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Data Center Renovation 1. Project Location: Barry University,James G. Garner Hall, 11300 NE Second Avenue,Miami Shores, FL 33161 2. Owner: Barry University 3. Owner's Representative: Jeffrey Yao,305-899-3995,JYao@bgm.edu B. Architect/Engineer: BRUNS-PAK 999 New Durham Road ' Edison,NJ 08817 Tel: 732-248-4455 1.03 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: Renovation and expansion of the existing Data Center in Two Phases. The space in the Data Center is approximately 570 Sq.Ft.Mechanical equipment will be placed on an adjacent roof. B. Summary Description of Work: 1. Work of this proposed Contract comprises required selective demolition, removal, and construction to perform the entire scope of work as described on the drawings and in these specifications. 2. General Scope of General/Architectural Construction Work: a. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,tools, equipment, supervision,taxes, etc.to perform the work generally described as "General/Architectural Construction" as depicted on the referenced drawings and described herein. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to furnishing, delivering, handling, installing,testing, and certifying the performance of all the materials,except as otherwise noted for the following: 1) The new General Construction, Demolition, and Architectural work as described in the Architectural drawings. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY 2) Complete demolition,removal,and disposal of all existing items to be removed. 3) Coordination of the work with all other trades to facilitate the proper and timely completion of the work. b. Obtaining any and all necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to the City of Miami Shores and the State of Florida. c. Furnishing and installing any other equipment or appurtenances to form a complete facility. d. Trade related work shall include,but is not limited to the following: 1) Cutting,patching,core drilling,and demolition(if applicable) 2) Performing work during normal and off-shift hours as required to comport with the schedule. Work which involves disruption of public utility service shall be performed at such times as the utility may require without additional cost to the contract. 3. General Scope of Mechanical/Plumbing Work: a. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,tools, equipment, supervision,taxes, etc. to perform the work entitled "Mechanical", as depicted on the referenced drawings and described herein. The work includes,but is not necessarily limited to furnishing,delivering, handling,installing,testing,and certifying the performance of all necessary equipment,except as otherwise noted for the following: 1) The work specifically includes plumbing, HVAC, and mechanical work, as depicted on the Mechanical drawings and further described herein. 2) Coordination of the work with all other trades to facilitate the proper and timely completion of the work. , b. Obtaining any and all necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction,including but not limited to the City of Miami Shores and the State of Florida C. ' d. Furnishing and installing any other equipment or appurtenances to form a complete system. e. Trade related work shall include,but is not limited to the following: 1) Cutting,patching,core drilling,and demolition(if applicable) 2) Performing work during normal and off-shift hours as required to comport with the ' schedule. Work which involves disruption of public utility service shall be performed at such times as the utility may require without additional cost to the contract. f. All above work shall be closely coordinated with building operations, owner, and all trades. Do not shut down any system unless authorized by building operation's personnel. 4. General Scope of Electrical Work: a. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supervision,taxes, etc. to perform the work entitled "Electrical", as depicted on the referenced drawings and described herein. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to furnishing, delivering, handling, installing, testing, and certifying the performance of all necessary equipment, except as otherwise noted for the following: 1) The work specifically includes electrical work,as depicted on the Electrical drawings and further described herein. 2) Related demolition,termination,and modification of existing utilities. 3) Coordination of the work with all other trades to facilitate the proper and timely completion of the work. ' b. Obtaining any and all necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to the local utility company,City of Miami Shores and the State of Florida. C. ' d. Furnishing and installing any other equipment or appurtenances to form a complete system. e. Trade related work shall include,but is not limited to the following: 1) Cutting,patching,core drilling,and demolition(if applicable) 2) Performing work during normal and off-shift hours as required to comport with the schedule. Work which involves disruption of public utility service shall be performed at such times as the utility may require without additional cost to the contract. 5. General Scope of Fire Protection Work: a. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,tools, equipment, supervision,taxes, etc. to perform the work entitled "Fire Protection", as depicted on the referenced drawings and BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY described herein. The work includes,but is not necessarily limited to furnishing, delivering, handling,installing,testing,and certifying the performance of all necessary equipment,except as otherwise noted for the following: 1) The work specifically includes fire protection work, as depicted on the Fire Protection drawings and further described herein. 2) Related demolition, termination, and removal and relocation as required to maintain operation. 3) Coordination of the work with all other trades to facilitate the proper and timely completion of the work. b. Obtaining any and all necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction,including but not limited to the City of Miami Shores and the State of Florida. c. Furnishing and installing any other equipment or appurtenances to form a complete system. d. Trade related work shall include,but is not limited to the following: 1) Cutting,patching,core drilling,and demolition(if applicable) 2) Performing work during normal and off-shift hours as required to comport with the schedule. Work which involves disruption of public utility service shall be performed at such times as the utility may require without additional cost to the contract. 6. General Scope of Fire Detection Work: a. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supervision,taxes, etc.to ' perform the work entitled "Fire Detection", as depicted on the referenced drawings and described herein. The work includes,but is not necessarily limited to furnishing, delivering, handling,installing,testing,and certifying the performance of all necessary equipment,except as otherwise noted for the following: 1) The work specifically includes fire detection work, as depicted on the Fire Detection drawings and further described herein. 2) Related demolition, termination, and removal and relocation as required to maintain operation. 3) Coordination of the work with all other trades to facilitate the proper and timely completion of the work. b. Obtaining any and all necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction,including but not limited to the City of Miami Shores and the State of Florida. c. Furnishing and installing any other equipment or appurtenances to form a complete system. d. Trade related work shall include,but is not limited to the following: 1) Cutting,patching,core drilling,and demolition(if applicable) 2) Performing work during normal and off-shift hours as required to comport with the schedule. Work which involves disruption of public utility service shall be performed at such times as the utility may require without additional cost to the contract. C. PHASED CONSTRUCTION The Work shall be conducted in two (2) phases, with each phase substantially complete as indicated: 1. Phase One (1): Renovation of existing Printer room #248, including installation of Mechanical Heat Rejection equipment on adjacent roof.Work of this phase shall commence immediately after the Notice to Proceed and be substantially complete and ready for occupancy at time of Substantial Completion for the Work of this phase. 2. Phase Two (2): Renovation of current Data Center, Room #249. The remaining Work shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy at time of Substantial Completion for the Work of this Phase. D. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates,and move-out and -in dates of Owner's personnel for all phases of the Work. E. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion of each Phase. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3 - SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY 1. Installation of computer hardware and network infrastructure. 1.04 ACCESS TO SITE ' A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weather-tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.05 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to , Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. B. COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and , adjacent areas of existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways,corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written ' permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify Owner not less than seventy-two(72)hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 3. Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1.11 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions,General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 AM to 5:00 PM Monday through Friday,unless otherwise indicated. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than seventy-two(72)hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration,odors,or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than seventy-two(72)hours in advance of proposed disruptive operations. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- I SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. tE. Non-Smoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25-feet of entrances, operable windows,or outdoor air intakes. F. Controlled Substances: Use of controlled substances on Project site is not permitted. G. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times. H. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site. 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative. 1.12 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be,"or"shall comply with,"depending on the context,are implied where a colon(:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. ' C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations identified in the individual specification sections. PART 2-PRODUCTS-Not Used. tPART 3-EXECUTION-Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 10 00 i BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5 - PART 1 -GENERAL SECTION 0123 00-ALTERNATES 1.01 SUN04ARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 2100 10: General Requirements for Fire Suppression Work 2. Section 2105 00: Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 3. Section 2105 10: Acceptance Testing 4. Section 2109 00: Supports&Anchors 5. Section 2150 50: HFC-125(FE-25)Suppression System 1.02 Section 2199 10: Testing and Approval DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials,equipment,systems,or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Aueement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.03 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract,notify each party involved, in writing,of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2-PRODUCTS-Not Used. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: HFC-125 Suppression System 1. Base Bid: Removal and disposal of existing and abandoned Halon fire suppression system as indicated on Sheet FP-100. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES, L - 1 F - SECTION 0123 00 ALTERNATES 2. Alternate: In addition to the removal of the existing Halon system, furnish, install and test a new HFC-125 fire suppression system as indicated on Sheet FP-101 and as specified in Section Section 2150 50: HFC-125(FE-25)Suppression System. END OF SECTION 0123 00 t i 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 01 25.00-SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 0123 00"Alternates." 1.02 DEFIlVITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. ' 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three(3)copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A(sample included). 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information,including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be ' necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance,weight,size,durability,visual effect,sustainable design characteristics,warranties,and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations,if any,from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. ' e. Samples,where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data,where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of Architect/Engineer and Owner. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on.the overall Contract Time. If specified ' BARRY UNIVERSITY . BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL II SECTION 0125 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase ' order,lack of availability,or delays in delivery. k. Cost information,including a proposal of change,if any,in the Contract Sum. 1. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials,and is appropriate for applications indicated. in. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect/Engineer's Action: If necessary, Architect/Engineer will request additional information ' or documentation for evaluation within seven (7) working days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fifteen (15) working days of receipt of request, or five (5) working days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect/ Engineer's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. . b. Use product specified if Architect/Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. , 1.05 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than fifteen(15)working days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.Substitutions for cause must be documented and supported. 1. Conditions: Architect/Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the ' following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,Architect/Engineer will return requests without action,except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. C. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. ' d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. . g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. ' h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor,requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with ' other products,and is acceptable to all contractors involved. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2 - ' SECTION 0125 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect/Engineer will consider requests for substitution if received within ten (10) calendar days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect/Engineer. 1. Conditions: Architect/Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,Architect/Engineer ' will return requests without action,except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation,or other considerations after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect/Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. ' C. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products,and is acceptable to all contractors involved. ' PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 0125 00 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT.9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3 - ' SUBSTITUTION CSI Form 13.1A REQUEST FOR CAUSE Project: Substitution Request Number: ' From: To: Date: 1 A/E Project Number: Re: Contract For: Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: ? Manufacturer: Address: ,`�;�"'�Phor s' Trade Name: 1 No.: Installer. Address: ti ( Phone History: ❑New product ❑ 1-4 years old ❑5-10 years of, ❑ ,ore than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified produ( -N, ; 77 AT- El Point-by-point comparative data attached—REQUIRED) .� Reason for not providing specified item: a Similar Installation: Project: '' Architect: Address: Owner. Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ❑No ❑Yes;explain ' Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ 1. Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ❑No ❑Yes [Add] [Deduct] days. ' Supporting Data Attached: ❑Drawings ❑Product Data ❑Samples ❑Tests ❑Reports ❑ ©Copyright 2007,Construction Specifications Institute, PYn� P� Page 1 Form Version:June 2004 110 South Union Street,Stuie 100,Alexandria,VA 22314 CSI Form 13.1A This is not an official CSI Construction Contract Administration(CCA)Form.Please use CSrs official CCA Forms if required by your project needs. SUBSTITUTION ' REQUEST FOR CAUSE (Continued) The Undersigned certifies: ' • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts,as applicable,is available. ' • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will,not affect or delay progress schedule. • Cost data as stated above is complete.-Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. ' • Payment will be made for changes to building design,including A/E design,detailing,and constriction costs caused by the substitution. • Coordination,installation,and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: t Telephone: Attachments: A/E's REVIEW AND ACTION ❑Substitution approved-Make submittals in accordance wt N"�ecification Section 0125 00 Substitution Procedures. ' ❑Substitution approved as noted-Make submitta „? danc ' ith Specification Section 0125 00 Substitution Procedures. ❑Substitution rejected-Use specified materials. ` ❑Substitution Request received too late-Use specifi4 ,` 'atenals. Signed by: Date: ' rJ Additional Comments: ❑Contractor ❑Subcontractor ❑Supplier ❑Manufacturer ❑A/E , ❑Other: 0 Copyright 2007,Construction Specifications Institute, Page 2 Form Version:June 2004 110 South Union Street,Stuie 100,Alexandria,VA 22314 CSI Form 13.1A This is not an official CSI Construction Contract Administration(CCA)Form.Please use CSrs official CCA Forms if required by your project needs. SECTION 01 31 00-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to,the following: a. General coordination procedures. b. Coordination drawings. ' C. Requests for Information(RFIs). d. Project Web site. e. Project meetings. f. Pre-construction conference. ' B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor in the coordination meetings. Project management personnel,with the ' appropriate level of authorization to act on behalf of the contractor, are required to attend coordination meetings C. Related Sections: 1. 01 10 00"Summary." 2. 01 31 20"Mechanical and Electrical Coordination." 3. 01 77 00"Closeout Procedures." 4. 0191 13"General Commissioning Requirements." 1.02 DEFINITIONS ' A. RFI: Request from construction team seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ' A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name,address,and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of relaxed Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate,covered by subcontract. ' B. Key Personnel Names: Within ten(10)working days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, ' including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room,in temporary field office,and on Project Web site,and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1 1.04 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES ' A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate submission of submittals to allow for review and approval. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections , that depend on each other for proper installation,connection,and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own ' installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance,service,and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. ' B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices,reports,and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures , with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. ' 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. ' 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.05 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ' A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in ' individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information,as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare ' sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and ' resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. C. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical,and electrical systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of , components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,valves,and other controls. , f. Indicate required installation sequences. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 1 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 011100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be t in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect/Engineer indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. ' B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical,plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and t electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum and/or underfloor plenum to accommodate layout of components indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and ' elevations of mechanical,plumbing,fire protection,fire alarm,and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded ' items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes,curbs and housekeeping pads,and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, ' bracing,flanges,and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components,such as dampers,valves,diffusers,access doors,cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. C. Fire rated enclosures around ductwork. ' 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 3/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire alarm locations. C. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes,dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes,mains piping,branch lines,pipe drops,and sprinkler heads. 9. Security System: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 3/4 inches in diameter and larger. ' b. Locations of all devices. C. Location of central panel. 10. Communications System: Show the following: ' a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 3/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Location of all underground installation. C. Locations of all devices. 11. BAS System: Show the following: t a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 3/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Location of all panels. 12. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 0133.00"Submittal Procedures." ' C. Review: Architect/Engineer will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If ' Architect/Engineer determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3 - SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION detail,or are otherwise deficient,Architect/Engineer will so inform Contractor,who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. ' D. Architect/Engineer can furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files upon receipt of completed waiver form. Architect/Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. ' 1. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in AutoCAD"DWG"file format. 2. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form Agreement included in this Project Manual 1.06 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION(RFIs) ' A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the ' Contract Documents,Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect/Engineer will return RFIs submitted to the Architect/Engineer by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or ' work of subcontractors. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any delays resulting from failure to submit RFI's in a timely manner. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed,legible description of item needing information or interpretation ' and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. , 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect/Engineer. 6. RFI number(numbered sequentially). ' 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs,as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions,as appropriate. ' 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum,Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. ' 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings,coordination drawings,and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions,thicknesses,structural grid references, and details of affected materials, ' assemblies,and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or approved equivalent containing the same information. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. ' D. Construction Manager's Action: Construction Manager will review each RFI,determine action required by relevant parties,log the RFI,and issue to the Architect/Engineer for review. ' 1. Any submittal or information transmitted directly to the Architect/Engineer by the Contractor will be returned without commentlaction. 2. RFI Log: The Construction Manager will prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use a Log Form. Include the following: ' a. Project name. b. Name and address of Contractor. C. Name and address of Architect/Engineer. ' d. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- 1 ' SECTION 011100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION e. RFI description. t f. Data the RFI was submitted. g. Data Architect/Engineer's and Construction Manager's response was received. 3. On receipt of Architect/Engineer's action,update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect/Engineer within five (5) ' working days if Contractor disagrees with response. a. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request,as appropriate. 4. If the Construction Manager believes that the RFI response warrants a change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, the Construction Manager must notify the Architect/Engineer in writing within five(5)working days of receipt of the RFI response. ' E. Architect/Engineer's Action: Architect/Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow ten(10)working days for Architect/Engineer's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect/Engineer after 1:00 PM will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor generated RFIs will be returned without action: ' a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. ' d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect/Engineer's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. ' 2. Architect/Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect/Engineer's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect/Engineer's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum that may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to ' Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures" shall not be acted upon until approved of change is obtained. ' 1.07 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Progress Meetings: Barry University will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. ' 1. Attendees: Barry University will inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect/Engineer of scheduled meeting dates and times. In addition to representatives of Owner,Owner's Commissioning Authority, and Architect/Engineer, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning,coordination,or performance of firture activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. ' 2. Agenda: Barry University will prepare the meeting agenda and distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. ' a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule ' revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. ' b. Review present and future needs of each entity present,including the following: 1) Interface requirements. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5 - SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of component conflicts. ' 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. ' 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. ' 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. ' 15) Status of proposal requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. ' 19) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including the Owner, and Architect/Engineer,within three(3)working days of the meeting. , 4. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. B. Coordination Meetings: Barry University will conduct Project coordination meetings at weekly y intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and pre-installation conferences. ' 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, and Architect/Engineer, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning,coordination,or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and ' authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate ' to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time,ahead of schedule,or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. ' Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each ' coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. C. Review present and future needs of each contractor present,including the following: ' 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. t 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. t 9) Temporary facilities and controls. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- I� ' SECTION 011100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 10) Work hours. ' 11) Hazards and risks. 12) Progress cleaning. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Change Orders. ' 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting within three(3)working days of the meeting. 1.08 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Barry University will schedule and conduct a Pre-construction Conference before starting construction, ' at a time convenient to the Owner and Architect/Engineer,but no later than five(5)days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, ' Architect/Engineer,and their consultants;Contractor and its superintendent;major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. ' 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress,including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing of the trade work. C. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. ' d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. ' h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. ' k. Submittal procedures. 1. Preparation of record documents. m. Use of the premises and existing building. n. Work restrictions. ' o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. ' S. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. U. Parking availability. ' V. Office,work,and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. X. First aid. y. Security. ' Z. Progress cleaning. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes within three(3)working days of the meeting. ' END OF SECTION 01 31 00 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- o zli-OrAIA Document C1 06`"- 2007 ' Digital Data Licensing Agreement g ' AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year (In words, indicate day,month and year) BETWEEN the Party transmitting Digital Data(`Transmitting Party")' c/� ( (Name, address and contact information, including electronic addresses)',,,, y� �b"- Jocumenehas important legal consequences. nsultation with an attorney ' \is a ouraged with respect to its.o mpletion or modification. and the Party receiving the Digital Data("Receiving P (Name, address and contact information, including el troy es) , ' ��ttddv � For the following Project: �@ I ' (Name and location or addrss) In consideration of the following promises exchanged,the Parties agree as follows: ' Init AIA Document C106TM-2007.Copyright @ 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Al a Document,or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.Purchasers are permitted to ' reproduce ten(10)copies of this document when completed.To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents,e-mail The American Institute of Architects'legal counsel,copyright@aia.org. TABLE OF ARTICLES ' 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS ' 2 TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL DATA 3 LICENSE CONDITIONS ' 4 LICENSING FEE OR OTHER COMPENSATION _ ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS ' §1.1 The purpose of this Agreement is to grant a license from the Transmi g to the ec v''g arty for e 5 .Receiving Party's use of Digital Data on the Project,and to set forth the liceri to v d §1.2 This Agreement is the entire and integrated agreement between the parties.Except as' ificly seylherein, ' this agreement does not creat any other contractual relationship between the parties.. ' §1.3 Digital Data is defined as information,communications,drawings, de,-,%- crea W or s ed~ the Project in , digital form. §1.3.1 Confidential Information is defined as Digital Data that the ans g Party hases gnated as confidential and clearly marked with an indication such as"Confidential"or"Busines op t ARTICLE 2 TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL DATA 41 §2.1 The Transmitting Party grants the Receiving Party al& sive td h nse use the Digital Data solely and exclusively to perform services or construction for the P:oj tin acc dann with th on itaons set forth in Article 3. , §2.2 The transmission of Digital Data constitute arranI y the Trans> n i Party to a Receiving Party that the Transmitting Party(1)is the copyright owner of peit l Data,,(2)has permission from the copyright owner to transmit the Digital Data and ant a license for its use o r 3) authorized to transmit Confidential Information. §2.3 The Transmitting Party retains its rights the Di ' al Data. B smitting the Digital Data,the Transmitting Party does not grant to the Receiving Party an assignrii t of ose rights;nor does the Transmitting Party convey to the ' Receiving Party any right in the softwane` to gens Ate Digital Data. §2.4 To the fullest extent permitedP law,tli RvingPy shall indemnify and defend the Transmitting Party from and against all claims ani singmfor related a e Receiving Party's modification to,or unlicensed use of,the Digital ' Data. §2.5 The Rei ivi�ung Patty agrees to keep onfid tial Information strictly confidential and not to disclose it to any other ' person exy�pt to i( its'`employees,(2 tho o ped to know the content of the Confidential Information in order to perfornseiices or constru ®nolelynd exc sively for the Project,or(3)its consultants and contractors whose contracts i)iclude similar restrictions in the use of Confidential Information. ARTIC(E 3 1,1QEN i CONDITIONS §3.1 Th` artiese to the following conditions on the limited license granted in Section 2.1: (State below tits or rest?Hictiops,applicable to the Receiving Party's use of the Digital Data, requirements for ' data format,transmission m� iod dir other conditions on data to be transmitted.) Inst AIA Document C106r—2007.Copyright©2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA Document is t protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it, .L may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.Purchasers are permitted to reproduce ten(10)copies of this document when completed.To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents,e-mail The American Institute of Architects'legal counsel,copyright@aia.org. ' ARTICLE 4 LICENSING FEE OR OTHER COMPENSATION §4.1 The Receiving Party agrees to pay the Transmitting Party the followrg ff o cgmpensation for the Receiving ' Party's use of the Digital Data: (State the fee,in dollars,or other method by which the R eivdng>Paill)com KnsL' he Transmitting Party for the Receiving Party's use of the Digital Data.) ' This A ee gr tis ente-red into as of the clay and eat first written above and will terminate upon Substantial Completi i of�ect,as that to is�=IVAIA Document A2017-2007,General Conditions of the Contrac for Construction uta essqhe :se agre6d by the parties and set forth below. ' (Indic a V en this Agr ement will urate, of other than the date of Substantial Completion.) 1 ' TRANSMITTING PAI !>{.Si Lure) RECEIVING PARTY(Signature) Printed name and title) Printed name and title) le ' AIA Document C106TM-2007.Copyright @ 2007 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This A]e Document is . Init protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.Purchasers are permitted to 3 ' reproduce ten(10)copies of this document when completed.To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents,e-mail The American Institute of Architects'legal counsel,copyright@aia.org. ' SECTION 01 31 20—MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanical and Electrical coordination. 2. Submittals. 3. Coordination required. 4. Coordination documents. ' 5. Coordination of submittals. 6. Coordination of substitutions and modifications. 7. Coordination of Work. 8. Documentation. ' 9. Equipment start-up. 10. Inspection and acceptance of equipment. ' B. Related Sections: 1. 01 31 00"Project Management and Coordination." 2. 0133 00"Submittal Procedures." 3. 01 73 29"Cutting and Patching." ' 4. 01 77 00"Closeout Procedures." 1.02 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK COORDINATION A. Employ and pay for services of a person,technically qualified and experienced in field coordination for the type of mechanical and electrical work required for this Project, for the duration of the Work. Such person may be the Trade Contractor's field superintendent or Project Manager. ' B. Examine the drawings of other trades to fully understand the coordination and locational constraints prior to submitting a bid. Contact Barry University regarding conflicts for clarification prior to bid. Submission of bid shall be deemed presumptive evidence that all factors relative to resolution of ' conflicts has been included in the bid price. C. The project drawings, specifications, and other documents are complimentary. Items required by one shall designate requirement by the other, whether explicitly stated or not. Where documents conflict, ' the work of the more stringent nature shall be required. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit name,address,and telephone number of Coordinator to Barry University for approval. B. Submit coordination drawings and schedules prior to submitting shop drawings, product data, and ' samples. 1.04 COORDINATION REQUIRED ' A. Coordinate work of Divisions 02 through 26 with work of other Divisions. B. Give full cooperation to other trades and furnish any information necessary to permit work of other ' trades to be installed satisfactorily,with the least possible interference or delay. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - 1 SECTION 01 31 20 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION C. Examine Drawings relating to the work of all trades to become fully informed as to the extent and character of work required and its relation to work of other trades in this project. ' D. Coordinate progress schedules,including dates for submittals and for delivery of products. E. Attend conferences among Subcontractors and others concerned with the Work, to establish and ' maintain coordination and schedules,and to resolve coordination matters in dispute. F. Participate in weekly progress meetings.Report on progress of Work to be adjusted under coordination requirements,and any required changes in schedules. ' 1.05 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS A. Prepare coordination drawings to organize installation of Products for efficient use of available space, ' for proper sequence of installation,and to identify potential conflicts. B. Where work of one trade is to be installed in close proximity to work of other trades,or where there is , evidence of interference with work of other trades,prepare composite working drawings and sections at a scale of not less than '/a-inch equals 1-foot. Highlight any conflicts and obtain approval before proceeding. C. Coordinate a master schedule to identify responsibilities under each section of the Specifications for ' activities that directly relate to this work, including submittals and temporary utilities. Identify electrical power characteristics and control wiring required for each item of equipment. ' D. Examine the Architectural Drawings and site to determine whether temporary openings in the building will be required for admission of apparatus and notify Barry University and Owner's representative accordingly. Provide such openings without additional cost to the Owner. ' E. Maintain documents for the duration of the Work, recording changes due to site instructions, modifications or adjustments. F. After Barry University review of original and revised documents, reproduce and distribute copies to ' concerned parries. 1.06 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS ' A. Review shop drawings,.product data, and samples for compliance with Contract Documents and for coordination among work of all sections of the Project Manual. Transmit to Barry University for ' review. B. Check field dimensions and clearances and relationship to available space and anchors. C. Check compatibility with equipment and Work of other sections,electrical characteristics,and 1 operational control requirements. D. Check motor voltages and control characteristics. ' E. Coordinate controls,interlocks,wiring of switches,and relays. F. Coordinate wiring and control diagrams. ' G. Review the effect of any changes on work of other sections. H. Verify and coordinate maintenance of Record Documents. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 011120 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 1.07 COORDINATION OF SUBSTITUTIONS AND MODIFICATIONS A. Review proposals and requests from other subcontractors for effect on work under specific responsibility. B. Verify compliance with Contract Documents and for compatibility with Work and Products of other sections. C. Submit to Barry University with recommendation for action. 1.08 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Observe Work for compliance with Contract Documents. B. Protect the work and material of other trades from damage by work or workmen; and make good all damage caused. C. Assume responsibility for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. Protect against theft, weather, injury, or damage. Store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. Close open ends with temporary plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing material. D. If so specified,receive unload, uncrate, store, protect, set in place, connect up completely any motor starters, control equipment, such as thermostats, and all equipment having mechanical/electrical service connections which may be furnished by the Owner or furnished by another trade. E. Maintain a list of observed deficiencies and defects;promptly submit to Barry University. 1.09 DOCUMENTATION A. Observe and maintain a record of tests. Record: 1. Specification section number,Product,and name of Subcontractor. 2. Name of testing agency and name of inspector. ' 3. Name of manufacturer's representative present. 4. Date,time,and duration of tests. 5. Type of test and results. 6. Retesting required. B. Assemble background documentation for dispute and claim settlement by Barry University. ' C. Submit copies of documentation to Barry University upon request. 1.10 EQUIPMENT START-UP ' A. Verify utilities,connections and controls are complete and equipment is in operable condition. B. Observe startup and adjustments;record time and date of start-up,and results. C. Observe equipment demonstrations to Owner; record times and additional information required for Operation and Maintenance Manuals. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 01 31 20 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 1.11 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT A. Prior to inspection,verify that equipment is tested and operational,and clean. ' B. Assist Barry University with inspection. Prepare list of items to be completed and corrected. PART 2-PRODUCTS-Not Used. PART 3-EXECUTION-Not Used. ' END OF SECTION 013120 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' PART 1 -GENERAL SECTION 0133 00-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and other submittals. B. Related Sections: 1. 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination." 2. 0177 00"Closeout Procedures." 3. 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." 4. 0178 39"Project Record Documents." ' 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect/ ' Engineer's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." Note: Submittals for all related items (equipment materials, and construction) must be submitted toeether as a complete package. Partial or incomplete submittal packages will be returned without review. ' B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect/Engineer's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with ' requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as"informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from ' another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. ' D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device independent and display resolution independent fixed layout document format. ' 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a "Schedule of Submittals", arranged in chronological order by dates 1 required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect/Engineer and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. ' 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals ' required during the first sixty(60)days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's ' construction schedule. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. ' 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. C. Submittal category: Action;informational. ' d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect/Engineer's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. ' 1.04 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by ' Architect/Engineer for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect/Engineer will furnish Barry University one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. ' a. Architect/Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD format. ' C. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form provided by the Architect/Engineer. d. The following background digital data files will be furnished for each appropriate discipline: ' 1) Floor plans. 2) Reflected ceiling plans. e. Details,Sections,and Elevations will not be provided. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction ' activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. ' 2. Submittals for all related items (equipment, materials and construction) must be submitted together as a complete package.Partial or incomplete submittal packages will be returned without review. 3. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial t submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 4. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. ' 5. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect/Engineer and Barry University reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. ' C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review;including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect/Engineer's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract ' Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing,including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow ten (10) working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect/Engineer and/or ' Barry University will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary,process it in same manner as initial ' submittal. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 ' MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 011100 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow five(5)working days for review of each resubmittal. ' D. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect/Engineer's consultants, other consultants,the Owner,or other parties as indicated,allow twenty(20)working days for review of each submittal. ' E. Submittal Format: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8-inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by the Architect/Engineer. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect/Engineer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. ' f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. Submittal number ' shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point(e.g.,061000.0l.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. ' j. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate. k. Location(s)where product is to be installed,as appropriate. 1. Other necessary identification. ' F. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information: 1. Project name. 2. Date. ' 3. Destination(To:). 4. Source(From:). 5. Name and address of Architect/Engineer. 6. Name of Contractor. ' 7. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 8. Names of subcontractor,manufacturer,and supplier. 9. Category and type of submittal. 10. Submittal purpose and description. ' 11. Specification Section number and title. 12. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 13. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate. ' 14. Indication of full or partial submittal. 15. Transmittal number,numbered consecutively. 16. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. ' 17. Remarks. 18. Signature of transmitter. G. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal ' requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier,including revision identifier. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3 - 1 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1 a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall ' include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point(e.g.,LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by the Architect/Engineer. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Include information noted in paragraph"G"above. ' H. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect/Engineer. L Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's ' letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect/Engineer on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as ' related submittal. J.Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. , 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect/Engineer's action stamp. ' K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers,subcontractors,suppliers,fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. , L. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action P P J Y submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect/Engineers action stamp. 1.05 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ' A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Submittals for all related items (equipment, materials, and construction)must be submitted together as a complete package. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly. a. Barry University will review and either return to contractor with comment or approve and ' forward to Architect/Engineer for review. b. Architect/Engineer will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. , 2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. ' a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Maintain one copy of all transmittals on site. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of ' product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use,submit as Shop Drawings,not as Product Data. ' 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information,as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. ' b. Manufacturer's product specifications. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 ' MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 111100 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES C. Standard color charts. ' d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. ' h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment,include the following in addition to the above,as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. ' b. Power requirements. c. Printed performance curves. d. Operational range diagrams. e. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings and service/maintenance/access clearance requirements. 5: Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. ' C. Shop Drawings: Prepare project specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data except where submittal ' is based on Architect/Engineees digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information,as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. C. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. ' f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates,patterns, and similar full-size drawings,submit Shop Drawings ' on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11-inches but no larger than 30 by 40-inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file,or b. Three (3) opaque copies of each submittal. Architect/Engineer and Barry University will ' retain copies;remainder will be returned. D. Refer to Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for coordination drawings. E. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and ' actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. ' e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification ' information for record. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5 - SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine ' final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of ' units showing the full range of colors,textures,and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit two (2) full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect/Engineer will return one(1)submittal with options selected. ' 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated,prepared from same material to be used for the Work,cured and finished in manner specified,and physically identical with material or product proposed for use,and that show full range of color and texture variations ' expected. Samples include,but are not limited to,the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components;small cuts or containers of materials;complete units of repetitively used materials;swatches showing color,texture,and pattern;color range sets;and components used for independent testing and inspection. ' a. Number of Samples: Submit three (3) sets of Samples. Architect/Engineer will retain one (1)Sample set;remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details,workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections,operation,and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. ' 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample,submit at least three(3)sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. F. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: ' 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name,and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. ' 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file,or t b. Three (3) opaque copies of each submittal. Architect/Engineer and Barry University will retain copies;remainder will be returned. G. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00 "Project ' Management and Coordination." H. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 77 00"Closeout Procedures. ' I. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." ' J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,contact information of architects and owners,and other information specified. ' K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and , Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- ' SECTION 011100 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer ' complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. ' N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material ' complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's ' standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer 1 complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency,or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. ' R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: ' 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers'names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. ' S. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency,on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. ' T. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form,indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. ' U. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. ' V. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations,and calculations. Include list ' of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1 1.06 DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES ' A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. , 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,submit a written request for additional information to Architect/Engineer. B. Delegated Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other , required submittals,submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three(3)paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. ' 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes,loads,and other factors used in performing these services. 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW ' A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field , dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Barry University. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." ' C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. ' 1.08 CONTRUCTION MANAGER'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect/Engineer. ' B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's submittal, date of Barry University's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has ' been reviewed,checked,and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.09 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect/Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections ' or revisions required,and return it. Architect/Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action required. B. Informational Submittals: The Architect/Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it or ' will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect/Engineer will forward each submittal to appropriate party. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -8- SECTION 011100 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals ' has received prior approval from Architect/Engineer. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable will be considered nonresponsive and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect/Engineer without action. 1.10 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings and Data indicated are to be provided for the following: SubmitlaiDescriptioii Shop Dravvings ' General Construction Access Floor Shop Drawings Acoustical Ceiling Shop Drawings Coordination Shop Drawing Metal Fabrication Shop Drawings Roofing and Roof Insulation Shop Drawings Roofing and Tapered Insulation Shop Drawings Structural Steel Shop Drawings Mechanical Building Automation Shop Drawings ' Clean Agent Shop Drawings(Alternate#1) Clean Agent Suppression System Shop Drawings&Calculations(Alternate#1) Coordination Shop Drawing ' Ductwork Shop Drawings Mechanical Piping Shop Drawings Plumbing Shop Drawings ' Electrical Building Automation Shop Drawings Coordination Shop Drawing Electrical Shop Drawings ' Fire Detection Shop Drawings Security Shop Drawings ' Description subinittals General Construction Access Flooring Acoustical Ceilings Acoustical Materials(Walls and Ceilings) Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing ' Concrete Floor Sealer Door Operators Finish Hardware ' Firestopping ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI,SHORES,FL -9- SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES � s � Submittals Glazing ' Gypsum Board Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ' Joint Sealers Metal Fabrications Metal Framing ' Painting(Submittal and Samples) Roof Flashings(Details) Roofing ' Vapor&Air Barriers Vinyl Base(Submittal and Samples) Windows 1 Wood Doors Mechanical Air Cooled Condensers(DX) Air Filters Automatic Temperature Controls Building Automation System Computer Room Air Conditioning(CRAG)Units Fans Hydronic Specialties ' Instrumentation Mechanical Identification Mechanical Pipe Insulation ' Mechanical Piping and Pipe Fittings Mechanical Piping Specialties Mechanical Supports,Anchors,and Sleeves t Mechanical Valves Pneumatic Controls Refrigerant Piping ' Roof Mounted A/C Equipment Variable Frequency Drives ' Vibration Isolation Fire Suppression Clean Agent Suppression Accessories Clean Agent Suppression Pipe and Pipe Fittings Fire Protection Supports,Anchors,and Sleeves Electrical Cable Trays Closed Circuit Television System Conduits&Fittings Data Cabling System Disconnect Switches ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 10- ' SECTION 011100 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Descriptimi Submittals Dry Type Transformers Electrical Identification t Electrical Supports and Anchors Electrical Switches ' Electronic Entry Control Systems Enclosed Switches EPO System Interior Lighting Lamps ' Lightning&Surge Protection Unit(TVSS)(SPD) Liquid Detection and Alarm System Outlet Boxes ' Panelboards Plate Covers Pull and Junction Boxes ' Receptacles Switchboards Variable Frequency Drives ' Wall Switches Wires and Cables Wiring Devices Fire Detection Fire Alarm Control Panel Fire Detection and Alarm System ' Smoke Detectors Security Card Access Readers Closed Circuit Digital Camera Security System Submittal Descriptimi Reports Mechanical HVAC Air Test&Balance Report Fire Suppression Room Pressurization(for clean agent system)Test Reports Electrical Electrical Test Reports ' Short Circuit and Coordination Study Report ARC Flash Study 1.11 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AND BARRY UNIVERSITY REVIEW A. Upon receipt of submittals from Barry University,the Architect/Engineer will review shop drawings, product data,and samples and return submittal to Barry University within ten(10)working days. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1. Submittals returned stamped Approved means that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed, providing submittal complies with Contract Documents. Vendor assumes sole ' responsibility for the required compliance. No response is required of the Vendor. 2. Submittals marked Approved as Noted means that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed, provided submittal is amended and resubmitted to comply with Architect/Engineer's notations and the Contract Documents,or the Vendor confirms in writing that he will do so. If for , any reason vendor cannot confirm compliance with notations,vendor shall resubmit as described for submittals stamped Rejected. 3. Rejected means that submittal does not comply with Contract Documents, and that fabrication, manufacture, or construction as submitted must not proceed under any circumstances. Products ' where submittals are stamped Rejected are not permitted on job site. 4. Supplier receipt of shop drawings or data stamped Rejected shall not be the basis of a claim for extension or delay,with regard to delivery of equipment or material. ' 1.12 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute shop drawings, product data, and samples which bear the Architect/Engineer's stamp of ' approval to job site file, Record Documents file, subcontractors, suppliers, other affected contractors, and other entities requiring information. PART 2-PRODUCTS-Not Used. ' PART 3-EXECUTION-Not Used. END OF SECTION 0133 00 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 12- PART 1 -GENERAL SECTION 01 41 00—REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ' 1.01 SUNIlVIARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Laws, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations of place of building shall govern construction of this Contract. B. Description of Requirements: ' 1. Most restrictive law and ordinance shall govern. 2. Contractor shall confer with Barry University when he/she is aware of items of work that are contrary to applicable regulatory requirements before work begins. 3. Notify Barry University in advance of all meeting, communications, and inspections relative to ' this project involving government agencies. Barry University may attend all meetings and inspections. ' 1.02 CONSTRUCTION ASSEMBLIES A. Assemblies listed by recognized authorities design designations shall be furnished and installed using materials, manufacturers, and methods listed. Substitute items shall be submitted with written ' acceptance of appropriate regulatory agency. B. Assemblies listed that are design assemblies of a particular manufacturer shall be furnished and installed using materials and methods as published by manufacturer. Substitute manufacturers shall be ' submitted with written acceptance of appropriate regulatory agency. 1.03 CODES,REGULATIONS,AND GUIDELINES A. Building Code: 1. Florida Uniform Statewide Building Code USBC. a. The Florida Building Code FBC 2010. t 2. 2009 International Building Code(IBC). 3. Including: a. Nationally published amendments. b. Local Amendments. ' B. Fire Code/Life Safety Code: 1. NFPA-Life Safety Code 101. ' a. Edition: 1) 2000. 2. Reference Model Code;2009 International Fire Code(IFC). ' C. Accessibility: 1. ADA Standards for Accessible Design. a. 2010 Edition 2. Florida Building Code 2010. 3. ICC/ANSI 117.1 a. Edition:2003. 4. Where multiple codes are listed, and requirements differ, comply with the most stringent language. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS D. Mechanical Code: 1. International Mechanical Code. ' a. Edition:2009. E. Plumbing Code: 1. International Plumbing Code. , a. Edition:2009. F. Electrical Code: ' 1. NFPA 70 National Electric Code a. Edition:2008. G. Seismic Requirements: ' 1. Seismic Design Category C a. Sds=0.123 Sd1=0.075 H. Occupational Health and Safety: Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Regulations Standard , 29 CFR Part 1910. I. Additional Codes and Applicable Reference Standards: , 1. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., ASHRAE Guidelines,Latest Edition 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. General: t 1. ASTM standards are documents developed and established by American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM)and meet approval requirements of ASTM procedures and regulations. ' 2. ANSI standards are documents developed and established by American National Standards Institute,Inc.(ANSI)and meet approval requirements of ANSI procedures and regulations. 3. NFPA standards(National Fire Codes)are documents developed and established by National Fire ' Protection Association, (NFPA) and meet approval requirements of NFPA procedures and regulations. B. Specification sections will indicate ASTM,ANSI,NFPA and other standards by number. ' 1. Utilize the latest edition and amendments as published at the time of Contract Award. a. Exception: Where the locally adopted Codes or authorities having jurisdiction otherwise stipulate that a specific edition must be followed. 2. Dates and titles of referenced standards appear on appropriate web sites: ' a. ASTM:www.astm.org b. ANSI:www.ansi.org/catalogisearch.html C. NFPA:http://www.nfpa.org/ ' 3. Web site indexes generally include all standards published by the subject organization; and may contain standards that are not referenced for this project. END OF SECTION 01 41 00 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER-REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2 - ' SECTION 01 50 14-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS,ALTERATIONS PART1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: t1. Requirements for temporary utilities,support facilities,security,and protection facilities. B. Related Sections: 1. 01 10 00"Summary." ' 2. 01 31 00"Project Management and Coordination." 1.02 USE CHARGES ' A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including,but not limited to Owner,Architect/Engineer,testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of ' services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available ' for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ' A. Fire Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program. ' B. Moisture Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or ' water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work,and replacing water damaged Work. 3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire resistive materials, ' plastering,and terrazzo grinding,and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. ' C. Dust and HVAC Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust and HVAC control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include ' the following: 1. Locations of dust control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust control measures. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL i SECTION 0150 14 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS,ALTERATIONS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA,NEMA,and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric ' service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary ' utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & ' Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ ANSI Al 17.1. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation,maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance,regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. , PART2-PRODUCTS t 2.01 MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame spread , rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. B. Dust Control Adhesive Surface Walk Off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60-inches. C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame spread and smoke developed indexes of 25 and 50,respectively. PART 3-EXECUTION t 3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION t A. General: Connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with Owner and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary,to make connections for temporary services. t B. Water Service:'Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to ' condition existing before initial use. C. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted. D. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust,fumes,and odors from entering occupied ' areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings. , a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Maintain negative air.pressure within work area using HEPA equipped air filtration units, ' starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 1110 14 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS,ALTERATIONS 2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust containment devices. 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA filter equipped vacuum equipment. E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. ' F. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations,observations,inspections,and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without ' operating entire system. 3.02 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION ' A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide temporary offices and storage units located within designated area or within 30-feet. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect/Engineer schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities,under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Parking:Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. C. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform the public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary,directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." E. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life. 1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. ' 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop,make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. F. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 0150 14 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS,ALTERATIONS 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 3.03 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures,utilities, and other ' improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Pest Control: Engage pest control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring ' of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control , operations lawfully,using environmentally safe materials. C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and ' similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. 1. Secure access to Owner occupied areas from construction areas against unauthorized entrance, vandalism,theft,and similar violations of security. D. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and ' to separate occupied areas from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with Reinforced, fire resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.. ' Cover furnished floor with one (1) layer of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18-inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire retardant treated plywood. a. 2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 3. Protect air handling equipment. ' 4. Provide walk off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. F. Personnel: Provide identification to each person authorized to enter the Project premises, showing name and photo of individual,assigned number,and name of employer. ' 1. Maintain a current list of accredited persons. Make list available to Owner at their request. 2. Require that identification be displayed by all persons entering and on the premises. 3. Allow no visitors except with issuance of temporary identification from the Owner. , 4. Maintain a log of visitors. 3.04 INDOOR AIR QUALITY PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Protect indoor air,absorbent materials,and mechanical system from contamination: , 1. Applicable codes. 2. ASHRAE-62,Chapter 7. 3. SMACNA"Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction." , B. Minimize contaminants generated during construction: 1. Methods to include,but no limited to: ' a. Practices which minimize the amount of dust generated. b. Reduction of solvent fumes and VOC emissions. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 01 50 14 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS,ALTERATIONS 1 C. Maintaining good housekeeping practices including sweeping and periodic dust and debris ' removal. d. There shall be no visible haze in the air. C. Make all reasonable efforts to prevent construction activities from adversely affecting the air quality of ' occupied areas in the building or outdoor areas near the building including,but not be limited to: 1. Measures listed in SMACNA"Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction." 2. To minimize growth of infectious organisms,do not permit areas in or near the construction area ' to remain damp. 3. Protect absorbent materials with polyethylene sheeting. D. Dust barriers: ' 1. Erect and maintain dust barriers to physically separate the construction area(s) from occupied area(s). 2. Dust barriers shall be reasonably airtight and shall prevent unauthorized persons from entering the construction area. 3. Barriers shall be equivalent in airtight capability to full height, stud walls with gypsum board facings which are taped and sealed. 4. Shafts and other penetrations shall also be sealed. ' 5. Fire resistant polyethylene is acceptable for use in dust barriers if flame spread and smoke developed ratings are demonstrated to conform to applicable building codes and regulations. E. Negative Air Pressure: 1. Continuously maintain the construction zone under a negative pressure of at least 0.01 IN water gauge relative to adjacent occupied spaces. 2. Exhaust fans used for this purpose shall filter air using negative air machines designed specifically for this purpose. ' 3. Discharge to Exterior or to the least populated area adjacent to construction. 4. Minimum Filtration: a. For air to be recirculated back into building: ' 1) HEPA(99.97%DOP efficiency) for construction work adjacent to healthcare or elder care facilities. 2) 95%for other occupancies. b. For air discharged to Exterior:30%. ' c. If the permanent building HVAC system is used to provide negative air pressure, replace filters prior to occupancy. 5. Maintain supply air required by doors,windows,intakes etc. 6. If high levels of VOC's or odors are released in the construction area: Mitigate with activated ' carbon or equivalent filtration. 7. Exhaust shall not discharge near doors, air intakes, pedestrians, gathering areas, or operable windows. 8. Seal return, exhaust, and supply air openings in or near the construction zone that are a part of ' HVAC system serving occupied areas. F. Schedule construction and installation to prevent buildup of contaminates that cannot be removed prior to occupancy. 1. isolate areas of construction with solid physical barriers. a. Securely attach and seal at floor and structure above. 2. Schedule adequate time for product installation. ' 3. Maintain negative air pressure in construction area. 4. Do not re-circulate air prior to occupancy. 5. Ventilate construction with 100 percent outside air. ' 6. Seal return air ducts and use direct exhaust to outside. 7. Factory age sheet goods,to minimize off-gassing. 8. Consult manufacturers for appropriate dry out times. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 01 50 14 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS,ALTERATIONS 9. When installing wet products (fluid applied coatings or adhesives) ventilate with outside air. Provide minimum five(5)air changes per hour. 10. Protect stored on-site or installed absorbent materials from moisture exposure. a. Use polyethylene sheeting or other approved method of protection. 3.05 OPERATION,TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL , A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. ' 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid , possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion agreed in writing by Owner. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility,or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of ' interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. ' 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." ' END OF SECTION 01 50 14 1 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- PART 1 -GENERAL SECTION 0173 29-CUTTING&PATCHING ' 1.01 SUMVIARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section 2. 01 10 00"Summary." 3. Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. ' a. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those Sections. b. Limitations on cutting structural members. 4. Division 07 Section"Penetration Firestopping"for patching fire rated construction. ' 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of t other Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency,maintenance,or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. ' B. Include in request: 1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. ' 4. Description of proposed work and products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. ' 8. Date and time work will be executed. C. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the ' time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching,show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. ' 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL i SECTION 0173 29 CUTTING&PATCHING 1 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. ' 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural ' elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect/Engineer's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of ' unsatisfactory work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load carrying capacity or load deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.Operating elements may include the following: 1. Primary operational systems and equipment.' , 2. Fire suppression systems. 3. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 4. Control systems. ' 5. Communication systems. 6. Electrical wiring systems. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not'cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a ' manner that could change their load-carrying capacity,that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements may include the following: 1. Water,moisture,or vapor barriers. , 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. , 5. Piping,ductwork,vessels,and equipment. 6. Noise and vibration control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces ' in a manner that would, in Architect/Engineer's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove,replace,patch,and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during ' cutting and patching operations,by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 017129 CUTTING&PATCHING B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces,use materials ' that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. C. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that,when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. ' D. For any change in materials,submit request for substitution in accordance with Section 0160 00. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Execute cutting,fitting,and patching to complete Work and to: 1. Fit the several parts together to integrate with other work. 2. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. ' 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. 4. Remove sample of installed work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. ' B. Maintain weather tight conditions at all times, arrange temporary protection as required to provide same. ' 3.02 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering,inspect conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Compatibility: Before patching,verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 PREPARATION ' A. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. 1. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. ' C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 1 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANII SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 0173 29 CUTTING&PATCHING 3.04 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching ' at the earliest feasible time,and complete without delay.Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work,and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. B. Employ authorized and qualified installer to perform cutting and patching for moisture resistant , elements and sight exposed surfaces. C. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar ' operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer, comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not allowed without prior ' approval.. 2. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping.. ' 3. Cut holes and slots as small as possible,neatly to size required,and with minimum.disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use 4. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. , E. Fit work airtight to pipes,sleeves,ducts,conduit,and other penetrations through surfaces. F. At penetrations of fire rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated , material,full thickness of the construction element. G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish; for continuous surfaces,refinish to nearest intersection; for ' an assembly,refinish entire unit. H. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, ' valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 1. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. , J. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams. that are as invisible as possible. ' Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. K. Inspection: Where feasible,test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. ' L. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in.a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. ' M. Clean piping,conduit,and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. N. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. , O. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, ' color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials,if necessary,to achieve uniform color and appearance. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 017129 CUTTING&PATCHING P. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch ' and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. Q. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of ' uniform appearance. R. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. S. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint,mortar,oils,putty,and similar materials. 1 END OF SECTION 01 73 29 1 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 0173 50-UNLOADING&RIGGING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements and limitations for unloading,rigging,and storage of equipment to be incorporated into the work B. Related Sections: 1. 01 10 00"Summary." 2. 01 50 14"Temporary Facilities and Controls,Alterations." 3. Individual Specifications Sections for equipment to be incorporated into the work 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of unloading or rigging which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of project. 2. Integrity of moisture resistant elements. 3. Efficiency,maintenance,or safety of any operational elements. 4. Owner Operations or Public Right of Way. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. B. Include in request: 1. Identification of project. ' 2. Location and description of affected areas. 3. Description of proposed work and equipment to be used. 4. Approval of jurisdictional authority(if required). ' 5. Effect on work of owner or separate contractor. 6. Date and time work will be executed. 7. Estimated duration of operation. ' PART 2—PRODUCTS-Not Used. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL ' A. Execute unloading,rigging and storage to complete work and to: 1. Fit the several parts together to integrate with other work. 2. Remove and replace defective and nonconforming work. ' 3. Remove materials and equipment used for operations, repair, replace, and/or restore any items damaged as a result of operations. B. Comply with OSHA regulations and requirements of equipment manufacturer to ensure safe operation ' of equipment and tools. 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANII SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 0173 50 UNLOADING&RIGGING 3.02 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during unloading and , rigging. B. Beginning of unloading or rigging means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 INSURANCE A. Provide insurance coverage sufficient to cover the cost for immediate replacement and all costs ' required,should any equipment or portion of the project be damaged during unloading and rigging. B. Provide insurance coverage for total replacement value of all products, materials and/or equipment stored. C. The contractor shall, to the fullest extent possible, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Architect/Engineer from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses resulting from the performance of the work. 3.04 PREPARATION A. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings, and devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. 3.05 PERFORMANCE ' A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper support during rigging and unloading. , B. Contractor shall receive at tailgate,all designated products,material and/or equipment. C. Contractor shall unload products,material and/or equipment,and store until ready for rigging in place. ' D. Contractor shall transport,move,and rig equipment to designated location. E. Contractor shall coordinate his work with other trade contractors as required, to ensure the proper , placement and setting of equipment. F. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. , G. Promptly inspect shipments to assure products are undamaged. Notify the Owner and transportation vendor in writing of any damage noted. H. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by method to prevent soiling,disfigurement,and , damage. I. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with seals and labels intact , and legible. Store sensitive products in weather tight,climate controlled enclosures. END OF SECTION 01 73 50 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- I ISECTION O 174 14—COMPUTER ROOM CLEANING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Initial,maintenance,and final cleaning of computer rooms and areas under access floors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field Quality Control Reports: 1. Name and address of testing organization. 2. Operator(s)identification and the date on which the test was performed. 3. Test procedures used including a. Clear identification of physical location of installation tested and specific designations for coordinates of all sampling locations. b. Specified designation criteria for the installation, including the ISO classification and considered particle size(s), relevant occupancy state(s), airflow volume or velocity, and air pressure difference. 4. Measuring instruments used and proof of calibration. ' 5. Test results,including a. Particle concentration data for all sampling location coordinates. b. Failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. 6. Date of the preceding test to prove continued compliance. B. Qualification Data: For qualified technicians. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Service Provider Qualifications 1. Training: Technicians shall have in-house and on-the-job training that includes risk assessment, developing monitoring plans, interpretation of monitoring data, assessment of corrective actions, selection of measurement parameters for required and optional tests described in ISO 14644 3. B. Comply with ISO 14644-1. 1. ISO Class 8. 2. Operational state. 3. Considered size:0.5µm. 1 •• ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL li SECTION 01 74 14 COMPUTER ROOM CLEANING PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES A. Vacuums: Shielded HEPA vacuums. B. Air Scrubbers 1. Airflow: Minimum 10 air changes per hour. 2. Filtration: Multi-stage. 3. Final Stage Filters: HEPA(99.97 percent at 0.3 µm). C. Chemical cleaners: Neutral or anti-static, non-toxic, containing no ammonia, butyl, free amine, or metallic elements,and shall be approved by the equipment manufacturers. 2.02 TESTING INSTRUMENTS ' A. All instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with current industry practice. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICE PROVIDERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements,available providers offering services that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: I. Data Clean 2. Premier Solutions Co. 3. ProSource Mission Critical Services ' 4. Sealco 5. SET3,Sterile Environment Technologies 3.02 PRE-CLEANING CONFERENCE , A. The Construction Manager shall set up a meeting with the Owner and Architect/Engineer to review cleaning strategies and scheduling. , B. Provide subsequent meeting with selected vendor, Construction Manager, Owner, and Architect/ Engineer prior to each phase of cleaning as defined below. 3.03 INITIAL CLEANING A. Clean each space after it is enclosed and finish surfaces are in place and prior to the permanent air handling equipment being operational,and before data equipment is moved into the space. 1. Lift all access floor tiles and scrub clean tiles,pedestals,stringers,piping,conduit,cable trays,and other appurtenances,where applicable. 2. HEPA vacuum and mop subfloor and to of tile floor,horizontal surfaces on all computer cabinets, ' furniture,and storage shelves. 3. Wipe clean all finished surfaces at floors, walls, and ceilings. Include fixtures, devices, and equipment already installed. 4. Air scrubbers shall maintain particulate standards. B. Do not install data equipment before testing demonstrates the space to be in compliance with specified cleanliness standard. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 01 74 14 COMPUTER ROOM CLEANING 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. Spot clean on a daily basis at every area of disturbance. 1. Wipe or scrub tiles/floor as well as finished surfaces and equipment if necessary to remove finger prints,smudges,scuffs,and soil. B. Provide continuous monitoring to certify the space remains compliant with the specified cleanliness standard. 1. Provide remedial action to rectify out of compliance conditions as they occur. 3.05 FINAL CLEANING A. Clean the entire space. 1. Lift and clean all accessible access floor tiles. Institute a procedure to ascertain the tiles will be returned to the location and orientation they were in before cleaning,where applicable. 2. Wipe subfloor,pedestals,stringers,conduit,cables,cable trays,piping,and other appurtenances in the subfloor plenum,where applicable. 3. Wipe clean all finished surfaces at floors, walls and ceilings. Include fixtures, devices, and equipment already installed. 4. HEPA vacuum and wipe all equipment,equipment enclosures,crevices,and the like. 5. Replace all filters. B. Retest to demonstrate the space is in compliance with the specified cleanliness standard. END OF SECTION 01 74 14 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANH SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 0174 19-CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The Owner has established that this Project shall include proactive measures for waste management participation by all parties to the contract. a. The purpose of this program is to ensure that during the course of the Project all diligent means are employed to pursue practical and economically feasible waste management and recycling options. b. Waste disposal to landfills shall be minimized. 1 B. Definitions:1. Waste: Any material that has reached the end of its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable and reusable construction materials that would otherwise be discarded or destroyed. 2. Construction Waste: Solid wastes including, but not limited to, building materials, packaging materials,debris,and trash resulting from construction operations. 3. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse,or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. 5. Trash:Any product or material unable to be returned,reused,recycled,or salvaged. 6. Landfill:Any public or private business involved in the practice of trash disposal. ' 1.02 PERFORMANCE GOALS A. Salvage/Recycle Goals:Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much non-hazardous demolition and construction waste as possible. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit copies of report.Include the following information: ' 1. Material category. 2. Total quantity of waste in tons. 3. Quantity of waste recycled in tons. B. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them.Include manifests,weight tickets,receipts,and invoices. C. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and ' incinerator facilities licensed to accept them.Include manifests,weight tickets,receipts,and invoices. PART 2-PRODUCTS—Not Used. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 3-EXECUTION , 3.01 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT IMPLEMENTATION A. Provide handling,containers,storage,signage,transportation,and other items as required to implement waste management during the entire duration of the Contract.Comply with the following procedures: 1. Define specific areas to facilitate separation of materials for recycling,salvage,reuse or return. 2. Separate construction•waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. 3. Recycle and waste bin areas are to be maintained in an orderly manner and clearly marked to avoid contamination of materials. Inspect containers and bins weekly for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 4. Do not mix recyclable materials. 5. Stockpile processed materials on site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water.Cover to prevent windblown dust.. 6. Store materials away from construction area.Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 7. Store components off the ground and protect from weather. 8. Remove construction waste off Owner's property and transport to appropriate receiver or t processor. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads,streets,walks,walkways,and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to salvaged,recycled,reused,donated,and sold. 2. Comply with environmental controls specified in Division 01.Section 01 50 14 "Temporary Facilities and Controls,Alterations." C. Submit"Waste Reduction Progress Reports"each month as part of Application for Payment. ' 1. Materials identified in the Report shall be reported by weight. 2. Where weight is not applicable, Contractor shall report materials by units applicable to material recipient. 3. Procure receipts or other validation of waste management procedures and include them as part of the submittal. 3.02 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. , 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. t C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Barry University's property and legally dispose of them. ' END OF SECTION 01 74 19 , BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- PART 1 -GENERAL SECTION 01 77 00-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,including,but not limited to,the following: a. Substantial Completion procedures. b. Final completion procedures. C. Warranties. d. Final cleaning. e. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. 01 50 14"Temporary Facilities and Controls,Alterations" 2. 01 74 14"Computer Room Cleaning." 3. 0174 19"Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 4. 01 78 23"Operation and Maintenance Data." 5. 0178 36"Warranties and Guarantees." 6. 01 78 39"Project Record Documents." 7. 0178 43"Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials." C. Other Related Requirements: 1. Individual sections in Divisions 02 through 26 referring to this section. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Certified complete submittal due at Substantial Completion. Prior to request for Architect/Engineer's"Punch List"inspection. C. Substantial Completion Notification: Contractor's certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed,Work has been inspected,and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's inspection. D. Final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. E. Certified Architect/Engineer's "Punch List" Items: Final certified complete submittal at Final Completion. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Approval: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Project Warranties. D. Certificate of Occupancy:From authorities having jurisdiction. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -1 - SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.05 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten (10) working days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Submit the Contractor's list of completed and corrected items (Contractor's deficiency list), listing any minor or cosmetic Work still outstanding; reasons why the Work is incomplete and a Schedule to complete the Work. 2. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits,operating certificates,and similar releases. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property Ysurve s, and similar final record information. 4. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, includin specific warranties ! P g P workmanship bonds,maintenance service agreements,final certifications,and similar documents. 5. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Construction Manager. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items,including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Construction Manger's signature for receipt of submittals. 6. Submit testladjust/balance records. 7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy,use,operation,and maintenance. B. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten (10)working days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation,adjustment,and maintenance of products,equipment,and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 6. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools,and similar elements. 8. Complete final cleaning requirements,including touchup painting. 9. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore maned exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. C. Inspection: Submit a written request,in the form of the attached"Substantial Completion Notification" Transmittal at end of this Section,for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of ten (10) working days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. BARRY UNIVERSITY . BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 1177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Request must include a copy of the Contractor's list of completed and corrected items (Contractor's deficiency list) together with certification that the work is complete in accordance with contract and jurisdictional requirements. On receipt of request, the Architect/Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. The Architect/Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by the Architect/Engineer, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. NOTE: Should the Architect/Engineer find, upon arrival on site, the work to be incomplete and/or not ready for `Punch List' inspection, the inspection will be rescheduled for a later date and the Contractor will be liable for all delays,additional costs,and expenses. 1. Re-inspection: Request re inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.06 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,complete the following: 1. Certified List Architect/Engineer's "Punch List" Items: Submit certified copy of Architect/ Engineer's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list),endorsed,and dated by Construction Manager. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 2. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final,continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 3. Submit pest control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of ten (10)working days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect/Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Contractor will be responsible for all costs related to re-inspection. 1.07 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS(CONTRACTOR'S"DEFICIENCY LIST") A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,if necessary,areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Provide schedule for completion of each identified item. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls,floors,equipment,and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect/Engineer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel or MS Word electronic file. The Architect/Engineer through the Construction Manager will return annotated file. 5. Submit weekly progress updates indicating work completed.Submit certified complete list prior to requesting Architect/Engineer's"Punch List"inspection. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1.08 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of the Architect/Engineer for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated,or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Where agreeable to Owner,submit properly executed warranties within fifteen(15) working days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy duty,three ring,vinyl covered,loose leaf binders,thickness as necessary to accommodate contents,and sized to receive 8-1/2 by 11-inches paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name,address,and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name,and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the jurisdictional maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3-EXECUTION I 3.01 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. 1. Cleaning: Comply with Section 0174 14"Computer Room Cleaning." ' 2. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 01 50 14 "Temporary Facilities and Controls,Alterations." 3. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 14 "Temporary Facilities and Controls, Alterations" and Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management." BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 1177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 3.02 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass,reflective surfaces,and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 01 77 00 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION NOTIFICATION TRANSMITTAL Project:Barry University—Data Center Renovation—Miami Shores,FL Date: BRUNS-PAK Project No.9707-2 To: BRUNS-PAK 999 New Durham Road Edison,NJ 08817 From: Construction Manager/Contractor Please be advised that we have reached Substantial Completion, as defined in Section 01 42 10 of the Contract Documents,for the above referenced project.We understand that BRUNS-PAK must receive this letter a minimum of ten(10)working days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. We further understand that should the Architect/Engineer find,upon arrival on site,the work to be incomplete and/or not ready for inspection,the inspection will be rescheduled for a later date and that we will be liable for all delays,additional costs and expenses. We hereby certify that we are prepared for the Architect/Engineer's Punch List inspection and assure that any items found to be incomplete are minor cosmetic and non-technical in nature.All components of the facility are installed, operational,tested and fully functional.The facility is ready for the Owner to occupy and to utilize all aspects of the facility for its intended purposes.The Work is ready for`Punch List'activity. Should you have any questions please do not hesitate to contact this office. Very truly yours, (Company) Si ature ( l� ) (Printed Name and Title) END OF TRANSMITTAL BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 , MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 01 78 23-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Contract closeout information: 1. Copy of transmittal letter indicating Barry University's acceptance to Architect/Engineer. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble data indicated and other data required to completely describe operation and maintenance procedures. B. Assemble in 3-ring binders, completely indexed by specification section, with each item clearly labeled.Identify each volume with Project name and contents. C. Identify each item in manner consistent with names and identification numbers used in Contract Documents,not with manufacturer's catalog numbers. ' D. Neatly type data not furnished in printed form. E. Organize data for ease of reference with indexed tabs. F. Included each item on table of contents. 2.02 DATA REQUIRED FOR EACH COMPONENT AND SYSTEM A. Sequence of operation: 1. List valves,switches,etc.,used to start,stop and adjust systems. 2. Provide flow diagrams,control sequences and valve directory. 3. Submit valve directory for review prior to inclusion in manual: a. Show valve number,location. b. List equipment controlled. B. Lubrication instructions: 1. Frequency of inspection and lubrication recommended. 2. Type of grease. 3. Amount of lubrication recommended. C. Maintenance and troubleshooting data: 1. All manufacturer furnished data. 2. Project record wiring diagrams. 3. Name and address of manufacturer. 4. Name and address of local representatives who stock or distribute repair parts. 2.03 DATA REQUIRED FOR FINISH MATERIALS A. Maintenance data: 1. Precautions necessary. 2. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3. Maintenance materials and tools required. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 4. Repair and/or replacement instructions. 5. Name and address of manufacturer. 6. Name and address of local supplier of materials. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY A. Deliver two (2) copies to Barry University's sixty (60) days prior to Barry University instruction of systems and equipment,and substantial completion. B. Use Operation and Maintenance Data Transmittal form at end of this Section. C. Acquire Barry University's acceptance of items listed on transmittal form. D. Forward copy of transmittal form with Barry University's acceptance to Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION 01 78 23 i 1 1 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA TRANSMITTAL Project:Data Center Renovation ' To Owner: Barry University Date: From Construction Manager/Contractor. I Contractor to assemble data required to completely describe operation and maintenance procedures.Index and bind in 3-ring binders.Include name,address,and phone number of closest supplier for each item. DATA TURNED OVER TO OWNER SECTION DESCRIPTION BINDER OWNER'S VERIFICATION&ACCEPTANCE Accepted by: Date: Forward copy of this transmittal to the Architect/Engineer. DISTRIBUTION:❑OWNER ❑CONTRACTOR ❑CONSTRUCTION MANAGER ❑ARCIBTECT/ENGINEER END OF TRANSMITTAL BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 01 78 36-WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Execute and provide Project Warranty furnished at end of this section. B. Provide special written warranties/guarantees for products, equipment, systems and installations indicated in other sections. C. Provide special warranties/guarantees for period(s)indicated in other sections. D. Provide manufacturer's warranties/guarantees indicated in other sections for products, equipment and systems. 1. Where manufacturer's standard warranties/guarantees expire before expiration date required by Contract Documents,obtain and pay for extensions,as part of Contract Price. E. Provide all warranties/guarantees indicated prior to final payment. F. All warranty work which renders the facility from being beneficially used, as defined by Barry University's, shall be responded to within 48-hours of notification and repaired unless lead time of materials prohibits. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Contract closeout information: 1. Copy of transmittal letter indicating Barry University's receipt of Project Warranty and special warranties required by other sections. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. If, for any reason, Contractor cannot guarantee or warrant any portion of Work using products or construction methods indicated,Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer in writing during bid period and before contracts are awarded, indicating reasons and names of products and data on substitutions that can be guaranteed. 1. Should Contractor fail to so notify Architect/Engineer, Contractor will be held to have agreed to guarantee Work indicated. PART 2-EXECUTION 2.01 WARRANTIES/GUARANTEES A. Assemble approved warranties/guarantees required by other sections. B. Bind or assemble in 3-ring binders, completely indexed by specification section, with each warranty/guarantee clearly labeled. C. Identify each warranty/guarantee in manner consistent with names and identification numbers used in Contract Documents. D. Neatly type or draft all warranties/guarantees not furnished in printed form. E. Organize warranties/guarantees for ease of reference. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION O1 78 36 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES F. Provide transmittal letter containing: 1. Date. ' 2. Project title. 3. Contractor's_name and address. 4. Title and number of warranties/guarantees. 5. Indicating Barry University's receipt. G. Deliver to Barry University prior to final payment. END OF SECTION 0178 36 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- WARRANTY PROJECT: Data Center Renovation PROJECT NO.: OWNER: Barry University DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: As indicated on Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor warrants to Barry University that Work is free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that Work conforms with requirements of Contract Documents.Work not conforming to these requirements,including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If,within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of Work or designated portion thereof,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by Contract Documents,any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from Barry University to do so unless Owner has previously given Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. Barry University shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. ' The above shall not be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which Contractor might have under Contract Documents.Establishment of one-year period for correction of Work relates only to specific obligation of Contractor to correct Work,and has no relationship to time within which obligation to comply with Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor's liability with respect to Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct Work. CONTRACTOR: ADDRESS: BY: SIGNATURE: TITLE: DATE: Subscribed and sworn to me this day of in the year of NOTARY PUBLIC: SIGNATURE: LOCATION: My Commission Expires: END OF DOCUMENT BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- PART 1 -GENERAL SECTION.O1 78 39-PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: a. Record Drawings. b. Record Specifications. C. Record Product Data. d. Miscellaneous record submittals. ' B. Related Requirements: 1. 0177 00"Closeout Procedures." 2. 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." ' 1.02 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: ' a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints. 2) The Architect/Engineer will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional ' information recorded,and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three sets of prints. 2) Print each drawing,whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. ' B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and one annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications,including addenda and contract modifications. ' C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and one annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit ' duplicate marked up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy and one annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. E. Failure by the Contractor to submit complete, accurate. Record (As-Built) Drawings and Record Specifications will result in the Contractor's responsibility to pay all costs to produce same to the satisfaction of the Barry University and Architect/Engineer. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - 1 SECTION 0178 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 RECORD DRAWINGS 1 A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings,incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual.or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation .of corresponding marked-up record prints. 1 a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. 1 c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include,but are not limited to,the following: 1 a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. C. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. 1 f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. 1 i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. 1. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. 1 in. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel 1 proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from ' original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification,where applicable. , B. Record Digital Data Prints: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked up record prints with the Construction Manager. When authorized,prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings,as follows: 1 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, 1 redraw,and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Architect/Engineer for resolution. 4. Upon submittal of the "Disclaimer and Hold Harmless Agreement" the Architect/Engineer will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording ' information. 5. See Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect/ Engineer's digital data files. 6. Architect/Engineer will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 1 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIA1NII SHORES,FL -2- 1 ' SECTION 017119 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where the Architect/Engineer determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate,substitution,or other modification. 2. Consult the Architect/Engineer for proper scale and scope of detailing and notation required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing,copying,binding,and submitting. 2.02 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as PDF electronic file and one paper copy. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each,ready for continued use and reference. ' B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file and one paper copy. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title,electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. ' B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible ' condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for the Architect/Engineer's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01 78 39 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- I SECTION 01 78 43-SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS ' PART I—GENERAL 1.01 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS ' A. Package in clearly identified boxes. 1. Indicate manufacturer's name,part name and stock number. 2. Indicate piece of equipment part or tool is for. 3. Indicate name,address and phone number of closest supplier. 1.02 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS ' A. Package in clearly identified boxes. 1. Indicate trade name and stock number. ' 2. Indicate which item material is to be used with. 3. Indicate name,address and phone number of closest supplier. 1.03 EXTRA MATERIALS ' A. Package in clearly identified containers,or install where indicated. 1. Indicate trade name,stock number,size,color,etc. 2. Indicate where product is to be used. ' 3. Indicate name,address and phone number of closest supplier. PART 2-EXECUTION ' 2.01 DELIVERY ' A. Deliver to Owner prior to substantial completion unless Barry University requests earlier delivery. B. Delivery to location directed by Barry University. ' C. Use Spare Parts and Maintenance Material Transmittal form on next page of this Section. 1. Acquire Owner's acceptance of items listed on transmittal. 2. Transmittal to indicate Barry University's acceptance. 3. Forward copy of transmittal forms with Barry University's acceptance to Architect/Engineer. PART 3-EXECUTION-Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 78 43 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIAL TRANSMITTAL Project: Data Center Renovation Date: Owner: Barry University ' From Construction Manager/Contractor: ' Contractor to package extra material, maintenance materials, spare parts, and tools in clearly identified boxes; indicate manufacturer's name, trade name, part name, stock number, size, color, etc. Indicate which item ' maintenance material is to be used with,piece of equipment part or tool is for,or where extra material is to be used. Indicate name,address,and phone of closest supplier. SECTION DESCRIPTION QUANTITY ' 1 1 OWNER'S VERIFICATION&ACCEPTANCE ' Accepted by: Date: ' Forward copy of this transmittal to the Architect/Engineer. DISTRIBUTION:❑OWNER ❑CONTRACTOR ❑CONSTRUCTION MANAGER ❑ARCHITECT/ENGINEER , END OF TRANSMITTAL BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAN H SHORES,FL -2- 1 1 tSECTION 01 91 13-GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning without regard to specific systems,assemblies,or components. 2. Specific commissioning requirements are indicated in the technical specifications of the project manual. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. Other documentation included by reference is for information only. 1.02 DEFINITIONS ' A. BOD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections used to meet the Owner's Project Requirements (OPR) and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements,standards,and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of ' individual items that support the design process. B. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization,schedule,allocation of resources,and t documentation requirements of the commissioning process. C. CxA: Commissioning Authority. ' D. OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements of a project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals, measurable performance criteria,cost considerations,benchmarks,success criteria,and supporting information. ' E. Systems,Subsystems,Equipment,and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean"as-built"systems,subsystems,equipment,and components. ' 1.03 COMMISSIONING TEAM A. Members Appointed by Contractor(s)and Vendor(s): Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process ' through coordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to, representatives of each Contractor and/or vendor including Prime and Subcontractor, Project Superintendent,and responsible installers,suppliers,and specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA. B. Members Appointed by Owner: 1. CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Owner will engage the CxA under a separate contract. 2. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel. 3. Architect/Engineer and engineering design professionals. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 1 1.04 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and include critical items to Contractor for information and ' use. B. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning team ' activities. C. Provide the BOD documentation,prepared by Architect/Engineer and approved by Owner,to the CxA and each Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation and ' maintenance training plan. 1.05 EACH CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES ' A. Each Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with entity , responsible for system and equipment installation,recommend corrective action. 2. Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log. t 3. Attend commissioning team meetings held on a scheduled basis. 4. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule. 5. Review and accept construction checklists provided by the CxA. 6. Complete construction checklists as Work is completed and provide to the CxA on a weekly basis. , 7. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the CxA. 8. Complete commissioning process test procedures. 1.06 CxA's RESPONSIBILITIES ' A. Organize and lead the commissioning team. B. Provide commissioning plan. ' C. Convene commissioning team meetings. D. Provide Project specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures. t E. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. The sampling rate may vary from 1 to 100 percent. Verification will include,but is not limited to,equipment submittals, ' construction checklists, training, operating and maintenance data, tests, and test reports to verify compliance with the OPR.When a random sample does not meet the requirement,the CxA will report the failure in the Issues Log. , F. Prepare and maintain the Issues Log. G. Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log. ' H. Witness systems,assemblies,equipment,and component startup. I. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include them in the systems manual and ' commissioning process report. END OF SECTION 01 91 13 , BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- 1 DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PAGES ' Section 07 84 13: Penetration Firestopping...........................................................................................................6 1 1 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -1 - ' PART1 -GENERAL SECTION 07 84 13-PENETRATION F]ItESTOPPING ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes through penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire resistance rated constructions,including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. Division 21 Sections specifying fire suppression piping penetrations. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through fire resistance rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through penetration firestop systems that are ' produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,and maintain original fire-resistance raring of construction penetrated. 1. Fire resistance rated walls including fire partitions. 2. Fire resistance rated horizontal assemblies including floor/ceiling assemblies. B. Rated Systems: Provide through penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814: ' 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions,provide through penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to ' potential contact with adjacent materials in occupable floor areas: a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire resistance rated shaft enclosures. ' C. For through penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture resistant through penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4-inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic,provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by ' installing floor plates or by other means. 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. 1 D. For through penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450,respectively,as determined per ASTM E 84. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' B. Shop Drawings: For each through penetration firestop system, show each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. Include ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -1 - SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING , firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. ' 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations,from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items. 2. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's ' illustration for a particular through penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire resistance rated assembly. C. Through penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through penetration firestop system,along with the following information: 1. Types of penetrating items. ' 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. ' D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Product Certificates: For through penetration firestop system products, signed by product , manufacturer. F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through penetration firestop system ' complies with requirements,based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval ' of Firestop Contractors." B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. , Manufacturer's willingness to sell it through penetration firestop system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. C. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through penetration firestop systems and fire- resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. ' D. Source Limitations: Obtain through Penetration firestop s stems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated,through one source from a single manufacturer. ' E. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide through penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"Article: ' 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ' 2. Through penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Through penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing , and inspecting agency. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING b. Through penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through ' penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its"Fire Resistance Directory." 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver through penetration firestop system products to Project site in original,unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture,lot number,shelf life if applicable,qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project,curing time,and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for through penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,temperature changes,contaminants,or other causes. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain,frost,condensation,or other causes. ' B. Ventilate through penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or,where this is inadequate,forced-air circulation. ' 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through penetration firestop ' systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through penetration firestop systems. ' C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through penetration firestop system installations;confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. ' D. Do not cover up through penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting agency, the Architect/Engineer and building inspector,if required by authorities having jurisdiction. ' PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Grace,W.R.&Co.-Conn. 2. Hilti,Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. 3M;Fire Protection Products Division. 5. Tremco;Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 6. USG Corporation. 7. Or Approved Equal. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- 1 SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 2.02 FIRESTOPPING,GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through penetration ' firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to,the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials,including the following: a. Slag/rock wool fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. ' c. Fire rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 1 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.03 FILL MATERIALS ' A. General: Provide through penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced ' testing and inspecting agencies as"fill,""void,"or"cavity"materials. B. Latex Sealants: Single component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture. C. Firesto Devices: Facto assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent P Factory g material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. I D. Intumescent Putties: Non-hardening dielectric, water resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers,or silicone compounds. ' E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. ' F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a non-shrinking, homogeneous mortar. ' G. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral fiber,water insoluble expansion agents,and fire retardant additives. ' H. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent,silicone based liquid elastomers that,when mixed,expand and cure in place to produce a flexible,non-shrinking foam. 1. Silicone Sealants: Single component, silicone based, neutral curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- 1 SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 1. Grade: Pourable(self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and non-sag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a non-slumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to non-sag grade for both opening conditions. ' 2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces. 3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Non-sag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces. 2.04 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials,water(if required), ' type of mixing equipment,selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION I3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of ' work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following ' requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. ' B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond;do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. ' C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.03 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install through penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 'Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and ' depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings.indicated. 2. Apply materials so.they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify through penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6-inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For .plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of ' permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Through penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." ' 2. Contractor's name,address,and phone number. 3. Through penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. ' 5. Through penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. , B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection,damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through penetration firestop systems immediately and.install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. ' END OF SECTION 07 84 13 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- DIVISION 08-OPENINGS PAGES Section 08 11 13: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames .............................................................................................6 Section08 7100: Door Hardware ........................................................................................................................8 t ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - r SECTION 08 1113-HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. . 2. 08 7100"Door Hardware"for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,material descriptions, core descriptions,fire resistance rating,and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Frame details for each frame type,including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 2. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages,joints,field splices,and connections. 5. Details of accessories. 6. Details of conduit and preparations for power,signal,and control systems. ' C. Samples for Verification: 1. For each type of exposed finish required,prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5-inches. 2. For the following items,prepared on Samples about 12 by 12-inches to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction: a. Frames: Show profile, comer joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow metal panels and glazing if applicable. D. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory finished units. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. , C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five (5) units maximum in a vertical position with heads up,spaced by blocking,on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. ' 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.07 COORDINATION , A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items , with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products ' that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Amweld Building Products,LLC. 2. Benchmark;a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. ' 3. Ceco Door Products;an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company;an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company,Inc. 6. Firedoor Corporation. 7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.;an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Karpen Steel Custom Doors&Frames. 10. Kewanee Corporation(The). , 11. Mesker Door Inc. 12. Pioneer Industries,Inc. 13. Security Metal Products Corp. 14. Steelcraft;an Ingersoll-Rand company. 15. Windsor Republic Doors. 16. Or an approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting,or surface defects;pickled and oiled. ' C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel(CS), Type B;with minimum G60(Z180)metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M,Commercial Steel(CS),40Z(12G)coating designation; mill ' phosphatized. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- I SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES E. Inserts,Bolts,and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Grout: ASTM C 476,except with a maximum slum of 4-inches 100-mm as measured according to P P ( )� g ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section Glazing." H. Bituminous Coating: Cold applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) 1 dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components,and other deleterious impurities. 2.03 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from metallic coated sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabricate knocked down,drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. 4. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042-inch thick steel sheet. C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.04 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042-inch thick. 1 2. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate,welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames,not less than 0.042-inch thick,and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip type anchors,with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.05 FABRICATION ' A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects,warp,or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. ' 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Provide countersunk, flat or oval head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four (4) spot welds per anchor. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANII SHORES,FL -3- S SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32-inches o.c.and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60-inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90-inches high.' 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96-inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24-inches or fraction thereof above 96-inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42-inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. ' b. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6-inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26-inches o.c. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold or hot rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section"Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated,or if not indicated,according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface mounted door hardware. ' 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHIA115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 , Sections. F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. ' 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2.06 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard,fast curing,lead and chromate free primer complying with , ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. B. Color and Gloss: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates,areas,and conditions,with.Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. ' C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,filling, and dressing,as required to make repaired area smooth,flush,and invisible on exposed faces. ' B. Prior to installation adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames � l�fors squareness,alignment, � t, twist,and plumbness to the following tolerances: ' 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90-degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16-inch,measured at opposite face comers of jambs on parallel lines,and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to ' floor. C. Drill and tap frames to receive non-templated,mortised,and surface mounted door hardware. ' 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; ' comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position,plumbed,aligned,and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire protection rated openings,install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16-inch,measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16-inch,measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16-inch,measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of.wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16-inch,measured at jambs at floor. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ' 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments:. Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped,bowed,or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. ' C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to ' manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08 11 13 S BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAM[l SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 08 7100-DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. 2. Electrified door hardware. ' B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware,indicating the following: C. Samples for Verification: Submit minimum 2-by4-inch plate Samples of each type of finish required, except primed finish. ' D. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware,signed by product manufacturer. 1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors complies with listed fire door assemblies. E. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware schedule. ' F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. G. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors,frames,and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,hand,function,and finish of door hardware. a. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries,and number and date each page. b. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number,location,hand,fire rating and material of each door and frame. 2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. Include description and function of each lockset. 3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 6) Explanation of abbreviations,symbols,and codes contained in schedule. 7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 8) Door and frame sizes and materials. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-P AK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - r SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE ' 9) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation,and interface with other building control systems. ' a) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter, authorized person wants to exit;unauthorized person wants to enter;unauthorized person wants to exit. c. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date,particularly ' where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. ' 1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor,Architect/Engineer,and Owner about door hardware and keying. 2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity. 3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 4. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop ' Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DIU as an ' Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. 1. Electrified Door Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A qualified Architectural Hardware ' Consultant who is experienced in providing consulting services for electrified door hardware installations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. D. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use. ' 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and ' include basic installation instructions,templates,and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. ' 1.05 COORDINATION A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be ' factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated trequirements. B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with ' connections to power supplies and.access control system. PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE ' A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity,item,size,finish or color indicated. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 2.02 HINGES,GENERAL ' A. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated,provide the following: 1. Interior Hinges: As indicated on Drawings. ' B. Electrified Functions for Hinges: Comply with the following: 1. Power Transfer: Concealed PTFE jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and continuous through hinge knuckle. C. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2.03 HINGES 1 A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Listed under CategoryA in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7. C. Available Manufacturers: ' 1. Hager Companies(HAG). 2. Lawrence Brothers,Inc.(LB). 3. McKinney Products Company;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(MCK). 4. Stanley Commercial Hardware;Div.of The Stanley Works(STH). ' 5. Or an approved equal. 2.04 LOCKS AND LATCHES,GENERAL A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements,comply with ANSI A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping,pinching,or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key,tool,or special knowledge for operation. C. Electrified Locking Devices: BHMA A156.25. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25 2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- l SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE ' D.. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: Wrought. ' 2. Escutcheons(Roses): Wrought. 3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. 4. Lockset Designs: Provide design indicated on Drawings or an approved equal.. E. Rabbeted Meeting Doors: Provide special rabbeted front and strike on locksets for rabbeted meeting t stiles. F. Backset: 2-3/4-inches;unless otherwise indicated. ' G. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch bolt or lock bolt,with curved lip extended to protect frame,finished to match door hardware set,and as follows: ' 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2.05 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the following: 1. Cyndrical Locks: BHMA Al 56.13. ' B. Cylindrical Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts;BHMA A156.13,Grade 1. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Marshall Best Security. , b. No substitution allowed. 2.06 LOCK CYLINDERS A. High-Security Lock Cylinders: BHMA Al 56.30,Grade 1. B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type,constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel,or ' nickel silver,and complying with the following: 1. Number of Pins: Six(6). 2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight or clover type cam. C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the ' following: 1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other ' manufacturers'cylinders. D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide ten(10)construction master keys. ' a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. E. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for Pocks and latches. 2.07 KEYING A. Keys: Nickel silver. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." ' b. Quantity: Five(5). BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 2.08 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Standard: BHMA A156.31,Grade 1. B. General: Use fail secure electric strikes with fire-rated devices. C. Available Manufacturers: 1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.(ARM). ' 2. Brink,R.R.Locking Systems,Inc.(RRB). 3. Folger Adam Security Inc.;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(FAS). 4. HES,Inc.;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(IES). .5. Locknetics;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LSE). ' 6. Precision Hardware,Inc.(PH). 7. Rutherford Controls Infl.Corp.(RCI). 8. Security Door Controls(SDC). 9. Trine Access Technology(TAT). 10. Von Duprin;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(VD). 11. Or an approved equal. 2.09 CLOSERS A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements,comply with ANSI A117.1. 1. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. ' B. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather,and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory sized closers,adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. C. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4,Grade 1 Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Arrow USA;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(ARW). t b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(CR). c. DORMA Architectural Hardware;Member of The DORMA Group North America(DAH). d. Dor-O-Matic;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(DOR). e. LCN Closers;an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN). f. Norton Door Controls;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(NDC). g. Rixson Specialty Door Controls;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(RIX). h. SARGENT Manufacturing Company;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(SGT). i. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(YAL). j. Or an approved equal. D. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3. ' 2.10 DOOR GASKETING A. Standard: BHMA A156.22. B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners rrsfor exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb,forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles,forming seal when doors are closed. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door,forming seal with threshold when door is closed. C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfin per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control,as tested according to ASTM E 283. D. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a ' testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated,based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute rated doors and on smoke labeled doors. ' E. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. F. Available Manufacturers: ' I. Hager Companies(HAG). 2. M-D Building Products,Inc.(MD). 3. National Guard Products(NGP). 4. Pemko Manufacturing Co.(PEM). ' 5. Reese Enterprises(RE). 6. Sealeze;a unit of Jason Incorporated(SEL). 7. Zero International(ZRO). , 8. Or an approved equal. 2.11 THRESHOLDS A. Standard: BHMA A156.21. B. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements,comply with ANSI A117.1. ' 1. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than %z- inch. C. Available Manufacturers: ' 1. Hager Companies(HAG). 2. M-D Building Products,Inc.(MD). 3. National Guard Products(NGP). ' 4. Pemko Manufacturing Co.(PEM). 5. Reese Enterprises(RE). 6. Rixson Specialty Door Controls;an ASSA ABLOY Group company(RIX). 7. Sealeze;a unit of Jason Incorporated(SEL). 8. Zero International(ZRO). 9. Or an approved equal. 2.12 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire rated labels and as otherwise ' approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally ' prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on.hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. ' b. Strike plates to frames. c. Closers to doors and frames. 3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. ' 2.13 FINISHES A. Standard: BHMA A156.18,as indicated in door hardware sets. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the ' range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation ' tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. 1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A250.6. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware ' for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25;2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE ' B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished , in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level,plumb,and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as ' necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure ' proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. ' 2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees,the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3-inches from the latch,measured to the leading edge of the door. ' B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months atter date of Substantial Completion,Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. ' B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or ' deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08 7100 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 1VHAMI SHORES,FL -8- t 1 DIVISION 09—FINISHES PAGES ' Section 09 26 00: Gypsum Wallboard Systems.....................................................................................................3 Section09 65.50: Vinyl Base................................................................................................................................2 Section09 69 00: Access Flooring........................................................................................................................7 Section 09 90 00: Painting&Finishing.................................................................................................................5 Section 09 9100: Concrete Floor Sealer...............................................................................................................3 I ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MMM SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 09 26 00-GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS ' PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal framing required for gypsum board. 2. Gypsum board. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 07 84 13"Penetration Firestopping." 3. 09 90 00"Painting and Finishing." ' 1.02 REFERENCES A. GA 216-Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. ' B. ASTM C754-Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform gypsum wallboard systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754 and ' GA 216 unless otherwise specified in this Section. B. Keep copy of GA 216 in field office for duration of project. ' 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed and labeled by UL. PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 METAL FRAMING A. Provide metal framing materials in accordance with GA 216. ' B. Studs: Screw type C-shaped galvanized 20-gauge unless otherwise indicated. C. Runners: Match studs D. Fasteners and Anchorages: GA 216. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD ' A. Provide gypsum board materials in accordance with recommendations of GA 216. Furnish gypsum wallboard in maximum available lengths,consistent with installation requirements. ' B. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: UL-rated; 5/8-inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 09 26 00 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS 2.03 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Provide gypsum wallboard accessories in accordance with GA 216. ' B. Corner Beads: USG Dur-A-Base. C. Edge Trim: USG#200-B series. , D. Control Joint: USG#093. E. Reinforcing Tape,Joint Compound,Adhesive,Water,Fasteners: GA 216. ' PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 METAL FRAMING ERECTION-GENERAL A. Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754. ' B. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8-inch in 10-feet in any direction. , 3.02 METAL STUD ERECTION A. Metal Studs: 16-inch on center unless noted otherwise on Drawings. ' 3.03 SOFFIT FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's requirements. ' B. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum permissible deflection of L/360 of span and maximum surface deviation of 1/8-inch in 10-feet L/960. , C. Utilize 12-gauge hanger wires 4-feet on center to black steel channel. D. Attach hat shaped galvanized channel to black steel using prefabricated connectors. ' 3.04 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with recommendations of GA 216. , B. Install gypsum board vertically with edges over metal stud framing members and similar framing support members. , C. For multiple layer applications, use gypsum backing board for fust layer, placed parallel to framing furring members. Use fire rated gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions. Place subsequent ' layers parallel to first layer. Ensure joints of second layer do not occur over joints of first layer. D. Stagger edge joints on opposite side of partitions so they occur on different framing members. E. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or forming. ' F. Install gypsum board with%a-inch gap between gypsum board and floor. G. For multiple layer applications, secure second and third layers to first with adhesive and sufficient 1 support to hold in place. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 09 26 00 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS H. Place corner beads at external corners.Use longest practical lengths.Place Series 200 edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. I. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, corners, openings, and fixings to produce surface ready to receive surface finishes. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32-inch. ' J. .Remove and redo defective work. 1 END OF SECTION 09 26 00 1 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- 1 SECTION 09 65 50-VINYL BASE PART I—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl base. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 09 29 00"Gypsum Board." 3. 09 69 00"Access Flooring." 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples for approval and color by Owner and Architect/Engineer. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. Vinyl Base: 4-inches height, 1/8-inch thick, cove type to be installed in all areas where resilient flooring is installed and in areas where concrete floor remains. Base material shall be by Johnsonite or approved equal in colors as selected by Owner. 1 B. Edging and Transition Strips: Vinyl in color selected by Owner. ' C. Adhesive and leveling underlayment shall be approved and recommended by the manufacturer of the flooring material for the type of surfaces encountered. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION ' A. All wall surfaces shall be inspected prior to installation. Unacceptable conditions shall be corrected and notified to Construction Manager/Owner. ' B. Thoroughly clean surfaces of all dust,dirt,foreign matter prior to installation of flooring and base. C. Fill cracks and level irregularities with leveling compound. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Supply and install vinyl base as shown on the finish schedule. B. Install materials in a neat and workmanlike manner in strict conformance to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Rooms and area scheduled to receive vinyl base shall be maintained at a minimum temperature of 70° ' F,for at least 48 hours prior to, during,and 48 hours after application of flooring, and a minimum of 55°F thereafter. Store flooring material at such temperature for 48 hours prior to laying. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -1 - SECTION 09 65 50 VINYL BASE D. Cut and fit materials as required;fit edges and ends closely. Bed completely in the adhesive and make joints as inconspicuous as possible. The entire surface shall be smooth,straight,and free from buckles, waves,and projecting edges. ' E. Install base on prepared surfaces by spreading a thin coat of adhesive on back of base and placing it in the proper position and in full contact with the backing. Provide base in areas designated to receive , resilient flooring,carpeting,at all built-in casework and where indicated in the finish schedule. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove adhesive from face of base as work progresses. Remove all spots and stains. Clean it in ' accordance with manufacturer's maintenance recommendations. Do no cleaning until after flooring and base has bonded to subfloor and walls. ' END OF SECTION 09 65 50 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- 1 ' PART 1 -GENERAL SECTION 09 69 00-ACCESS FLOORING 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access flooring panels and understructure. 2. Floor panel coverings. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 09 9100"Concrete Floor Sealer." ' 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Access Flooring System: Assemblies composed of modular floor panels on pedestals with or without stringers. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide access flooring systems capable of withstanding the following loads ' and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, as determined by testing manufacturer's current standard products according to referenced procedures in CISCA A/F, "Recommended Test ' Procedures for Access Floors": 1. Concentrated Loads: Provide floor panels,including those with cutouts,capable of withstanding a concentrated design load of 1250 lbf,with a top-surface deflection under load and a permanent set not to exceed, respectively, 0.10 and 0.010-inch according to CISCA A/F, Section I, "Concentrated Loads." 2. Ultimate Loads: Provide access flooring systems capable of withstanding a minimum ultimate concentrated load of 2500 lbf without failing, according to CISCA A/F, Section II, "Ultimate Loading." ' 3. Rolling Loads: Provide access flooring systems capable of withstanding rolling loads of the following magnitude, with a combination of local and overall deformation not to exceed 0.040- inch after exposure to rolling load over CISCA A/F Path A or B, whichever path produces the greatest top-surface deformation,according to CISCA A/F,Section III,"Rolling Loads." a. CISCA A/F Wheel I Rolling Load: 1000 lbf. 4. Stringer Load Testing: Provide stringers, without panels in place, capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 450 lbf at center of span with a permanent set not to exceed 0.010-inch(0.25- mm),as determined per CISCA A/F,Section IV, "Stringer Load Testing." 5. Pedestal Axial Load Test: Provide pedestal assemblies,without panels or other supports in place, capable of withstanding a 6000 lbf axial load per pedestal, according to CISCA A/F, Section V, "Pedestal Axial Load Test." 6. Pedestal Overturning Moment Test: Provide pedestal assemblies,without panels or other supports in place, capable of withstanding an overturning moment per pedestal of 1000 lbf x inches, according to CISCA A/F,Section VI,"Pedestal Overturning Moment Test." B. Floor Panel Impact-Load Performance: Provide access flooring system capable of withstanding an impact load of 150 lb when dropped from 36-inches onto a 1-sq. in. area located anywhere on panel, without failing. Failure is defined as collapse of access flooring system. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - I i SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include layout of access flooring system and relationship to adjoining Work based on ' field-verified dimensions. 1. Details and sections with descriptive notes indicating materials, finishes, fasteners, typical and special edge conditions,accessories,and understructure. ' C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of flooring material and exposed finish indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of flooring material and exposed finish indicated. ' 1. Plastic Laminate: Size equal to full size floor panel. 2. Resilient Accessories: Manufacturer's standard accessories but not less than 12-inches in length. 3. Exposed Metal Accessories: 12-inches in length. 4. One complete full size floor panel, pedestal, and understructure unit for each type of access , flooring system required. E. Product Certificates: For each type of access flooring system,signed by product manufacturer. F. Qualification Data: For Installer. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing ' agency,or performed by access flooring manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency,for each type of flooring material and exposed finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain access flooring system through one source from a single manufacturer. ' C. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and install access flooring to comply with NFPA 75 requirements for raised flooring. , D. Provide floor panels that are clearly and permanently marked on their underside with panel type and concentrated-load rating. E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in ' Division 01 Section"Project Management and Coordination." 1. Review connection with mechanical and electrical systems. ' 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,equipment,and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install access flooring until spaces are enclosed, subfloor has been sealed,ambient temperature is between 40 and 90°F,and relative humidity is not more than 70 percent. ' 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location of mechanical and electrical work in underfloor cavity to prevent interference with ' access flooring pedestals. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- S 1 SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING B. Mark pedestal locations on subfloor by use a grid of to enable mechanical and electrical work to proceed without interfering with access flooring pedestals. C. Proceed with installation only after completion of other construction within affected spaces. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR PANELS AND UNDERSTRUCTURE A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Cementitious-Filled,Formed-Steel Panel Systems: a. ASM Modular Floors Inc. b. Tate Access Floors,Inc. ' c. Haworth,Inc. B. Floor Panels, General: Provide modular panels complying with the following requirements that one person, using a portable lifting device, can interchange with other field panels without disturbing ' adjacent panels or understructure: 1. Nominal Panel Size: 24 by 24-inches. 2. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate panels to the following tolerances with squareness tolerances expressed as the difference between diagonal measurements from corner to comer: ' a. Size and Squareness: Plus or minus 0.015-inch of required size, with a squareness tolerance of plus or minus 0.015-inch, unless tolerances are otherwise indicated for a specific panel type. b. Flatness: Plus or minus 0.020-inch,measured on a diagonal on top of panel. 3. Panel Attachment to Understructure: By gravity. C. Cementitious Filled,Formed Steel Panels: Fabricated with die cut flat top sheet and die formed and stiffened bottom pan formed from cold rolled steel sheet joined together by resistance welding to form an enclosed assembly, with metal surfaces protected against corrosion by manufacturer's standard factory applied finish. Fully grout internal spaces of completed units with manufacturer's standard cementitious fill. D. Pedestals: Assembly consisting of base,column with provisions for height adjustment,and head(cap); made of steel. ' 1. Provide pedestals designed for use in seismic applications. 2. Base: Square or circular base with not less than 16-sq.in.of bearing area. 3. Column: Of height required to bring finished floor to elevations indicated. Weld to base plate. 4. Provide vibration-proof leveling mechanism for malting and holding fine adjustments in height ' over a range of not less than 2-inches and for locking at a selected height, so deliberate action is required to change height setting and vibratory displacement is prevented. 5. Head: Designed to support understructure system indicated. ' E. Stringer Systems: Modular steel stringer systems made to interlock with pedestal heads and form a grid pattern placing stringers under each edge of each floor panel and a pedestal under each corner of each floor panel. Protect steel components with manufacturer's standard galvanized or corrosion- resistant paint finish. 1. Bolted Stringers: System of main and cross stringers connected to pedestals with threaded fasteners accessible from above. 2. Provide continuous gasket at contact surfaces between panel and stringers to deaden sound,to seal off underfloor cavity from above,and to maintain panel alignment and position. 3. Provide stringers that support each edge of each panel where required to meet design load criteria. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING ' 4. The access floor system is to have a resistance between 5.0 x 105 and 2.0 x 1010 ohms measured from the floor covering to the pedestal. ' 5. Panel-to-understructure (metal-to-metal) contacts are to have no more than 10 ohms resistance. Continuity clips are to be attached to the stringers as required. 2.02 FLOOR PANEL COVERINGS , A. General: Provide factory-applied floor coverings of type indicated that are laminated by access flooring manufacturer to tops of floor panels including perforated panels. ' B. Colors,Textures,and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Standard Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3,High-Wear type;fabricated in one piece to cover each panel ' face with integral trim serving as edging. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. ' b. Nevamar Company,LLC. D. Edging: Panel edge trim, when required, is to be manufacturer's standard integral mechanically ' fastened and locked within a preformed groove along the complete perimeter edge.Corner edges are to be mitered. Edge conditions are to be integral to the panel. Separate edge trim pieces are not to be acceptable. Provide size and profile of applied edge trim that fits floor coverings selected. 2.03 ACCESSORIES , A. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard adhesive for bonding pedestal bases to subfloor. ' 1. Provide adhesive with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). B. Cutouts: Provide cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets. Provide ' reinforcement or additional support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with standard performance requirements. 1. Number,Size, Shape,and Location: As indicated or scheduled on the drawings. Fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets in sizes indicated or, if size of cutouts exceeds maximum ' grommet size available,trim edge of cutouts with manufacturer's standard plastic molding having tapered top flange. Furnish removable covers for grommets. 2. Provide foam rubber pads for sealing annular space formed in cutouts by cables. ' C. Service Outlets: Standard UL-listed and labeled assemblies, for recessed mounting flush with top of floor panels, for power, communication, and signal services, and complying with the following requirements: ' 1. Structural Performance: Cover capable of supporting a 1000-lbf concentrated load. 2. Cover and Box Type: Hinged polycarbonate cover with opening for passage of cables when cover is closed and including frame and steel box or formed steel plate for mounting electrical receptacles. ' 3. Location: In center of panel quadrant,unless otherwise indicated. 4. Receptacles and Wiring: Electrical receptacles and wiring for service outlets are specified in Division 26 Sections. ' D. Panel Lifting Device: Manufacturer's standard portable lifting device of type required for specified panels. Provide two(2)lifting devices per room of each type required. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- S ' SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING E. Perimeter Support: Where indicated, provide manufacturers standard method for supporting panel edge and forming transition between access flooring and adjoining floor coverings at same level as ' access flooring. F. Floor leveling compound for pedestals is to be Tnemec Series 63-1500 Surfacer,or an approvedq equal. G. Provide and install weather stripping around all equipment. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer and manufacturer's representative present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. ' 1. Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, foreign deposits, and debris that might interfere with adhesive attachment of pedestals. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Pre-installation Adhesive Field Test: Before installing pedestals, field test their adhesion to subfloor surfaces as follows: 1. In areas representative of each subfloor surface, set typical pedestal assemblies in same adhesive ' and methods required for completed work. 2. Allow test installation to cure for 30 days,with a pressure of 25 Ibf applied vertically to pedestals during this period. ' 3. After curing, apply lateral load against a straight steel bar inserted 2-inches into pedestal stems. Measure the force needed to cause adhesive failure of pedestal base. 4. Proceed with installation only after tests show compliance with performance requirement specified for pedestals'capability to resist overturning moment. ' 3.02 INSPECTION ' A. The access floor contractor is to examine the subfloor for unevenness, irregularities, and conditions that would affect the quality and execution of the work.Verify that substrates are free of cracks,ridges, depressions, scale, foreign deposits, and debris that might interfere with the adhesive attachment of pedestals. ' B. The installation of access flooring is not to proceed until all subfloor surfaces are clean, dry, clear of other trades,and ready to receive flooring. ' C. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings to ensure the proper fitting of all work. 3.03 PREPARATION ' A. Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at floor perimeter to a minimum. Avoid using panels cut to less than 6-inches. ' B. Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum clean subfloor to remove dust,dirt,and construction debris before beginning installation. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING ' 3.04 INSTALLATION ' A. Install access flooring system and accessories under supervision of access flooring manufacturer's authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies with performance requirements and is free of instability,rocking,rattles,and squeaks. 1 B. After each access floor perimeter and starting point have been defined,and prior to the installation of any subfloor piping, conduit, or other subfloor appurtenances, mark-out all floor pedestals or, at a ' minimum,strike out all floor pedestal grid lines as required C. Set pedestals in adhesive as recommended in writing by access flooring manufacturer to provide full bearing of pedestal base on subfloor. t D. After the pedestal mark-out is completed,apply a thorough coat of concrete floor sealer as described in Section 09 91 00 "Concrete Floor Sealer." Concrete sealers and pedestal adhesives are to be chemically compatible with each other. ' E. Complete all necessary subfloor preparation and vacuum clean the subfloor of all dust, dirt, and construction debris before starting the raised flooring installation. Touch-up floor sealers as required ' due to construction activity. Set pedestals in adhesive as recommended by the floor manufacturer to provide full bearing of each pedestal base on the subfloor. F. Adjust pedestals to permit top of installed panels to be set flat,level,and to proper height. ' G. Secure stringers to pedestal heads according to access flooring manufacturer's written instructions. H. Install flooring panels securely in place, properly seated with panel edges flush. Do not force panels ' into place. 1. Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids greater than ' 1/8-inch where panels abut vertical surfaces. J. Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt or debris producing activities at a remote location or as required to prevent contamination of subfloor under access flooring already installed. , K. Ground flooringsystem as recommended b manufacturer and as needed to comply with performance Y Y PY requirements for electrical resistance of floor coverings.Refer to Division 26 sections. L. Scribe and install underfloor cavity dividers to closely fit against subfloor surfaces, and seal with ' mastic. M. Scribe vertical closures to closely fit against subfloor and adjacent finished-floor surfaces. Set in ' mastic and seal to maintain plenum effect within underfloor cavity. N. Clean dust, dirt, and construction debris caused by floor installation, and vacuum subfloor area, as ' installation of floor panels proceeds. O. Seal underfloor air cavities at construction seams,penetrations,and perimeter to control air leakage as t recommended in writing by manufacturer. P. Install access flooring without change in elevation between adjacent panels and within the following tolerances: 1. Plus or minus 1/16-inch in any 10-foot distance. 2. Plus or minus 1/8-inch from a level plane over entire access flooring area. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- 1 SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING 3.05 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on access flooring for 24 hours and removal of floor panels for 72 hours after ' installation to allow pedestal adhesive to set. B. After completing installation, vacuum clean access flooring and cover with continuous sheets of reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain protective covering until time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace access flooring panels that are stained,scratched,or otherwise damaged or that do not comply with specified requirements. D. The raised flooring Contractor is to be responsible for a comprehensive cleaning (vacuum and damp mop)of the underfloor area and of the raised floor surfaces prior to a Gas Suppression Concentration Test. All stringers are to be included in this cleaning. A dust-free environment is to be maintained. The following summarizes the scope of work: 1. Prior to commencement, obtain a "before" airborne particle count using a QIII Laser Particle Counter, or an approved equal, at several locations around the Data Center. The results, and the locations at which the"counts"were taken,are to be recorded for"after"cleaning comparison. ' 2. The entire surface of the raised floor area is to be swept and vacuumed using a triple-filtration HEPA (high-efficiency particulate air) vacuum, or an approved equal, capable or removing 99.97%of particles 0.3 microns or larger. All dirt and debris is to be removed prior to lifting of the floor panels. 3. All floor panels are then to be lifted in such a manner so as not to disturb the structural integrity of the raised floor. Floor panels are to be systematically pulled in a checkerboard pattern with no more than 10%of the panels removed at any one time. 4. The entire sub-floor plenum area is to be cleared of debris and surface dirt,and then vacuumed to remove all dust using the same type HEPA vacuum as specified in Item#2 above.Mop and towel clean the concrete sub-floor to remove any remaining dust. Mops are to be of the lint-free type with non-metallic handles and sewn ends to prevent snagging.Mop heads are to have looped ends ' and not of the open type. 5. All stringers and pedestals are to be individually vacuumed and cleaned using lint-free,anti-static wipes and cleaning chemicals that are pH neutral,static dissipative,and approved by the computer hardware manufacturers. 6. Where applicable, and approved by the Architect, walls are then to be vacuumed and any equipment,such as A/C units,UPS cabinets,electrical panel boards,and similar equipment are to be cleaned thoroughly using the same wipes and cleaning chemicals as specified in Item#4 above. 7. The entire top of the raised floor is then to be cleaned with a specially formulated agent designed for use on laminated flooring as recommended by the floor manufacturer. Treat all smudges, stains, black marks, and other similar spots with approved solutions and scrub with a medium grade 3M scrub pad. ' 8. The raised floor surface is then to be neutralized to remove any remaining corrosives, salts, or construction residue. 9. Perform a final rinse of the entire floor surface with a damp mop and clean water.Mops are to be damp, not wet. Use a two (2)-bucket system, one for mopping, and one for rinsing. Change the water in both buckets often. 10. As soon as cleaning is complete,the access flooring Contractor is to obtain a new particle count at the same locations used prior to cleaning.Submit copies of both the"before"and"after"results to the Architect for review. 11. Replace all access flooring panels that are stained, scratched,or otherwise damaged or that do not comply with the specified requirements. END OF SECTION 09 69 00 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- SECTION 09 90 00-PAINTING AND FINISHING tPART I—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Include all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for the furnishing and installation ' of all painting and finishing work as herein specified and shown on drawings, itemized, but not necessarily limited to,the following: a. Preparation of new and existing surfaces. b. Application of surface finishes on various materials as called for on the Room Finish Schedule and as shown on drawings. c. Interior hollow metal frames and doors. d. Application of surface finishes to various exterior materials and surfaces as called for on the Drawings. ' e. Protection of adjacent materials and areas. f. Thorough clean-up upon completion. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 08 11 13"Hollow Metal Doors and Frames." 3. 09 29 00"Gypsum Board." 4. Work identified in Sections 23 through 26. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. General: In compliance with Division 01 and as specified herein. B. Product Data: Minimum thirty (30) days prior to beginning painting work, submit complete list of products proposed,even when using products specified herein. 1. Indicate manufacturer, brand name, quality and type paint for each surface to be painted and finished. C. Samples: Identify each sample finish, formula, color name and number, and sheen name and gloss units. 1. Brush Outs: Upon issue of final color schedule,prepare actual brush out for each paint,stain and finish specified. Submit brush outs in duplicate;minimum size 120-square inches.Apply products in specified number of coats for actual work to following substrates: a. To simulate concrete and masonry: concrete block painted one face. ' b. To simulate gypsum board,lumber,board products,and metals for paint finish: hardboard. D. Colors: 1. The Owner/Construction Manager will select colors prior to beginning painting work. 2. The Owner/Construction Manager will provide color code numbers or color chips for color of final coat on each painted surface. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Manufacturer 1. All materials shall be manufactured by a nationally recognized producer of these products and ' installation shall be in accordance with its current printed recommendations. 2. Include on label of all containers: a. Manufacturer's name. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND FINISHING b. Type of paint. c. Manufacturer's stock number. ' d. Color. e. Instructions for reducing where applicable. f. Applicable Federal Specifications number. B. Fungus Control: All organic coating shall show no fungus growth when tested as specified in Federal ' Test Method Standard Number 141,Method 6271.1. C. Quality Control: Obtain approval of first finished room, space,or item of each color scheme required , by the Owner for color,texture,and workmanship. D. Qualifications of Applicator: Minimum of five (5) recently successfully completed projects of ' comparable size and complexity as this project. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Ensure surface temperature or surrounding air temperature is above 40°F ' before applying finishes. 1. Minimum application temperature for latex paints for interior work is 45°F and 50°F for exterior , work. 2. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain temperatures above 45°F for 24 hours before,during,and 48 hours after application of finishes. B. Protection: ' 1. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage resulting from inadequate and unsuitable protection. 2. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray and droppings ' from damaging surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation area. 3. Place cotton waste,cloths,and material that may constitute fire hazard, in closed metal containers , and remove daily from site. 4. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings, prior to painting operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each area. Do not use solvent that may remove permanent lacquer finish to clean hardware. 5. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated. ' 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in factory sealed packages with labels intact and seals unbroken. r B. Storage: Store materials in one location and maintain storage area in safe and clean condition. , 1. Unless specifically approved otherwise by Owner's Representative and Architect/Engineer, provide separate storage building for painting materials. Do not store painting materials in building without written approval. 2. Keep one usable fire extinguisher in storage area. ' C. Take proper care to prevent damage during delivery,handling and storage. D. Store only approved project materials on project site. ' E. Store in weatherproof,lockable enclosures in location as directed by the Construction Manager. F. Comply with health and fire regulations. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND FINISHING PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Except as otherwise specified, materials shall be the products of the following manufacturers or approved equal thereof: 1. PPG Industries. 2. Benjamin Moore. 3. Sherwin-Williams. 4. Tnemec. B. Materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS ' A. Equal products by"acceptable"manufacturers will be considered. B. Submit substitute paint schedule, listing all surfaces and proposed products, compared with specified ' items. Include complete literature and any information required to consider proposed substitution. C. Obtain Owner's approval prior to purchase and delivery. ' 2.03 MATERIALS A. Paint products specified are first line commercial unless otherwise indicated. Products of acceptable ' manufacturers listed may be furnished based upon Architect/Engineerevaluations.. B. All finish materials in public and fire protected areas shall have an A, Flame Spread Classification. ' C. Vapor barrier paint,where indicated on drawings,with a maximum permicity of.5 perms(per ASTM- D1653). ' 2.04 COLORS A. Match applied colors of paints or coating systems with approved 12-inches x 12-inches hardboard color board samples. ' B. Allow for colors normally selected from manufacturer's full range of colors as well as custom mixed colors for all paint or coating systems specified. ' 2.05 MIXING AND TINTING A. Provide and submit for approval color board samples showing precise matching of color samples selected and provided by Owner. B. Deliver paints and enamels ready mixed to the job site. ' C. Accomplish job mixing and job tinting only when acceptable to Owner and then in strict adherence to manufacturer's instructions. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- �I� SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND FINISHING PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION , A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and wall coatings for conditions that will adversely affect execution, performance, or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition ' through preparatory work as included in Paragraph 3.02. B. Do not proceed with surface preparations or coating applications until conditions are suitable. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Gypsum Wallboard. ' 1. Fill narrow,shallow cracks and small holes with spackling compound. 2. Rake deep,wide cracks and deep holes. 3. Dampen with clear water. 4. Fill with thin layers of joint taping compound. ' 5. Allow to dry. 6. Sand smooth-do not raise nap of paper on wallboard. B. Ferrous Metal Surfaces. , 1. Prepare surface in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Surface Preparation(SSPC) Specification SSPC-SP-2-63 Hand Tool Cleaning 2. Feather edges of sound paint by grinding if necessary. ' C. Non-Ferrous Metal Surfaces. 1. Prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer's standards. 2. Feather edges of sound paint by grinding if necessary. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General Requirements ' 1. Do not apply coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by paint manufacturer. 2. Test with moisture meter. ' 3. Apply paint,stain,or coatings with suitable brushes,rollers,or spraying equipment. 4. Rate of application shall not exceed that as recommended by manufacturer for the surface involved. 5. Keep brushes,rollers,and spraying equipment clean,dry, free from contaminants and suitable for ' the finish required. 6. Apply stain by brush. 7. Comply with recommendations of product manufacturer for drying time between succeeding , coats. 8. Vary slightly the color of successive coats. 9. Sand and dust between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 5-feet. 10. Finish coats shall be smooth,free of brush marks,streaks,laps,or pile up of paints,and skipped or ' missed areas. 11. Finished metal surfaces shall be free of skips,voids or pinholes in any coat when tested with a low voltage detector. B. Inspection ' 1. Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been inspected by Construction Manager/ Owner. 2. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats applied. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND FINISHING 3. Leave all parts of moldings and trim clean and true to details with no undue amount of paint in comers and depressions. 4. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no overlapping. 5. Apply primer on all work before glazing is done. 6. Refinish whole wall where portion of finish has been damaged or is not acceptable. C. Painted Work 1. Back prime all interior millwork. 2. Runs on faces not permitted. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Paint surfaces,which require painted finish,are to be properly and completely finished with materials and in manner similar to other surfaces of similar type. B. Runs,sags,drapes,thin spots,holidays,and other unworkmanlike results will not be accepted. C. Painting materials may be applied by brush,roller,or spray. ' 3.05 FINISHING FORMULAS A. The number of coats specified herein is to be considered the minimum number to cover and finish- decorated surfaces. If, after the specified number of coats are applied, surfaces are not completely ' covered,apply additional coats as necessary at no additional cost to the Owner. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before applying succeeding coat. ' B. Interior Gypsum Wallboard with Vapor Barrier Coating 1. First Coat: Sherwin Williams Moisture Vapor Barrier B72W00001 2. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Low Odor Latex Eg-Shel B9 3. Topcoat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Low Odor Latex Eg-Shel B9 C. All Other Gypsum Wallboard: 1. First Coat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Latex Primer B11W900 2. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Low Odor Latex Eg-Shel B9 ' 3. Topcoat: Sherwin Williams Harmony Interior Low Odor Latex Eg-Shel B9 E. Interior Hollow Metal Frames ' 1. First Coat: Sherwin Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 Series 2. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin Williams Pro Classic Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss B31 3. Topcoat:Sherwin Williams Pro Classic Waterbome Acrylic Semi-Gloss B31 G. All Other Interior Ferrous Metals 1. First Coat: Sherwin Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 Series 2. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin Williams Acrolon 100 Water Based Urethane Gloss B65-720 3. Topcoat:Sherwin Williams Acrolon 100 Water Based Urethane Gloss B65-720 3.06 CLEANING ' A. Touch up and restore finish where damaged. B. Remove spilled,splashed,or splattered paint from all surfaces. C. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned. END OF SECTION 09 90 00 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- 1 SECTION 09 9100-CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER tPART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Include all labor,materials,equipment and services necessary for the furnishing and installation of all sealing work as herein specified and shown on drawings, itemized,but not necessarily limited to the following: a. Preparation of new and existing surfaces. b. Application of surface sealer on concrete slab as called for on the Room Finish Schedule and as shown on drawings. C. Protection of adjacent materials and areas. d. Thorough clean up upon completion. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 2. 09 69 00"Access Floor System" 3. 09 90 00"Painting and Finishing." 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data indicating conformance with state environmental regulations. B. Submit product data indicating compatibility with pedestal adhesive to be used in access floor ' installation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: 1. All materials shall be manufactured by a nationally recognized producer of these products and installation shall be.in accordance with its current printed recommendations. ' 2. Include on label of all containers: a. Manufacturer's name. b. Type of sealer. c. Manufacturer's stock number. d. Instructions for reducing where applicable. e. Applicable Federal Specification number. ' B. Fungus Control 1. All organic coating shall show no fungus growth when tested as specified in Federal Test Method Standard No. 141,Method 6271.1. C. Qualifications of Applicator 1. Minimum of five recently successfully completed projects of comparable size and complexity as this project. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in unopened containers or manufacturer's cartons, properly identified with manufacturer's labels. B. Take proper care to prevent damage during delivery,handling,and storage. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 09 9100 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER C. Store only approved project materials on project site. D. Store in weatherproof, lockable enclosures in location as directed by the Construction Manager when ' product must be stored outdoors. E. Comply with health and fire regulations. ' 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings ' and coating systems can be applied. 1.06 PROTECTION ' A. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated. B. Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades and surfaces not being sealed. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' A. Except as otherwise specified, materials shall be the products of the following manufacturers or ' approved equal thereof: 1. Below raised floor areas: Manufacturer Acceptable Products a. Euclid Chemical Company Super Floor Coat ' 19215 Redwood Road Aqua-Cure VOX Cleveland,OH 44110 (216)531-9222 b. Michigan Adhesive Manufacturing Clear Bond 1 8555 Silver Creek Road Whitehall,MI 49461 1 231 893-6623 c. Sonneborn Lapidolith , 4075 McConnel Drive Burnaby,B.0 (604)676-0806 ' 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Equal products by"acceptable"manufacturers will be considered. t B. If other sealers are to be used for below the raised floor,their performance must first be analyzed by performing a pedestal overturn test. To perform this test,a sample of pedestals(usually five)are glued ' to the sealed subfloor and allowed to cure for a sufficient amount of time (at least 30 days, will be longer for some sealers, i.e. 90 days). At the end of this period, a lateral load is applied to the top of the pedestal, such that the load (Fp) times the pedestal height (1) will equal or exceed 1000 inch pounds(i.e.Fp* 1 1000 in/lbs). If the pedestal resists this load,the floor sealer will be appropriate for , use with our pedestal adhesive. In general, floor sealers containing urethanes, silicones, or acrylics will not meet the above criteria. The standard pedestal adhesives are A.Z. Bogart #282 and DAP DuraBond 75-7641. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 09 9100 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER 2.03 MATERIALS ' A. Products specified are first line commercial unless otherwise indicated. Products of acceptable manufacturers listed may be furnished based upon Construction Manager's evaluations. ' B. All finish materials in public and fire protected areas shall have an"A"Flame Spread Classification. C. Colors shall be selected from manufacturer's standard selections. More than one color may be selected. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive coatings for conditions that will adversely affect execution, performance or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through 1 preparatory work. B. Do not proceed with surface preparations or coating applications until conditions are suitable. ' 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Thoroughly clean surfaces to manufacturer's requirements prior to installation. ' 3.03 APPLICATION A. General Requirements ' 1. Do not apply coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by paint manufacturer. 2. Test with moisture meter. ' 3. Apply coatings with suitable brushes,rollers or spraying equipment. 4. Rate of application shall not exceed that as recommended by manufacturer for the surface involved. 5. Keep brushes, rollers and spraying equipment clean, dry, free from contaminants and suitable for ' the finish required. 6. Comply with recommendations of product manufacturer for drying time between succeeding coats. 3.04 CLEANING A. Touch up and restore finish where damaged. ' B. Remove spilled,splashed or splattered coating from all surfaces. C. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned. END OF SECTION 09 9100 S ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- DIVISION 21—FIRE SUPPRESSION PAGES ' Section 2100 10: General Requirements for Fire Suppression Work ................................................................14 Section 2105 00: Common Work Results for Fire Suppression...........................................................................9 Section 2105 10: Acceptance Testing...................................................................................................................2 Section2109 00: Supports&Anchors................................................:................................................................4 Section 2150 50: HFC-125(FE-25)Suppression System....................................................................................7 Section 2199 10: Testing and Approval...............................................................................................................l ' BARRY LNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANII SHORES,FL - l - SECTION 2100 10-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Conditions, and Special Conditions and other information contained in the Project Manual shall be incorporated as part of all Sections of this Division of work. B. Under this Contract and all sections herein,provide to the Owner,rooms with complete and operative fire suppression systems and the necessary connections to all electrically operated equipment as ' outlined herein and as guided by the Contract Drawings. C. All labor and materials supplied under this Division shall be the highest quality as judged by the Architect/Engineer. ' D. A site visit is mandatory in order to inspect existing conditions. 1.02 DEFINITION OF TERMS IN THIS SECTION ' A. "Provide and install': Arrange for and assume all costs for providing and installing on the job site, complete,operable systems as specified and/or indicated on the Drawings. ' B. "Provide":Used interchangeably with"Provide and Install." C. "Install': Utilize trade manpower and expertise to connect items provided by others. Connection ' includes receiving,rigging,and placement as required. D. "Work": Used to include all labor and materials required to satisfy the requirements of the Fire ' Suppression Division of the Specifications and Drawings. E. "Contractor" and "Fire Suppression Contractor": Used in this Division refers to the respective Trade Subcontractor,who shall be responsible for all work as indicated in bidding document. F. "Approved", "Approved equal": Acceptable for the use intended and in compliance with all applicable codes,regulations,and satisfies contractual obligations relative to function and quality as judged by the Architect/Engineer,Owner,and Engineer. ' G. "Responsible", "Responsibility": Assume all consequences or contingencies, monetary and otherwise, under this basic Contract,with no additional costs passed on to others by Contractor. ' H. "Neat workmanlike manner", "Properly installed": Installed in accordance with all applicable codes and good recommended practice,such as would be instructed in a trade school.The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to judge acceptability. ' I. "Power wiring": All wiring carrying the operating current from a fire suppression power source to electric operated devices,operating at 100 volts or more. J. "Control wiring": All wiring, other than power wiring, from electric operated equipment to control devices and between various control devices. K. "Furnish":Trade Contractor shall furnish on the job site for use by others. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK 1 1.03 CODES,REGULATIONS,AND CONDITIONS GOVERNING WORK A. Bid price shall reflect the investigation of all conditions governing work, including the cost of all ' modifications to systems, should they be necessary, to meet all code and local regulations and all conditions that will affect work. The following shall be included in the investigation of conditions: 1. Contract Drawings and Specifications. 2. Conditions at site. 3. Constraints and conditions due to partial Owner occupancy during construction. 4. All applicable codes and local regulations. 5. Anticipation of weather conditions during the construction period. ' 6. Local regulations or requirements of the local Fire Suppression and/or Building Inspector. 7. Anticipation of strikes or forced work stoppages. The Fire Suppression Contractor shall be totally responsible for all assumptions,omissions,and errors , in the investigation of conditions. B. All work shall be done in strict accordance with the latest accepted edition of all governing codes and ' regulations including,but not limited to,the following: 1. NFPA 70-Volume 6 National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 101 -Volume 9 Life Safety Code. 3. NFPA 72-Signaling System. , 4. International Building Code. 5. All state and local codes and enforced regulations affecting work. C. In no wayshall the information on the Drawings or in the S ecifications preclude code compliance. g P P Where work indicated on the Contract Documents exceeds code requirements,the work as outlined in the Contract Documents shall take precedence. D. Secure and keep current all licenses, permits, approvals, or certificates required for work under this ' Division of the Contract. E. Conduct all testing as required by the inspecting authorities. ' 1.04 DRAWING INTERPRETATION A. Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and intended to outline basic engineering and systems design, therefore,do not show minor details and accessories. Because a minor component is not shown,shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for furnishing and installing all such items necessary to provide complete,operative,and properly installed systems to the Owner under the basic Contract. If there are any doubts as to work required,the Contractor shall obtain a clarification from the Engineer ' in the bid stage. B. The Contract Drawings show the intended location of equipment; however, the Contractor shall be ' responsible for any minor adjustments or relocations necessary due to choice of equipment and coordination conflicts. All equipment relocations must be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. ' C. The project drawings, specifications, and other documents are complimentary. Items required by one shall designate requirement by the other, whether explicitly stated or not. Where documents conflict, the work of the more stringent nature shall be required. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK 1.05 RECORD DRAWINGS ' A. An accurate record shall be kept of all fire suppression work, showing the exact final location of all devices and equipment when not as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. All changes made by Addenda or Change Order shall be incorporated on the Record Drawings. C. Record Drawings shall be turned over to the Engineer for approval at the time of notification of ' completion of the project. D. Refer to the Project Manual for General Conditions,Supplementary General Conditions,and additional requirements. ' 1.06 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION OF WORK ' A. Work shall be scheduled to meet the Construction Manager's overall construction schedule,as well as coordinate with the schedules of all other Contractors and Subcontractors, so that work progresses smoothly with no delays. B. Refer to the Project Manual for basic sequence of Construction. C. Clearances and access spaces shall be maintained around equipment. Installations shall be coordinated with the equipment and system of all other trades. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ' eliminate any conflicts that arise due to failure to coordinate. D. Permitted use, location, and type of all anchors, supports, sleeves, and other materials which shall be ' cast into concrete,must be verified with the Architect/Engineer and are subject to approval. 1.07 MATERIALS AND SUBMISSION FOR APPROVAL ' A. Refer to Project Manual for basic guidelines,covering submission of materials for approval. B. Provide the proper materials necessary to complete all work included in this Division of the Contract. Additional Costs incurred in any Division of work consequent to substitution of materials, shall be ' investigated prior to submission. All cost penalties shall be the responsibility of the Contractor regardless of approval of such materials. C. The materials specified herein are indicative of both the characteristics and quality of materials necessary to satisfy Contract responsibilities; type and quality standards will be strictly upheld in consideration for approval of equipment and the Architect/Engineer's judgment of compliance will be final. ' D. Requests for substitutions will not be considered until after award of Contract, and then will be accepted only from the Contractor through the Architect/Engineer. All requests must be in writing or in the form of material submittals with special cover letter giving credits available or reasons for the proposed substitution. The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying,on request, information and samples of both specified and substituted materials. ' E. The Architect/Engineer and Owner reserve the right to refuse approval of materials and equipment used on the job that, in their opinion, does not meet the standards outlined herein. Only after documentation of approval,where approval is required,shall materials be ordered and installed on this project. All installed materials requiring approval that have not been approved, shall be removed and ' replaced as directed by the Architect/Engineer. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- 1 SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK F. Architect/Engineer's review of Shop Drawings will cover materials only. Quantities and dimensions necessary to satisfy the Contract and to coordinate with other trades will be the Contractor's ' responsibility. G. Material approvals shall be obtained in time so material can be manufactured and delivered to the job site in coordination with project work schedules. Additional costs to all trades arising because of ' material not being available when necessary shall be the responsibility of the Contractor causing the delay. H. Material submissions shall contain the following information in reiteration and in addition to the ' information required in the Project Manual: 1. Project name. 2. Specification section and paragraph submitted under. , 3. Manufacturer. 4. Manufacturing materials,gauge,and finish. 5. Electrical requirements and characteristics. 6. Performance and operating characteristics. , 7. List or denote all accessories and options included. 8. Delete all listed accessories and options not included. 9. Indicate all special equipment required for a complete system to be supplied by others, and by whom they will be supplied. , 10. Indicate any deviations from specification and other constraints that may affect the work of any contractor. 1. All related equipment necessary to comprise a complete system shall be submitted in a folder with ' each page identified. Indicate when submitting an incomplete system in which some components will be submitted under separate cover. J. The following procedures shall apply: ' 1. Transmit each submittal with form accepted by Architect/Engineer. 2. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with an ' alphabetic suffix. 3. Identify Project, Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier, pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s),and specification Section number,as appropriate. 4. Apply Trade Contractor's or Supplier's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, ' verification of Products required, field dimensions,adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information,is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 5. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project,and deliver in accordance with the Project Manual. 6. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be ' detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. 7. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps. 8. Revise and resubmit submittals as required,identifyall changes-made since previous submittal. ' 9. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. K. Within three(3) days after date of Contractor Agreement and/or Purchase Order,submit complete list 1 of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. L. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog 1 designation,and reference standards. M. Within ten(10)calendar days after date of Contractor Agreement and/or Purchase Order,submit shop t drawings in the form of one (1) reproducible transparency and one (1) blue line reproduction, each item listed on the schedule. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK N. Within ten (10) calendar days after the date of Contractor Agreement and/or Purchase Order, submit product data as follows: 1. Submit only pages which are pertinent; mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, reference to Specification Section and Article number. Show reference standards, performance, and controls; component parts; finishes; dimension; and required clearances. 2. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the Work.Delete information not applicable. O. Review submittals and shop drawings prior to transmittal; determine and verify field measurements, field construction criteria, manufacturer's catalogs numbers, and conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor review and submission indicates that the Supplier certifies that he(it)has investigated and verified all materials,and specification criteria and that he has checked and coordinated same with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents and that there are no deviations except as specifically noted in this submission,and hereby submits for review in accordance with requirements of the General Conditions. P. Coordinate submittals with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. Q. Sign or initial each sheet of shop drawings and product data.Each sample label to certify compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. Notify Owner in writing at time of submittal of any deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. R. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires submittal until return of submittal with Architect/Engineer acceptance. ' S. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals; identify changes made since previous submittal. ' T. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data U. Identify conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and Contract Documents. V. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate to Architect/ Engineer for review,in quantities specified for Product Data. W. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date,affidavits,and certifications as appropriate. ' X. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Construction Manager. Y. Shop Drawings and Data indicated in Division 01. Z. Shop drawings and submittals shall be reviewed and returned within ten (10) working days. The t following meanings shall apply: 1. "Approved" means that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed, providing submittal complies with Contract Documents. Supplier assumes sole responsibility for the required compliance.No response is required of the Supplier. ' 2. "Approved as Noted"means that fabrication,manufacture,or construction may proceed,provided submittal is amended and resubmitted to comply with Construction Manager's notations and the Contract Documents, or the Supplier confirms in writing that he will do so. If for any reason BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK contractor cannot confirm compliance with notations, Supplier shall resubmit as described for submittals stamped Rejected. ' 3. "Not Approved" means that submittal does not comply with Contract Documents, and that fabrication,manufacture,or construction as submitted must not proceed under any circumstances. Submittals stamped"Not Approved"are not permitted on job site. 4. Supplier receipt of shop drawings or data stamped "Not Approved" shall not be the basis of a claim for extension or delay,with regard to delivery of equipment or material. 1.08 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be done by competent Tradespersons, skilled in the portion of work they will be ' engaged in on this project. All work shall be in accordance with the highest standards of established practice in the fire suppression trade, and shall produce the most stable, durable, and presentable results. B. All work under this Division,judged below standard by the Architect/Engineer,shall be brought up to standard at no cost to the Owner. ' 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION/.INFORMATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services site conditions and q ty PP � P > workmanship,to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturer's instructions,including each step in sequence. ' C. Should manufacturer's instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Owner before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent ' tolerances,codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration,physical distortion or disfigurement. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation,quality of workmanship,start-up of equipment,test,adjust,and balance of equipment and as applicable,and to initiate instructions when necessary. H. All equipment provided under this Division shall be set up,and adjusted following the manufacturer's , instructions or requirements for proper operation and maintenance. 1. Where equipment manufacturer's instruction or requirements conflict with information on the Drawings or in the Specifications,the Engineer shall be advised.The Engineer shall resolve conflicts , and the solution shall be instituted under the basic Contract with no additional cost to the Owner. J. The Owner,or his/her operating personnel,shall be instructed in the location and use of all equipment ' and systems installed under the Electrical Division of Work. This shall include the services of a man familiar with all equipment and systems for a minimum of two (2) days and maximum of one (1) week. K. Submit to the Architect/Engineer for approval, four (4) copies of Maintenance Manuals for all major , equipment and systems. Maintenance Manuals,when approved,will be turned over to the Owner for BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- ' SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK his use. The Manuals shall contain installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, and spare parts list. 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING ' A. Execute cutting,fitting,and patching to complete Work and to: 1. Fit the several parts together to integrate with other work 2. Uncover work to install ill-timed work ' 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work 4. Remove sample of installed work for testing 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of fire suppression and electrical work B. Maintain weathertight conditions at all times, arrange temporary protection as required to provide same. ' C. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. D. After uncovering,inspect conditions affecting performance of work. ' E. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. F. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; devices and methods to protect other ' portions of Project from damage. G. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. H. Employ authorized and qualified installer to perform cutting and patching for moisture resistant elements and sight exposed surfaces. I. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not allowed without prior approval. ' J. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. K. Fit work airtight to pipes,sleeves,electrical,ducts,conduit,and other penetrations through surfaces. ' L. At penetrations of fire rated wall, ceiling or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material,full thickness of the construction element. ' M. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes; for continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly,refinish entire unit. 1.11 FIRE STOPPING A. The Fire Suppression Contractor shall provide fireproof firestopping materials and accessories for all fire suppression penetrations using fireproofing materials per ASTM E814 to achieve a fire rating as ' required by applicable codes. B. Submit product data:Provide data on product characteristics,performance and limitation criteria. ' C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions:Indicate preparation and installation instructions. D. Submit manufacturer's certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK E. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. F. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60°F. ' G. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for three (3) days after installation of materials. , H. Sequence Work to permit firestopping materials to be installed after adjacent and surrounding work is complete. I. The acceptable manufacturers are as follows: 1. 3M Fire Barrier Products. 2. Domtar Gypsum. 3. USG. 4. Dow. 5. Or approved equal. J. Firestopping Material: Single component caulk , 1. CP 25NIS for wall and ceiling applications(3M). 2. CP 258SAL for floor applications(3M). 3. Fire Halt-Sealant(Domtar). ' 4. Fire Stop Foam and Sealant(Dow). K. Penetrations: , 1. FB-2000 for wall and floor penetrations(3M). 2. CP25WB Caulk(3M). 3. Fire Halt Sealant(Domtar). 4. Fire Stop Foam and Sealant(Dow). ' L. Cable Tray: 1. KBS Seal Bags as manufactured by International Protection Coatings. M. Fire Safing Material: 1. Thermafiber(USG). 2. Mineral Wool(Dow). ' N. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt,dust,grease,oil,loose material,or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material. O. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond. ' P. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. , Q. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating to uniform density and texture. R. Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating sleeves, electrical duct, cable ' tray,conduit,and other items requiring firestopping. S. Clean Work under provisions of Division 01. , T. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 1.12 UNLOADING AND RIGGING ' A. Execute unloading,rigging and storage to complete work and to: BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -8- ' SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK 1. Fit the several parts together to integrate with other work. 2. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. 3. Remove materials and equipment used for operations, repair, replace and/or restore any items damaged as a result of operations. ' B. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during unloading and rigging. ' C. Beginning of unloading or rigging means acceptance of existing conditions. D. Provide insurance coverage sufficient to cover the cost for immediate replacement and all costs required,should any equipment or portion of the project be damaged during unloading and rigging. ' E. Provide insurance coverage for total replacement value of all products, materials and/or equipment stored. ' F. The contractor shall, to the fullest extent possible, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect/Engineer and landlord from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses resulting from the performance of the work. ' G. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings, and devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. H. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper support during rigging and unloading. I. Contractor shall receive at tailgate,all.designated products,material and/or equipment. J. Contractor shall unload products,material and/or equipment,and store until ready for rigging in place. ' K. Contractor shall transport, move and rig equipment to designated location, upon direction of Construction Manager. ' L. Contractor shall coordinate his work with other trade contractors as required, to ensure the proper placement and setting of equipment. M. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. N. Promptly inspect shipments to assure products are undamaged. Notify the Owner and transportation vendor in writing of any damage noted. ' O. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by method to prevent soiling,disfigurement and damage. ' P. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather tight,climate-controlled enclosures. 1.13 PRODUCTS ' A. Products:Means new material,machinery, components,equipment,fixtures,and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the Work.Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. ' B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer,for similar components. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: 'JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -9- SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK 1 C. Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by method to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or , damage. F. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection.Periodically inspect to assure Products are 1 undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. 1.14 PROTECTION,MAINTENANCE,AND MAKING READY FOR ACCEPTANCE A. All equipment and systems provided under this Division shall be protected, maintained, and kept in ' good repair until final acceptance by the Owner. Only first class, undamaged equipment in good operating condition will be accepted. B. Use of all equipment supplied under this Division is prohibited until Owner's final acceptance except ' for testing, by special permission, or as allowed by the "Temporary Services" section of the Specifications. , C. All equipment supplied under this Division shall be freshly lubricated just before final inspection. Furnish to the Owner all necessary devices for lubrication of the equipment. D. All concealed hangers and supports shall be painted with rust inhibitive enamel. Finishg aintin of all P i exposed work will be b others. P Y E. All materials subject to moisture damage shall be stored indoors in a controlled environment as ' necessary to prevent condensation in the materials. F. All equipment provided under this Division shall be set up, and adjusted following the manufacturer's ' instructions or requirements for proper operation and maintenance. G. Where equipment manufacturer's instruction or requirements conflict with information on the Drawings or in the Specifications,the Engineer shall be advised. The Engineer shall resolve conflicts ' and the solution shall be instituted under the basic Contract with no additional cost to the Owner. H. The Owner,or his operating personnel,shall be instructed in the location and use of all equipment and ' systems installed under the Fire Suppression Division of Work. This shall include the services of a man familiar with all equipment and systems for a minimum of two(2)days and maximum of one(1) week. 1. Submit to the Engineer for approval, four(4)copies of Maintenance Manuals for all major equipment , and systems. Maintenance Manuals,when approved,will be turned over to the Owner for his use.The Manuals shall contain installation,operating,and maintenance instructions,and spare parts list. 1.15 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. ' B. Notify Owner seven(7)days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication,drive rotation, , belt tension,control sequence,or other conditions that may cause damage. BARRY.UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL _ 10- 1 SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK 1 D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by ' the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. ' F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible Contractor's personnel in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up,and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. ' 1.16 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT A. Arrange and conduct all requested testing necessary to demonstrate to the Architect/Engineer, the proper operation of all equipment supplied under this Division. Proper operation shall include the ' following: 1. Operating characteristics as specified 2. All accessories and options installed and operational 3. Total system and individual components operational as specified and per manufacturer's published information 4. No excess noise and vibration,as judged by the Engineer B. Provide all labor, materials, and instruments necessary to conduct all required testing. Test findings shall be recorded and neatly typed in a report and submitted to Engineer in triplicate. C. All tests which must be witnessed by inspecting authorities shall be prearranged with the Inspector ' before notifying the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than forty- eight (48) hours in advance of all tests. The Contractor shall be responsible for modifications or repairs necessary to satisfy all required testing. ' D. Preliminary tests and adjustments shall be conducted to minimize the amount of time required for adjustments and repairs during the actual final testing. ' E. Motor testing shall be conducted on all motors. Testing and data to be tabulated in the report shall be as follows: 1. Equipment name or description 2. Motor manufacturer's available nameplate data including: rpm, HP, phase, voltage, full load ' amperes,safety factor,power factor,manufacturer's name,motor type and/or model number 3. Motor test readings shall be taken at normal load and shall include amperes for each phase,phase- to-phase voltage at motor,and at starter or disconnect switch terminals. 1 Percentage=load test amperes(average) full load amperes(nameplate) 4. Motor starter nameplate data shall include manufacturer, model, size, and ampere rating of overload heaters installed. 5. Motor feeder breaker and/or disconnect switch data shall include manufacturer of fuses installed, and branch circuit wire size. 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK 1.17 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two (2)weeks prior to date ' of Substantial Completion. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation,perform demonstration for other season within six months. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with ' Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled rimes,at designated location. ' E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.18 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ' A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, ' and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. ' 1.19 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. ' B. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. C. Remove waste and surplus materials,rubbish,and construction facilities from the site. ' 1.20 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. ' 1.21 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site,one set of the following record documents;record actual revisions to the Work: I. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. ' 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings,Product data,and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. ' C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. ' D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed,including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. ' 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda or Modifications. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 12- ' SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction ' including: 1. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 2. Field changes of dimension and detail. ' 3. Details not on original Contract Drawings. F. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. ' 1.22 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two (2) sets prior to final inspection,bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages,bound with durable plastic covers. B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", ' title of project,and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers,logically organized as described below;with tab titling clearly printer under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. ' D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified. ' E. Part I: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors,and major equipment suppliers. ' F. Part II: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria. ' 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Operating instructions. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. G. Part III: Project documents and certificates,including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data. 2. Test and start-up reports. 3. Manufacturer's Certificates. 4. Photocopies of warranties. H. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form three(3)days prior to final inspection.This copy will be returned,with Architect/Engineer comments.Revise content of documents as required prior to ' final submittal. 1.23 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES ' A. The Fire Suppression Contractor shall be responsible for replacing or repairing all work performed,or materials furnished under this Division that proved defective within a one (1)year guarantee period, unless otherwise noted. Responsibility shall include the cost of temporary services while repairs are ' made,and all consequential costs to other trades caused by the defective material or workmanship. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 13- Ili SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK B. Provide to the Owner a list of all guarantees and warranties on specific pieces of equipment supplied under this section. ' C. Provide duplicate notarized copies. D. Execute and assemble documents from subcontractors,suppliers,and manufacturers. ' E. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover. F. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. ' G. For items of work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated'submittal within ten(10)days after acceptance,listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. ' PART 2—NOT USED PART 3—NOT USED END OF SECTION 2100 10 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 970-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 , MIAMI SHORES,FL - 14- ' SECTION 2105 00-COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Mechanical sleeve seals. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Grout. 6. Fire suppression equipment and piping demolition. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Painting and finishing. 9. Concrete bases. 10. Supports and anchorages. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe 1 chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces,and tunnels. B. Exposed,Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces ' and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed,Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. ' D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. ' F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Mechanical sleeve seals. 2. Escutcheons. ' B. Welding certificates. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 2105 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel. B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel ' Code: Section IX,"Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series,"Code for Pressure Piping." I 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical ' characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING , A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, , and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt,debris,and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.06 COORDINATION ' A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction,to allow for fire suppression installations. t B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire suppression items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ' A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified or approved equal. 2.02 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. ' B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 210100 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21,nonmetallic, flat,asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full Face Type: For flat face,Class 125,cast iron and cast bronze flanges. ' b. Narrow Face Type: For raised face,Class 250,cast iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110,rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick,unless otherwise indicated; and full face or ring 1 type,unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1,carbon steel,unless otherwise indicated. D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. ' 2.04 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit,designed for field assembly,to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products&Systems,Inc. b. Calpico,Inc. c. Metraflex Co. ' d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator,Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Glass reinforced plastic. Include two for each sealing.element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.05 SLEEVES A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness;round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E,Grade B,Schedule 40,galvanized,plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated"wall pipe"equivalent to ductile iron pressure pipe,with plain ends and integral waterstop,unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PVC: Permanent,with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 1 F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785,Schedule 40. 1. Molded PE: Reusable,PE,tapered cup shaped,and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.06 ESCUTCHEONS ' A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with anID to closely fit around pipe,tube,and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. BARRY UNIVERSITY. BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 2105 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION B. One Piece,Deep Pattern Type: Deep drawn,box shaped brass with polished chrome plated finish. C. One Piece,Cast Brass Type: With set screw. ' 1. Finish: Polished chrome plated. D. Split Casting,Cast Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. ' 1. Finish: Polished chrome plated or rough brass. E. One Piece,Stamped Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome plated finish. F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel Type: With concealed hinge,set screw or spring clips,and chrome plated finish. G. One Piece,Floor Plate Type: Cast iron floor plate. ' H. Split Casting,Floor Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. 2.07 GROUT ' A. Description: ASTM C 1107,Grade B,non-shrink and nonmetallic,dry hydraulic cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. ' 2.08 FABRICATED DRIP PANS A. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion resistant sheet metal with watertight joints, ' and with edges turned up 2-1/2-inches. Reinforce top, either by structural angles or by rolling top over '/a-inch steel rod. Provide hole, gasket, and flange at low point for watertight joint and 1-inch drain line connection. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 FIRE SUPPRESSION DEMOLITION ' A. Disconnect,demolish,and remove fire suppression systems,equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible ' piping material. 3. Equipment to be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 4. Equipment to be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,clean,and store equipment;when appropriate,reinstall,reconnect,and make equipment operational. 5. Equipment to be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. B. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove ' damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- 1 SECTION 210100 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 3.02 PIPING SYSTEMS-COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawingplans, schematics p , and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping PP systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, I expansion,pump sizing,and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and ' service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Do not install piping: 1. Except as noted in: a. Electric rooms and closets b. Telephone rooms and closets c. Elevator machine rooms 2. Except as noted over or within 5-feet of: a. Switchboards b. Motor control c. Motors,except for branch piping to equipment 3. When Over or Within 5-Feet Unavoidable: Provide drip pans under piping or over electrical equipment. Pipe drain outlet to floor drain,slop sink,or other indirect waste. L. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. M. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls,ceilings,and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece,deep pattern type. b. Chrome Plated Piping: One piece,cast brass type with polished chrome plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One piece,stamped steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,cast brass type with polished chrome plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces One piece or split casting,cast brass type with polished chrome plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass type with rough brass finish. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece,cast brass type. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 2105 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One piece,floor plate type. 2. Existing Piping: Use the following: a. Chrome Plated Piping: Split casting,cast brass type with chrome plated finish. b. Insulated Piping: Split.plate, stamped steel type with concealed or exposed rivet hinge and spring clips. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting, cast brass ' type with chrome plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting,cast brass type with chrome plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split casting, cast brass type with rough brass finish. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split casting,cast brass type. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split plate, stamped steel type with set screw or spring ' clips. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split casting,floor plate type. N. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes. O. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. Q. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2-inches above finished floor level. Extend cast iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger,penetrating gypsum board partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2-inches above finished floor level. 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation,using joint sealants appropriate for size,depth,and location of joint. R. Aboveground, Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6-inches in diameter. 2. Install cast iron"wall pipes"for sleeves 6-inches and larger in diameter. , 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. S. Underground,Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space ' between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 210100 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. T. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire raring of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section for 1 materials. U. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in. V. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing in � g requirements. 3.03 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale,slag,dirt,and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe ' fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS 1310.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance"Article. F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. r3.04 PAINTING A. Painting of fire suppression systems,equipment,and components is specified in Division 09. B. Dip uncoated hangers,supports,rods and inserts in zinc chromate primer. C. Apply one coat of zinc chromate primer to black steel or iron work. D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.05 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4-inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- SECTION 2105 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 3. Install epoxy coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates,diagrams,instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor bolt manufacturer's written instructions. ' 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.06 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. B. Metal decking shall not be used for inserts and supports C. Inserts,beam clamps, steel face plates(in concrete fill only), cantilever brackets or other means shall be supported from the building construction. D. Trapeze hangers of bolted angles or channels shall be permitted for grouped lines and services. E. Provide additional framing to span structured members where building construction is inadequate. F. Where building structure consists of bar joists, hangers must be secured to top chord of panel point with concentrated load not exceeding the safe loading recommendations of the bar joists manufacturer or 500 lbs.,whichever is lower. G. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.07 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor fire suppression materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.08 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for fire suppression equipment base bearing surfaces,pump and other equipment base plates,and anchors unless otherwise noted in the manufacturers installation guidelines. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. ' C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout,completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -8- 1 SECTION 2105 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION G. Place grout around anchors. iH. Cure placed grout. 3.09 ACCESS DOORS A. Supply access doors in hung ceilings, walls and partitions for access to mechanical equipment, valves, and dampers for installation under "General Construction Work" and directing location and setting. 3.10 CLEANING A. Brush and clean work prior to concealing,painting,and acceptance. Perform in stages if directed. B. Clean and repair painted, exposed, soiled, or damaged work to match adjoining work before final acceptance. C. Remove debris from inside and outside of material and equipment. D. Provide temporary stoppers to close open ends of work. END OF SECTION 2105 00 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MANH SHORES,FL -9- t SECTION 2105 10-.ACCEPTANCE TESTING PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 APPLICATION PUBLICATION A. The publication listed below forms a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publication is referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1. NFPA Standards. PART 2-QUALIFICATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 2.01 The Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing organization to provide final inspection, testing, calibration, and adjusting of the fire suppression systems as defined in this contract. The organization shall be independent of the supplier,producer,or installer of the equipment. 2.02 Testing, inspection, and calibration shall be performed by an Engineering Technician, certified by a national organization, with a minimum of five years experience inspecting, testing and calibrating fire suppression equipment,systems,and devices. Information on the testing organization and qualifications of the Certified Engineering Technician shall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to the start of work. 2.03 The Contractor shall supply to the testing organization complete sets of approved shop drawings, settings of all adjustable devices, and other information necessary for an accurate inspection and evaluation of the system prior to the performance of any tests. The testing organization shall submit a test procedure for each item of equipment to be tested on this project for approval after the evaluation of the system and equipment has been determined No testing shall be performed until after the test procedures have been submitted to and approved by the Engineer. PART 3-INSPECTIONS 3.01 An inspection of the installed equipment shall be performed by the testing organization to verify that the equipment installed, and to be tested, is the equipment as denoted on the approved shop drawings. The inspection shall check the equipment designations,device characteristics,special installation requirements, applicable code of requirements and other conditions which may affect the successful, safe performance and operation of the system. 3.02 The installed equipment shall be compared to the approved shop drawings after the installation and a report developed stating any discrepancies. PART 4-TESTING 4.01 The testing organization shall perform tests on each item of the fire protection equipment contained in this contract in accordance with the latest edition of the NFPA Standard for the systems installed on this project. 4.02 Field Acceptance Testing shall be accomplished on each item of fire protection equipment installed or connected to a part of this contract. This shall include,but is not limited to: A. All fire system pumps. B. All fire suppression piping systems. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25 2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -1 - SECTION 2105 10 ACCEPTANCE TESTING C. All fire detection and suppression systems. D. All automation and control systems related to fire system. 4.03 Systems shall be energized or otherwise placed in service only after completion of all required tests and an evaluation of the test results has been completed. PART 5-SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS 5.01 Each system provided in this contract, and covered by this Division 21 section of specifications, shall be function tested to ensure total system operation. The Contractor shall verify that all systems interface correctly with all related systems. 5.02 After the manufacturers complete their individual start-up checks,services and testing,the Contractor shall provide a total system test. 5.03 A service representative of the manufacturer of the major fire protection equipment and components shall , be present during the system test. The representatives shall be qualified to service the equipment and make necessary checks and adjustments to ensure proper operation of their respective equipment. 5.04 The system test shall be conducted at the direction of the Architect/Engineer. 5.05 Any failure during the system test shall be corrected immediately. The test procedure in progress at the time of failure shall be restarted The contractor shall warrant that errors and omissions in the test report shall be corrected without charge to the Owner when so found within 12 months from acceptance of the report. 5.06 The engineer reserves the right to accept or reject test data which does not conform to the manufacturer's data or is not obtained in accordance with these specifications PART 6-DOCUMENTATION 6.01 Provide certified test reports for review and approval.Copies of the approved report shall be included in the manuals required in Division 01,Division 21,and General Requirements for Fire Suppression Work. END OF SECTION 2105 10 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 2109 00-SUPPORTS&ANCHORS PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work of this Section includes the installation of supports and anchors including,but not limited to, the following: a. Equipment hangers,supports,and associated anchors b. Equipment bases and supports c. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special Conditions,and the following listed Sections. 2. 2150 50"HFC-125(FE-25)Suppression System." 3. 23 24 20"Vibration Isolation." 4. Sections describing piping and equipment for fire protection systems. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. NFPA 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping:In conformance with NFPA 13. B. Supports for Standpipes:In conformance with NFPA 14. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 01. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for pipe sizes''/i"to 1 ''/z':Adjustable wrought steel ring. B. Wall support for pipe sizes to 3-inches:Cast iron hook vertical support steel riser clamp. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes up to 6-inches:Carbon steel,adjustable,clevis. D. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6-inches and over:Adjustable steel yoke,cast iron roll,double hanger. E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6-inches and over. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 2109 00 SUPPORTS&ANCHORS F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes up to 6-inches: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp; adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for pipe sizes 6-inches and over. G. Vertical Support:Steel riser clamp. H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4-inches and all cold pipe sizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple,floor flange,and concrete pier or steel support. I. Floor support for Pipe Sizes 4-inches and over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Shield for Insulated Piping: 18 gauge galvanized steel shield over insulation in 1800 segments, minimum 12-inches long at pipe support. K. Saddles for Insulated Piping Conveying Fluids above Ambient Temperature: Carbon steel protective saddles. L. Saddles for Insulated Piping Conveying Fluids below Ambient Temperature: Hard block non- conducting saddles in 901 segments, 12-inches minimum length, and block thickness same as insulation thickness. M. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers:Sheet lead. N. Design hangers to impede disengagement by movement of supported pipe. , 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Steel Hanger Rods:Threaded both ends,threaded one end,or continuous threaded 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case or galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment,top slot for reinforcing rods,lugs for attaching to forms;size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. B. Steel Plates,Shapes,and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A36. C. Cement Grout: Portland Cement (ASTM C150, Type I or Type 111) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand(ASTM C404,Size No.2.) Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand,by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. D. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes; select for loads required; weld steel in ' accordance with AWS standards. E. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides,of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel,consisting of bolted 2-section outer cylinder and base with 2-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.05 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing:26 gauge galvanized steel. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 2119 00 SUPPORTS&ANCHORS B. Lead Flashing:5 lb/sq.ft.sheet lead for waterproofing;one lb/sq.ft.sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Flexible Flashing:47 mil thick sheet butyl;compatible with roofing. D. Caps: Steel,22 gauge minimum; 16 gauge at fire resistant elements. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. 2.07 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts,and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide seismic support as required by local jurisdictional authority. 3.02 INSERTS ' A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4-inches. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling,provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab. 3.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: MAXIlVIUM HANGER PIPE SIZE HANGER SPACING DIAMETER '/i thru 1'/4-inches 6-feet 6-inches 3/8-inches 1%z and 2-inches 10-feet 3/8-inches 2'/z and 3-inches 10-feet 1/2-inches 4 thru 6-inches 10-feet 5/8-inches 8 to 12-inches 12-feet 7/8-inches ABS/PVC(All Sizes) 4-feet 3/8-inches C.I.Bell and Spigot(or No-Hub) and at Joints 5-feet 5/8-inches B. Install hangers to provide minimum%-inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 2109 00 SUPPORTS&ANCHORS C. Place a hanger within 12-inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hanger with 1'/2-inches minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub,with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze ' hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete with chamfered edges. See Section 23 24 20 "Vibration [solation." B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. Anchor all equipment and piping in accordance with code regulations for seismic zone of the project location. C. Construct supports of structural steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. FLA , 3.05 SHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping penetrates weather or waterproofed ' walls,floors,and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3-inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one-inch minimum into hub, 8-inches minimum clear on sides with 24-inches x 24-inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls,turn flanges back into wall and calk,metal counter flash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10-inches clear on sides with minimum 36-inches x 36-inches sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor,shower,and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide acoustical lead flashing around pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound control. F. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 12-inches minimum high above roofing surface. r Flexible sheet flash and counter flash with sheet metal;seal watertight. END OF SECTION 2109 00 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 2150 50-HFC-125(FE-25)SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Design,furnish and install complete and ready for operation,an HFC-125(FE-25)fire suppression system for above and below raised floor, including charged HFC-125 (FE-25)storage containers, piping,nozzles,and all other equipment necessary for a complete operational system. System shall be designed to provide not less than 8.2%concentration by volume of HFC-125 (FE-25),at 70°F (above access floor)and at 50°F(below access floor),throughout the hazard within 10 seconds of actuation. 2. Fire Protection Contractor is responsible to famish/install all control wiring/panels/detectors and piping.Contractor will be responsible for tying into REPO system. 3. The intent is to establish complete operational systems, fully compliant with all jurisdictional requirements. Contractor may utilize existing detection and annunciation when such systems can meet such requirements. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special Conditions,and the following listed Sections. 2. 2105 00"Common Work Results for HVAC." 3. 2105 10"Acceptance Testing." 4. 2109 00"Supports&Anchors." 5. In accordance with the following codes,publications,and insuring authorities requirements,latest editions: a. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA)Standards: 1) No.2001—Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems. 2) No.70—National Electrical Code. 3) No.72A—Local Protective Signaling Systems. 4) No.72E—Automatic Fire Detectors. 5) No.75—Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment. b. Factory Mutual System(FM)Publication: 1) Factory Mutual Approval Guide. c. Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc.(UL)Publication: 1) Fire Protection Equipment List with Quarterly Supplements. d. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA)Publication. I1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: 1. The manufacturer of the HFC-125 (FE-25) suppression system hardware and detection components shall have a minimum of ten(10)years of experience in the design and manufacture of similar systems and who can refer to similar installations providing satisfactory service. 2. The name of the manufacturer, part numbers, and serial numbers shall appear on all major components. 3. All devices,components,and equipment shall be the products of the same manufacturer. 4. All devices,components,and equipment shall be new and standard products of the manufacturer's latest design,suitable to perform the functions intended. 5. All devices and equipment shall be UL listed and/or FM approved. 6. Locks for all cabinets shall be keyed alike. a BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL i SECTION 2150 50 HFC-125(FE-25)SUPPRESSION SYSTEM B. Installer: 1. The installing contractor shall be trained by the manufacturer to design, install,test,and maintain HFC-125(FE-25)fire suppression systems. 2. The installing contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of HFC-125 (FE-25) automatic or similar fire suppression systems, in strict accordance with NFPA standards. 3. The installing contractor must have a minimum of five years experience in the design,installation, and testing of HFC-125 (FE-25)or similar fire suppression systems.A list of systems of a similar nature and scope shall be provided on request. 4. The installing contractor shall show evidence that his company carries a minimum$2,000,000.00 liability and completed operations insurance policy.These limits shall supersede limits required in the general conditions of the specifications. 5. The installation contractor shall have an HFC-125 (FE-25) recharging station. The installing contractor shall provide proof of his ability to recharge the largest HFC-125 (FE-25) system within twenty-four (24) hours after discharge. Include the amount of HFC-125 (FE-25) bulk storage available. 6. The installation contractor shall be an authorized stocking distributor of the HFC-125 (FE-25) system manufacturer so that immediate replacement parts are available from inventory. 7. The installing contractor shall show proof of emergency service available on a twenty-four (24) hour, seven (7) days per week basis; service personnel shall be available for emergency service response at all times. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The installing contractor shall submit the following design information and drawings for approval prior to starting work on thisproject: 1. Field installation layout drawings having a scale of not less than 1/8"=F-0",detailing the location of all agent storage tanks,pipe runs, including pipe sizes and lengths, control panel(s), detectors, manual pull stations,abort stations,audible and visual alarms,etc. 2. Auxiliary details and information such as maintenance panels, door holders, special sealing requirements,and equipment shutdowns. 3. Separate layouts or drawings shall be provided for each level (for example: room sub-floor and above ceiling;and for mechanical and electrical work). 4. A separate layout or drawing shall show isometric details of agent storage containers, mounting details,and proposed pipe runs and sizes. 5. Submittals for detectors and fire control panels. 6. Complete hydraulic flow calculations from a UL listed computer program shall be provided for all engineered HFC-125 (FE-25)systems. Calculation sheet(s)must include the manufacturer's name and UL listing for verification. The individual sections of pipe and each fitting to be used, as shown on the isometrics,must be identified and included in the calculation.Total agent discharge time must be shown and detailed by zone. 7. Pre-engineered systems shall provide calculations of the agent piping distribution system and take into account the friction loss of each component of the piping network. These calculations shall ' comply with the manufacturer's UL listing. B. Submit drawings, calculations, and system component data sheets for approval to the local fire prevention bureau, owner`s insurance underwriter, and all other authorities having jurisdiction before starting installation.Submit approved plans to the Construction Manager for record. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION A. The system shall be a total flooding HFC-125 (FE-25) extinguishing system and shall provide a minimum design concentration of 8.2% by volume, in protected spaces at the minimum anticipated temperature within the protected area. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 2110 50 HFC-125(FE-25)SUPPRESSION SYSTEM B. The system shall be complete in all ways. It shall include all mechanical and electrical installation,all detection and control equipment,agent storage containers, HFC-125 (FE-25) agent, nozzles,pipe and fittings, manual release and abort stations, audible and visual alarm devices, auxiliary devices and controls,shutdowns, alarm interface, caution/advisory signs, functional checkout and testing,training, and all other operations necessary for a functional, UL listed and/or FM approved HFC-125 (FE-25) suppression system. C. Provide two inspections during the first year of service. Inspections shall be made at six (6) month intervals commencing when the system is first placed into normal service. D. The general contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the protected spaces against agent loss and/or leakage during the ten(10)minute"hold"period. E. The system shall be activated by the Fire Alarm and Control Panel(FACP). F. Alarm and activation sequence shall be as described in and the"FD"(Fire Detection)series drawings. PART H-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fike B. Or approved equal 2.02 MATERIALS A. General 1. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of the manufacturer's latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended. Where two or more units of equipment must perform the same functions, they shall be duplicates produced by the same manufacturer. The name of the manufacturer and numbers shall appear on all major components. Locks for all cabinets shall be keyed alike. 1 2. All devices and equipment shall be UL listed and/or FM approved. 2.03 MAINTENANCE LOCKOUT SWITCH A. The Maintenance Lockout Switch installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. 2.04 HFC-125(FE-25)SUPPRESSION SYSTEM A. HFC-125 (FE-25)fire suppression system shall be of the engineered,permanently piped,fixed nozzle type with all pertinent components provided by acceptable manufacturer and installed in accordance with the acceptable manufacturer's Design Manual including the latest revisions to the document.The ' UL listed computerized program providing verification of flow calculations shall be submitted for each HFC-125(FE-25)fire suppression system. 2.06 PIPE MATERIAL-HFC-125(FE-25)SYSTEM A. System piping shall be of non-combustible materials having physical and chemical characteristics such that its integrity under stress can be predicted with reliability. B. As a minimum,piping materials shall be black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-53A ERW or ASTM A-106A seamless. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 2150 50 HFC-125(FE-25)SUPPRESSION SYSTEM C. Under no conditions shall ordinary cast iron pipe,steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-120 or ASTM A- 53/A-120 be used. ' D. Piping joints shall be suitable for the design conditions and shall be selected with consideration of joint tightness and mechanical strength. E. As a minimum,fittings beyond the orifice union/nipple shall be black,300 lb.class fittings conforming to ANSI B-16.3. Ordinary cast iron fittings shall not be used. F. The system manifold up to the orifice union nipple must be constructed of Schedule 80 piping and ' 2000 lb.or 3000 lb.forged steel fittings.Distribution piping downstream of the orifice union must be a minimum of Schedule 40 with 300 lb.fittings. G. All piping shall comply with NFPA 2001. H. Piping shall be installed in accordance with good commercial practice to the appropriate codes, securely supported with UL Listed hangers and arranged with close attention to the design layout since deviations may alter the design flow performance as calculated. 1. Piping shall be bracketed within 12-inches of all discharge nozzles. J. All piping shall be reamed,blown clear and swabbed with appropriate solvent to remove mill varnish and cutt in oils beforeassembly. K. Multi-outlet fittings other than tees shall not be permitted. ' L. Assembly of all joints shall conform to the appropriate standards. Threaded pipe joints shall utilize Teflon tape applied to the male threads only. PART III-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Installation shall be made in accordance with the specifications and applicable NFPA standards. All equipment and devices used shall be listed in the UL Fire Protection Equipment List and/or the FM Approval Guide. Installation will be made in strict accordance with the following: 1. NFPA-2001—Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems. 2. NFPA-70—National Electrical Code. 3. NFPA-72A—Local Protective Signaling Systems. 4. NFPA-72E—Automatic Fire Detection. 5. NFPA-75—Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment. 6. All state and local codes in force at time of award of contract. 3.02 PIPING. A. All distribution piping shall be in accordance with the latest requirements listed in NFPA Standard , 2001. B. The method of joining all pipes shall be in accordance with the latest requirements listed in NFPA Standard 2001.Acceptable fittings include: screwed,flanged,welded,brazed,flared,and compression. Each fitting shall be of the 300 lb.class except for%-inch or smaller pipe sizes in which case 150 lb. class fittings are acceptable.Ordinary cast iron fittings are not acceptable. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 2110 50 HFC-125(FE-25)SUPPRESSION SYSTEM C. All reductions in pipe size must be made by using reducing fittings, reducers, or swaged nipples. Reducing bushings are.not acceptable. D. The piping system shall be securely supported by UL listed hangers with allowance for expansion and contraction. E. All pipe lengths must be reamed, blown clear, and swabbed with suitable solvents to remove burrs, mill varnish,and cutting oil before assembly. Y F. For threaded fittings, Teflon tape dope only shall be used and shall be applied to male pipe threads only. 3.03 EQUIPMENT INSTRUCTION PLATES A. Provide engraved instruction plates detailing emergency procedures at each system control panel and at each hazard area manual discharge actuation/abort switch location.Permanent nameplates shall be used in the control panel to identify control logic units,contracts and major circuits. 3.04 LOCATION OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS 1 A. Control panel unit and graphic annunciator panel shall be mounted inside of the protected area, as located on the drawings. 1 B. "System Discharge"indicator lights to be mounted outside of the protected area,above the entrances to area,as located on the drawings. C. Abort switches to be mounted inside the protected area adjacent to the entrances to area,as located on the drawings. D. First stage alarm bell"and second stage alarm horn to be mounted inside the protected area,as located on the drawings. E. Manual pull-stations to be located inside the protected areas,adjacent to ALL passage doors to area. 3.05 SYSTEM INSPECTION and CHECKOUT A. After the installation is complete the system shall be inspected by factory trained personnel in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures. 1. All wiring shall be tested for proper connection,continuity and resistance to ground. 2. The complete system shall be functionally tested in the presence of the Owner and jurisdictional authorities per NFPA standards.All functions including system and equipment interlocks must be ' operational at least ten(10)days prior to the final acceptance test. 3. Each detector shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures. The system and equipment interlocks such as audible and visual alarms and equipment shut- downs shall function at that time. ' 4. Each circuit shall be tested for trouble by inducing a trouble condition to the system including depressurizing of the container to test pressure supervision circuit. 5. System is to be tested at completion of each phase, at completion of all Phases System must be tested as whole. 3.06 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS A. Prior to final acceptance, designer/installer shall provide operation training to Owner and Owner's Representative's personnel.Each training session shall include emergency procedures;abort functions, system control panel operation,trouble procedures,and safety requirements.Each session shall include BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANII SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 2150 50 HFC-125(FE-25)SUPPRESSION SYSTEM a complete demonstration of the system. Dates and times of the training period shall be coordinated through the Owner not less than two(2)weeks prior to the session. ' 3.07 ACCEPTANCE TESTS A. At the time "as-built" drawings and maintenance/operation manuals are submitted, the installing contractor shall submit a "Test Plan" describing procedures to be used to test the HFC-125 (FE-25) system(s). The test plan shall include a step-by-step description of all tests to be performed and shall indicate the type and location of test apparatus to be employed. The tests shall demonstrate that the operational and installation requirements of this specification have been met. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner and shall not be conducted until the test plan has been approved. B. The tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as intended. All circuits shall be , tested, automatic actuation, ARM, manual actuation,HVAC and power shutdown, audible and visual alarm devices, manual override of abort functions, and agent container pressure supervision. In addition, supervision of all panel circuits, including AC power and battery power supplies, shall be tested and qualified. C. A room pressurization test shall be conducted in each protected space to determine the presence of , openings that would affect the HFC-125 (FE-25) system concentration levels. The test(s) shall be conducted using the Retro-Tec Corp. Door Fan system or equivalent, with integrated computer program.All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 2001. D. If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist which would result in leakage and/or loss of the HFC-125 (FE-25) extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the proper sealing of the protected space(s)by the general contractor or his subcontractor or agent. The general contractor shall be responsible for adequately sealing all protected space(s) against agent loss or leakage. The installing contractor shall inspect all work to ascertain that the protected space(s) have been adequately and properly sealed. The HFC-125 (FE-25) installing contractor shall be responsible for the success of the room pressurization tests. If the first room pressurization test is not successful in accordance with these specifications, the installing contractor shall direct the general contractor to determine and correct the cause of the test failure. The installing contractor shall conduct additional room pressurization tests,at no additional cost to the Owner,until a successful test is obtained. Copies of successful test results shall be submitted to the Owner for record. E. Upon acceptance by the Owner,the completed HFC-125 (FE-25)system(s) shall be placed in normal service. F. After installation,charge system using nitrogen or air and test for leaks.Repair leaks and retest until no ' leaks exist.All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 2001. G. A "puff' test on the piping system(s), using nitrogen or air shall be performed to determine the , presence of leaks in the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 2001. H. Correct malfunctioning equipment,then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment that cannot ' be corrected or does not perform as specified and indicated,then retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. 3.08 HFC-125(FE-25)SYSTEM INSPECTION A. The installing contractor shall provide two inspections of each HFC-125 (FE-25) system installed under this contract during the one (1) year warranty period. The first inspection shall be at the six- month interval after system acceptance and the second at the twelve (12) month interval. Inspection BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- ' SECTION 2150 50 HFC-125(FE-25)SUPPRESSION SYSTEM shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines and shall comply with the ' recommendations of NFPA 2001. B. Documents certifying satisfactory system operation shall be submitted to the Owner upon completion of each inspection. 3.09 WARRANTY ' A. All HFC-125 (FE-25) system components furnished and installed under this contract shall be guaranteed against defects in design,materials,and workmanship for the full warranty period which is standard with the manufacturer, but in no case less than one (1) year from the date of system acceptance. ' END OF SECTION 2150 50 a a ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- SECTION 2199 10-TESTING AND APPROVAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 0 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Testing and jurisdictional approval of installed services. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special Conditions,and the following listed Sections. ' 2. 2105 00"Common Work Results for Fire Suppression." 3. 2150 50"HFC-125(FE-25)Suppression System." 1.02 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' A. Submit record documents under provisions of Division 01. ' B. Accurately record actual locations of all underground and concealed piping systems. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping System testing shall be performed in accordance with jurisdictional requirements to demonstrate underground and concealed systems acceptability. 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING tA. Sequence testing and approval to allow phasing of work and completion of systems to meet Project Schedule constraints. PART 2—PRODUCTS-Not Used. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Provide instruments and devices required for testing and approval. Coordinate and provide for jurisdictional authority's requirements. ' 3.02 TEST PROCEDURE A. Cap all pressure piping and pressurize as directed by jurisdictional authority.Maintain pressure during ' test.Make necessary repairs until written approval is received. B. Provide testing of underground water services in accordance with jurisdictional requirements.Maintain test during backfill procedures.Make necessary repairs and retest upon completion of backfill prior to ' placement of concrete. ' END OF SECTION 2199 10 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - DIVISION 23-HEATING.VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING PAGES ' Section 23 00 10: General Requirements for Mechanical Work ........................................................................14 Section 23 05 00: Common Work Results for HVAC....................................................................................... 12 Section23 05 10: Acceptance Testing...................................................................................................................2 t Section 23 05 19: Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping....................................................................................17 Section 23 05 23: General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping ..................................................................................9 Section 23 05 53: Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.................................................................... 5 ' Section 23 05 93: Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing for HVAC........................................................................ 4 Section 23 09 00: Supports and Anchors ..............................................................................................................5 Section23 17 00: Motors .................................................................................................................................... 4 Section23 21 13: Hydronic Piping......................................................................................................................13 ' Section 23 2133: Hydronic Specialties ....................................................................................................... .. 7 Section23 23 00: Refrigerant Piping...................................................................................................................11 Section 23 24 20: Vibration Isolation ................................................................................................................. 4 Section23 25 00: Piping Insulation..................................................................................................................... 4 Section 23 63 13: Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers..........................................................................................6 Section23 77 55: In-Row Cooler(DX).................................................................................................................6 Section23 99 10: Testing and Approval...............................................................................................................I ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT'9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -1 - SECTION 23 00 10-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Conditions, and Special Conditions and other information contained in the Project Manual shall be incorporated as part of all Sections of this Division of work. B. Under this Contract and all sections herein,provide to the Owner,rooms with complete and operative mechanical systems and the necessary connections to all mechanical equipment as outlined herein and as guided by the Contract Drawings. C. All labor and materials supplied under this Division, shall be the highest quality as judged by the Architect/Engineer. ' D. A site visit is mandatory in order to inspect existing conditions. ' 1.02 DEFINITION OF TERMS IN THIS SECTION A. "Provide and install': Arrange for and assume all costs for providing and installing on the job site, complete,operable systems as specified and/or indicated on the Drawings. ' B. 'Provide":Used interchangeably with"Provide and Install." C. "Install': Utilize trade manpower and expertise to connect items provided by others. Connection ' includes receiving,rigging,and placement as required. D. "Work":Used to include all labor and materials required to satisfy the requirements of the Mechanical ' Division of the Specifications and Drawings. E. "Contractor" and "Mechanical Contractor": Used in this Division refers to the respective Trade Subcontractor,who shall be responsible for all work under the division of work,as indicated in bidding ' document. F. "Approved","Approved equal':Acceptable for the use intended and in compliance with all applicable codes,regulations,and satisfies contractual obligations relative to function and quality as judged by the Architect/Engineer and Owner. G. "Responsible", "Responsibility": Assume all consequences or contingencies, monetary and otherwise, ' under this basic Contract,with no additional costs passed on to others by Contractor. H. "Neat workmanlike manner", 'Properly installed": Installed in accordance with all applicable codes and good recommended practice,such as would be instructed in a trade school.The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to judge acceptability. I. 'Power wiring": All wiring carrying the operating current from an electrical power source to electric operated devices,operating at 100 volts or more. J. "Control wiring": All wiring, other than power wiring, from electric operated equipment to control devices and between various control devices: K. "Furnish":Trade Contractor shall furnish on the job site for use by others. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRU4S-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK t 1.03 CODES,REGULATIONS,AND CONDITIONS GOVERNING WORK A. Bid price shall reflect the investigation of all conditions governing work, including the cost of all ' modifications to systems, should they be necessary, to meet all code and local regulations and all conditions that will affect work. The following shall be included in the investigation of conditions: 1. Contract Drawings and Specifications. ' 2. Conditions at site. 3. Constraints and conditions due to partial Owner occupancy during construction. 4. All applicable codes and local regulations. 5. Anticipation of weather conditions during the construction period. ' 6. Local regulations or requirements of the local Mechanical and/or Building Inspector. 7. Anticipation of strikes or forced work stoppages. The Mechanical Contractor shall be totally responsible for all assumptions,omissions,and errors in the ' investigation of conditions. B. All work shall be done in strict accordance with the latest accepted edition of all governing codes and ' regulations including,but not limited to,the following: 1. NFPA 101 -Volume 9 Life Safety Code. 2. International Building Code. 3. All state and local codes and enforced regulations affecting work. , C. In no way shall the information on the Drawings or in the Specifications preclude code compliance. Where work indicated on the Contract Documents exceeds code requirements,the work as outlined in , the Contract Documents shall take precedence. D. Secure and keep current all licenses, permits, approvals, or certificates required for work under this Division of the Contract. 1 E. Conduct all testing as required by the inspecting authorities. 1.04 DRAWING INTERPRETATION ' A. Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and intended to outline basic engineering and systems design, therefore,do not show minor details and accessories. Because a minor component is not shown,shall ' not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for furnishing and installing all such items necessary to provide complete, operative,and properly installed systems to the Owner under the basic Contract. If there are any doubts as to work required,the Contractor shall obtain a clarification from the Engineer in the bid stage. ' B. The Contract Drawings show the intended location of equipment; however, the Contractor shall be responsible for any minor adjustments or relocations necessary due to choice of equipment and ' coordination conflicts. All equipment relocations must be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. C. The project drawings, specifications, and other documents are complimentary. Items required by one shall designate requirement by the other,whether explicitly stated or not. Where documents conflict, the work of the more stringent nature shall be required. 1.05 RECORD DRAWINGS ' A. An accurate record shall be kept of all mechanical work,showing the exact final location of all access doors,ducts,devices,accessories,and equipment when not as shown on the Contract Drawings. ' B. All changes made by Addenda or Change Order shall be incorporated on the Record Drawings. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK C. Record Drawings shall be turned over to the Engineer for approval at the time of notification of ' completion of the project. D. Refer to the Project Manual for General Conditions,Supplementary General Conditions,and additional requirements. ' 1.06 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION OF WORK ' A. Work shall be scheduled to meet the Construction Manager's overall construction schedule,as well as coordinate with the schedules of all other Contractors and Subcontractors, so that work progresses smoothly with no delays. ' B. Refer to the Project Manual for basic sequence of Construction. C. Clearances and access spaces shall be maintained around equipment. Installations shall be coordinated ' with the equipment and system of all other trades. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to eliminate any conflicts that arise due to failure to coordinate. D. Permitted use, location, and type of all anchors, supports, sleeves, and other materials which shall be cast into concrete,must be verified with the Architect/Engineer and are subject to approval. 1.07 MATERIALS AND SUBMISSION FOR APPROVAL ' A. Refer to Project Manual for basic guidelines,covering submission of materials for approval. B. Provide the proper materials necessary to complete all work included in this Division of the Contract. ' Additional Costs incurred in any Division of work consequent to substitution of materials, shall be investigated prior to submission. All cost penalties shall be the responsibility of the Contractor regardless of approval of such materials. C. The materials specified herein are indicative of both the characteristics and quality of materials necessary to satisfy Contract responsibilities; type and quality standards will be strictly upheld in consideration for approval of equipment and the Architect/Engineer's judgment of compliance will be final. ' D. Requests for substitutions will not be considered until after award of Contract, and then will be accepted only from the Contractor through the Architect/Engineer. All requests must be in writing or ' in the form of material submittals with special cover letter giving credits available or reasons for the proposed substitution. The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying,on request, information and samples of both specified and substituted materials. ' E. The Architect, Engineer, and Owner reserve the right to refuse approval of materials and equipment used on the job that, in their opinion, does not meet the standards outlined herein. Only after documentation of approval,where approval is required,shall materials be ordered and installed on this project. All installed materials requiring approval that have not been approved, shall be removed and replaced as directed by the Architect/Engineer. F. Architect/Engineer's review of Shop Drawings will cover materials only. Quantities and dimensions ' necessary to satisfy the Contract and to coordinate with other trades will be the Contractor's responsibility. G. Material approvals shall be obtained in time so material can be manufactured and delivered to the job ' site in coordination with project work schedules. Additional costs to all trades arising because of material not being available when necessary, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor causing the delay. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 1VIIANII SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK H. Material submissions shall contain the following information in reiteration and in addition to the information required in the Project Manual: ' 1. Project name. 2. Specification section and paragraph submitted under. 3. Manufacturer. 4. Manufacturing materials,gauge,and finish. ' 5. Mechanical and electrical requirements and characteristics. 6. Performance and operating characteristics. 7. List or denote all accessories and options included. 8. Delete all listed accessories and options not included. ' 9. Indicate all special equipment required for a complete system to be supplied by others, and by whom they will be supplied. 10. Indicate any deviations from specification and other constraints that may affect the work of any ' contractor. I. All related equipment necessary to comprise a complete system shall be submitted in a folder with each page identified. Indicate when submitting an incomplete system in which some components will ' be submitted under separate cover. J. The following procedures shall apply: , 1. Transmit each submittal with form accepted by Architect/Engineer. 2. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with an alphabetic suffix. 3. Identify Project, Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing ' sheet and detail number(s),and specification Section number,as appropriate. 4. Apply Trade Contractor's or Supplier's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work,and coordination of information,is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. ' 5. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project,and deliver in accordance with the Project Manual. 6. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. 7. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps. , 8. Revise and resubmit submittals as required,identify all changes made since previous submittal. 9. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. , K. Within three(3)days after date of Contractor Agreement and/or Purchase Order, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. , L. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation,and reference standards. ' M. Within ten(10)calendar days after date of Contractor Agreement and/or Purchase Order,submit shop drawings in the form of one reproducible transparency and one blue line reproduction,each item listed on the schedule. ' N. Within ten (10) calendar days after the date of Contractor Agreement and/or Purchase Order, submit product data as follows: 1. Submit only pages which are pertinent; mark each copy of standard printed data to identify ' pertinent products, reference to Specification Section and Article number. Show reference standards, performance, and controls; component parts; finishes; dimension; and required clearances. ' 2. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the Work.Delete information not applicable. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 211110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK O. Review submittals and shop drawings prior to transmittal; determine and verify field measurements, field construction criteria, manufacturer's catalogs numbers, and conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor review and submission indicates that the Supplier certifies that he(it)has investigated and verified all materials,and specification criteria and that he has checked and coordinated same with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents and that ' there are no deviations except as specifically noted in this submission, and hereby submits for review in accordance with requirements of the General Conditions. ' P. Coordinate submittals with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. Q. Sign or initial each sheet of shop drawings and product data. Each sample label to certify compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. Notify Owner in writing at time of submittal of any ' deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. R. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires submittal until return of submittal with Architect/Engineer acceptance. ' S. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals; identify changes made since previous submittal. T. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data. ' U. Identify conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and Contract Documents. ' V. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate to Architect/ Engineer for review,in quantities specified for Product Data. W. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting ' reference date,affidavits,and certifications as appropriate. X. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Construction Manager. Y. Shop Drawings and Data indicated in Division 01. ' Z. Shop drawings and submittals shall be reviewed and returned within ten (10) working days. The following meanings shall apply: 1. "Approved" means that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed, providing submittal complies with Contract Documents. Supplier assumes sole responsibility for the ' required compliance.No response is required of the Supplier. 2. "Approved as Noted"means that fabrication,manufacture,or construction may proceed,provided submittal is amended and resubmitted to comply with Construction Manager's notations and the Contract Documents, or the Supplier confirms in writing that he will do so. If for any reason ' contractor cannot confirm compliance with notations, Supplier shall resubmit as described for submittals stamped Rejected. 3. "Rejected" means that submittal does not comply with Contract Documents,and that fabrication, manufacture,or construction as submitted must not proceed under any circumstances. Submittals stamped Rejected are not permitted on job site. 4. Supplier receipt of shop drawings or data stamped"Rejected"shall not be the basis of a claim for extension or delay,with regard to delivery of equipment or material. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANE SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 1.08 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be done by competent Tradespersons, skilled in the portion of work they will be ' engaged in on this project. All work shall be in accordance with the highest standards of established practice in the Mechanical trade,and shall produce the most stable,durable,and presentable results. B. All work under this Division,judged below standard by the Architect/Engineer,shall be brought up to t standard at no cost to the Owner. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION/INFORMATION ' A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship,to produce Work of specified quality. ' B. Comply fully with manufacturer's instructions,including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturer's instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Owner before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent ' tolerances,codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, ' vibration,physical distortion or disfigurement. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or , manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation,quality of workmanship,start-up of equipment,test,adjust;and balance of equipment and as applicable,and to initiate instructions when necessary. ' H. All equipment provided under this Division shall be set up,and adjusted following the manufacturer's instructions or requirements for proper operation and maintenance. I. Where equipment manufacturer's instruction or requirements conflict with information on the ' Drawings or in the Specifications,the Engineer shall be advised.The Engineer shall resolve conflicts and the solution shall be instituted under the basic Contract with no additional cost to the Owner. J. The Owner,or his operating personnel,shall be instructed in the location and use of all equipment and systems installed under the Mechanical Division of Work. This shall include the services of a man familiar with all equipment and systems for a minimum of two (2) days and maximum of one (1) , week. K. Submit to the Architect/Engineer for approval, four copies of Maintenance Manuals for all major equipment and systems. Maintenance Manuals,when approved,will be turned over to the Owner for ' his use. The Manuals shall contain installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, and spare parts list. 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting,fitting,and patching to complete Work and to: 1. Fit the several parts together to integrate with other work ' 2. Uncover work to install ill-timed work 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 2110 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 4. Remove sample of installed work for testing 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work B. Maintain weathertight conditions at all times, arrange temporary protection as required to provide same. C. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. D. After uncovering,inspect conditions affecting performance of work. E. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. F. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. G. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. ' H. Employ authorized and qualified installer to perform cutting and patching for moisture resistant elements and sight exposed surfaces. I. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not allowed without prior approval. J. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. ' K. Fit work airtight to pipes,sleeves,ducts,conduit,and other penetrations through surfaces. L. At penetrations of fire rated wall, ceiling or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material,full thickness of the construction element. M. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes; for continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; ' for an assembly,refinish entire unit. 1.11 FIRE STOPPING A. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide fireproof firestopping materials and accessories for all mechanical penetrations using fireproofing materials per ASTM E814 to achieve a fire rating as required by applicable codes. B. Submit product data.:Provide data on product characteristics,performance and limitation criteria. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions:Indicate preparation and installation instructions. ' D. Submit manufacturer's certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. F. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60°F. G. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for three (3) days after installation of ' materials. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES FL - SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK H. Sequence Work to permit firestopping materials to be installed after adjacent and surrounding work is complete. 1 I. The acceptable manufacturers are as follows: 1. 3M Fire Barrier Products. 2. Domtar Gypsum. 3. USG. 4. Dow. 5. Or approved equal. ' J. Firestopping Material: Single component caulk 1. CP 25N/S for wall and ceiling applications(3M). 2. CP 258SAL for floor applications(3M). ' 3. Fire Halt-Sealant(Domtar). 4. Fire Stop Foam and Sealant(Dow). K. Penetrations: ' 1. FB-2000 for wall and floor penetrations(3M). 2. CP25WB Caulk(3M). 3. Fire Halt Sealant(Domtar). 4. Fire Stop Foam and Sealant(Dow). , L. Fire Safing Material: 1. Thermafiber(USG). ' 2. Mineral Wool(Dow). M. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt,dust,grease,oil,loose material,or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material. , N. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond. O. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 P. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve raring to uniform density and texture. Q. Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating sleeves,mechanical duct,cable tray,conduit,and other items requiring firestopping. R. Clean Work under provisions of Division 01. ' S. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 1.12 UNLOADING AND RIGGING , A. Execute unloading,rigging and storage to complete work and to: 1. Fit the several parts together to integrate with other work. ' 2. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. 3. Remove materials and equipment used for operations, repair, replace and/or restore any items damaged as a result of operations. ' B. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during unloading and rigging. C. Beginning of unloading or rigging means acceptance of existing conditions. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -8- SECTION 2100 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK D. Provide insurance coverage sufficient to cover the cost for immediate replacement and all costs required,should any equipment or portion of the project be damaged during unloading and rigging. E. Provide insurance coverage for total replacement value of all products, materials and/or equipment stored. t F. The contractor shall, to the fullest extent possible, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner P fY , Architect/Engineer and landlord from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses resulting ' from the performance of the work. G. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings, and devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. H. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper support during rigging and unloading. ' I. Contractor shall receive at tailgate,all designated products,material and/or equipment. J. Contractor shall unload products,material and/or equipment,and store until ready for rigging in place K. Contractor shall transport, move and rig equipment to designated location, upon direction of Construction Manager. ' L. Contractor shall coordinate his work with other trade contractors as required, to ensure the proper placement and setting of equipment. M. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions N. Promptly inspect shipments to assure products are undamaged. Notify the Owner and transportation vendor in writing of any damage noted O. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by method to prevent soiling, disfigurement and damage. P. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather tight,climate-controlled enclosures. 1.13 PRODUCTS A. Products:Means new material,machinery,components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the Work.Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer,for similar components. ' C. Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by method to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. tF. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection.Periodically inspect to assure Products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25 2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -9- SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 1.14 PROTECTION,MAINTENANCE,AND MAKING READY FOR ACCEPTANCE A. All equipment and systems provided under this Division shall be protected, maintained, and kept in good repair until final acceptance by the Owner. Only first class, undamaged equipment in good operating condition will be accepted. B. Use of all equipment supplied under this Division is prohibited until Owner's final acceptance except ' for testing, by special permission, or as allowed by the "Temporary Services" section of the Specifications. C. All equipment supplied under this Division shall be freshly lubricated just before final inspection. Furnish to the Owner all necessary devices for lubrication of the equipment. D. All concealed hangers and supports shall be painted with rust inhibitive enamel. Finish painting of all ' exposed work will be by others. E. All materials subject to moisture damage shall be stored indoors in a controlled environment as necessary to prevent condensation in the materials. F. All equipment provided under this Division shall be set up,and adjusted following the manufacturer's ' instructions or requirements for proper operation and maintenance. G. Where equipment manufacturer's instruction or requirements conflict with information on the Drawings or in the Specifications,the Engineer shall be advised. The Engineer shall resolve conflicts and the solution shall be instituted under the basic Contract with no additional cost to the Owner. H. The Owner,or his operating personnel,shall be instructed in the location and use of all equipment and systems installed under the Mechanical Division of Work. This shall include the services of a man familiar with all equipment and systems for a minimum of two (2) days and maximum of one (1) week. I. Submit to the Engineer for approval,four copies of Maintenance Manuals for all major equipment and systems. Maintenance Manuals, when approved, will be turned over to the Owner for his use. The Manuals shall contain installation,operating,and maintenance instructions,and spare parts list. 1.15 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Owner seven(7)days prior to start-up of each item. , C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication,drive rotation, , belt tension,control sequence,or other conditions that may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified mechanical and electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. ' E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible Contractor's personnel in accordance with ' manufacturer's instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized , representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up,and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL _ 10- SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning ' correctly. 1.16 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT ' A. Arrange and conduct all requested testing necessary to demonstrate to the Architect/Engineer, the proper operation of all equipment supplied under this Division. Proper operation shall include the following: 1. Operating characteristics as specified 2. All accessories and options installed and operational 3. Total system and individual components operational as specified and per manufacturer's published information ' 4. No excess noise and vibration,as judged by the Engineer B. Provide all labor, materials, and instruments necessary to conduct all required testing. Test findings shall be recorded and neatly typed in a report and submitted to Engineer in triplicate. C. All tests which must be witnessed by inspecting authorities shall be prearranged with the Inspector before notifying the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than forty- eight (48) hours in advance of all tests. The Contractor shall be responsible for modifications or repairs necessary to satisfy all required testing. D. Preliminary tests and adjustments shall be conducted to minimize the amount of time required for ' adjustments and repairs during the actual final testing. E. Motor testing shall be conducted on all motors. Testing and data to be tabulated in the report shall be as follows: 1. Equipment name or description 2. Motor manufacturer's available nameplate data including: rpm, HP, phase, voltage, full load amperes,safety factor,power factor,manufacturer's name,motor type and/or model number 3. Motor test readings shall be taken at normal load and shall include amperes for each phase,phase- to-phase voltage at motor,and at starter or disconnect switch terminals. Percentage=load test amperes(average) ' full load amperes(nameplate) 4. Motor starter nameplate data shall include manufacturer, model, size, and ampere rating of overload heaters installed. 5. Motor feeder breaker and/or disconnect switch data shall include manufacturer of fuses installed, and branch circuit wire size. 1.17 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS iA. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two (2)weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation,perform demonstration for other season within six months. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble shooting, servicing, maintenance, and ' shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled times,at designated location. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL III SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. ' 1.18 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, t and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. , 1.19 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. , B. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. C. Remove waste and surplus materials,rubbish,and construction facilities from the site. , 1.20 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. ' 1.21 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' A. Maintain on site,one set of the following record documents;record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings,Product data,and samples. ' B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. ' D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed,including the following: ' 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda or Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. ' 2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Details not on original Contract Drawings. F. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. ' 1.22 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two (2)sets prior to final inspection,bound in 8-1/2 x 11-inch text pages,bound with durable , plastic covers. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAM SHORES,FL - 12- SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", ' title of project,and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers,logically organized as described below,with tab titling clearly printer under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified. E. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors,and major equipment suppliers. F. Part 11: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: ' 1. Significant design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Operating instructions. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. G. Part III: Project documents and certificates,including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data. 2. Test and start-up reports. ' 3. Manufacturer's Certificates. 4. Photocopies of warranties. H. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form three(3)days prior to final inspection.This copy will be returned,with Architect/Engineer comments.Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. 1.23 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES iA. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for replacing or repairing all work performed, or materials furnished under this Division that proved defective within a one (1) year guarantee period, ' unless otherwise noted. Responsibility shall include the cost of temporary services while repairs are made,and all consequential costs to other trades caused by the defective material or workmanship. B. Provide to the Owner a list of all guarantees and warranties on specific pieces of equipment supplied under this section. C. Provide duplicate notarized copies. D. Execute and assemble documents from subcontractors,suppliers,and manufacturers. E. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover. F. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. G. For items of work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten(10)days after acceptance,listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 13- SECTION 23 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK PART 2-NOT USED PART 3-NOT USED , END OF SECTION 23 00 10 ' I 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 14- SECTION 23 05 00-COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC ' PART l—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. ' 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. HVAC demolition. 9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 10. Painting and finishing. 11. Concrete bases. 12. Supports and anchorages. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 2. Division 01 Section"Cutting and Patching." 3. Division 09 Section'Painting&Finishing." 4. Division 26 Electrical. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases,unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces,and tunnels. B. Exposed,Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed,Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures ' and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. ' F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. ' 2. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25 2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: ' 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. ' 4. Escutcheons. B. Welding certificates. ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS DI.l,"Structural Welding ' Code-Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section 1X,"Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series,"Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or ' efficiencies are specified,equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, ' and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt,debris,and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. ' 1.06 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of t construction,to allow for HVAC installations. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are ' concealed behind finished surfaces. PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements , apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified or approved equal. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- i SECTION 210100 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 2.02 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. ' 1. ASME B16.21, non-metallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full Face Type: For flat face,Class 125,cast iron and cast bronze flanges. b. Narrow Face Type: For raised face,Class 250,cast iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8-inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full face or ring type,unless otherwise indicated. ' C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1,carbon steel,unless otherwise indicated. D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer,unless otherwise indicated. ' E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead free alloys. Include water flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. ' F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper phosphorus alloys for general duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8,BAgl,silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. ' G. Welding Filler Metals:Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. ' H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. 2.04 TRANSITION FITTINGS ' A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions;one end with threaded brass insert,and one solvent cement joint end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Eslon Thermoplastics. b. Or Approved Equal. B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions;one end with threaded brass insert,and one solvent cement joint end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Thompson Plastics,Inc. ' b. Or Approved Equal. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- I SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107,CPVC and PVC four part union. Include brass end, solvent cement joint end,rubber O-ring,and union nut. ' 1. Manufacturers: a. NIBCO Inc. b. Or Approved Equal. 2.05 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS t A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder joint, plain,or weld neck end connections that match piping system materials. 1 B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid,pressure,and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at ' 180°F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse,Inc. d. Epco Sales,Inc. e. Hart Industries,International,Inc. , f. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries,Inc.;Wilkins Div. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion flange assembly, for 150 or 300-psig minimum ' working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. ' b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales,Inc. d. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div. , E. Dielectric Flange Kits: Companion flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full face or ring type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. ' 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products&Systems,Inc. b. Calpico,Inc, c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator,Inc.. 2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150 or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. t F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends;and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225°F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Calpico,Inc. ' b. Lochinvar Corp. G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive,thermoplastic lining;plain, ' threaded,or grooved ends;and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225°F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products,Inc. , c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co.,Inc. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 210100 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC d. Victaulic Co.of America. 2.06 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit,designed for field assembly,to fill annular space between ' pipe and sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products&Systems,Inc. ' b. Calpico,Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator,Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Glass reinforced plastic. Include two(2)for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one(1)for each sealing element. ' 2.07 SLEEVES ' A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness;round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E,Grade B,Schedule 40,galvanized,plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile iron pressure pipe,with plain ends and integral waterstop,unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured,cast iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PVC: Permanent,with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785,Schedule 40. ' G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.08 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe,tube,and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One Piece,Deep Pattern Type: Deep drawn,box shaped brass with polished chrome plated finish. ' C. One Piece,Cast Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome plated D. Split Casting,Cast Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome plated or rough brass. E. One Piece,Stamped Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome plated finish. ' F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome.plated finish. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25 2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC G. One Piece,Floor Plate Type: Cast iron floor plate. H. Split Casting,Floor Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. 2.09 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107,Grade B,non-shrink and nonmetallic,dry hydraulic cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post hardening,volume adjusting,non-staining,non-corrosive,non-gaseous,and recommended for interior and exterior applications. ' 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi,28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Pre-mixed and factory packaged. 2.10 FABRICATED DRIP PANS A. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion resistant sheet metal with watertight joints and ' edges turned up to 2-1/2-inches. Reinforce top, either by structural angles or by rolling top over ''/c- inch steel rod. Provide hole,gasket, and flange at low point for watertight joint and 1-inch drain line , connection. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 HVAC DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. ' 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ' ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean,and ' store equipment;when appropriate,reinstall,reconnect,and make equipment operational. 7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. B. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove ' damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.02 PIPING SYSTEMS-COMMON REQUIREMENTS ' A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. , B. Drawing plans,schematics,and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout ' are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and ' service areas. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 210100 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. ' F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. ' H. Install piping free of sags and bends. 1. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. ' J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. ' K. Do not install piping: 1. Except as noted in: a. Electric rooms and closets. b. Telephone rooms and closets. ' c. Elevator machine rooms. 2. Except as noted over or within 5-feet of. a. Switchboards. b. Motor control. c. Motors,except for branch piping to equipment. 3. When Over or Within 5-Feet Unavoidable: Provide drip pans with leak monitoring device under piping or over electrical equipment,and elsewhere as indicated. Pipe 1-inch drain outlet to floor drain, slop sink, or other indirect waste, or as indicated. Hang from structure with rods and building attachment. Weld rods to side of drip pan. Brace to prevent sagging or swaying. L. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. ' M. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls,ceilings,and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece,deep pattern type. b. Chrome Plated Piping: One piece,cast brass type with polished chrome plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One piece,stamped steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass type with polished chrome plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces One piece or split casting, cast brass type with polished chrome plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece,cast brass type with rough brass finish. ' g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece,cast brass type. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One piece,floor plate type. 2. Existing Piping: Use the following: a. Chrome Plated Piping: Split casting,cast brass type with chrome plated finish. ' b. Insulated Piping: Split plate, stamped steel type with concealed or exposed rivet hinge and spring clips. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting,cast brass type ' with chrome plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting, cast brass type with chrome plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split casting, cast brass type with rough brass t finish. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split casting,cast brass type. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25;2014 MIAMI SHORES,FI, -7- 1 SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split plate, stamped steel type with set screw or spring clips. 1 h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split casting,floor plate type. N. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes. O. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. 1 P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. Q. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum board partitions, and 1 concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 1 a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2-inches above finished floor level. Extend cast iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 1 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger,penetrating gypsum board partitions. 1 c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2- inches above finished floor level. 1 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation,using joint sealants appropriate for size,depth,and location of joint. R Aboveground,Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve 1 seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6-inches in diameter. 1 2. Install cast-iron"wall pipes"for sleeves 6-inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. PositionPiP e in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing 1 elements to expand and make watertight seal. S. Underground, Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe ' penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe 1 material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. T. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls,partitions,ceilings,and floors at pipe ' penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section for materials. U. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in. 1 V. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in 1 requirements. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 1 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -8- 1 ' SECTION 210100 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 3.03 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION ' A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. ' B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale,slag,dirt,and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. ' D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's"Copper Tube Handbook,"using lead free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. ' E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. ' F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: ' 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance"Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. ' 1. Plastic Piping Solvent Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling practice of cleaners,primers,and solvent cements. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. ' 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 4. PVC Non-Pressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. ' K. Plastic Non-Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. L. PE Piping Heat Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.04 PIPING CONNECTIONS ' A. Make connections according to the following,unless otherwise indicated: BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -9- 1 SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 1. Install unions,in piping NPS 2 and smaller,adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. ' 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger,adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. ' 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.05 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION-COMMON REQUIREMENTS ' A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. 1 B. Install equipment level andplumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces,unless otherwise indicated. C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service,maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. ' Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. ' D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.06 PAINTING ' A. Painting of HVAC systems,equipment,and components is specified in Division 09 Sections"Painting and Finishing." B. Dip uncoated hangers,supports,rods and inserts in zinc chromate primer. ' C. Apply one coat of zinc chromate primer to black steel or iron work. ' D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.07 CONCRETE BASES ' A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. ' 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4-inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install ' dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base,and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, ' templates,diagrams,instructions,and directions fiunished withitems to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. ' 3.08 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and, elevation to , support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 10- SECTION 210100 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC B. Metal decking shall not be used for inserts and supports ' C. Inserts,beam clamps, steel face plates(in concrete fill only), cantilever brackets or other means shall be supported from the building construction. tD. Trapeze hangers of bolted angles or channels shall be permitted for grouped lines and services. E. Provide additional framing to span structured members where building construction is inadequate. ' F. Where building structure consists of bar joists, hangers must be secured to top chord of panel point with concentrated load not exceeding the safe loading recommendations of the bar joists manufacturer or 500 lbs.whichever is lower. G. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 1 3.09 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. ' B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.10 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates,and anchors,unless otherwise noted in the manufacturers installation guidelines. ' B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. ' C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout,completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. ' G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. ' 3.11 ACCESS DOORS A. Supply access doors in hung ceilings,walls,and partitions for access to mechanical equipment,valves, ' and dampers for installation under"General Construction Work"and directing location and setting. 3.12 CLEANING ' A. Brush and clean work prior to concealing,painting,and acceptance. Perform in stages,if directed. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC B. Clean and repair painted, exposed, soiled, or damaged work to match adjoining work before final acceptance. ' C. Remove debris from inside and outside of material and equipment. D. Provide temporary stoppers to close open ends of work. ' END OF SECTION 23 05 00 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 1 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 12- SECTION 23 05 10-ACCEPTANCE TESTING ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 APPLICATION PUBLICATION ' A. The publication listed below forms a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publication is referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1. ASHRAE Handbook:Testing,Adjusting and Balancing,and Building Commissioning. PART 2-QUALIFICATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 2.01 The Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing organization to provide final inspection, testing, calibration, and adjusting on the mechanical distribution system as defined in this contract. The organization shall be independent of the supplier,producer,or installer of the equipment. ' 2.02 Testing, inspection, and calibration shall be performed by an Engineering Technician, certified by a national organization, with a minimum of five years experience inspecting, testing and calibrating ' mechanical distribution equipment, systems, and devices. Information on the testing organization and qualifications of the Certified Engineering Technician shall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to the start of work. ' 2.03 The Contractor shall supply to the testing organization complete sets of approved shop drawings, settings of all adjustable devices, and other information necessary for an accurate inspection and evaluation of the system prior to the performance of any tests. The testing organization shall submit a test procedure for each item of equipment to be tested on this project for approval after the evaluation of the system and equipment has been determined No testing shall be performed until after the test procedures have been submitted to and approved by the Engineer. tPART 3-INSPECTIONS 3.01 An inspection of the installed equipment shall be performed by the testing organization to verify that the ' distribution equipment installed, and to be tested, is the equipment as denoted on the approved shop drawings. The inspection shall check the equipment designations, device characteristics, special installation requirements, applicable code of requirements and other conditions which may affect the successful,safe performance and operation of the system. ' 3.02 The installed equipment shall be compared to the approved shop drawings after the installation and a report developed stating any discrepancies. PART 4-TESTING ' 4.01 The testing organization shall perform tests on each item of distribution equipment contained in this contract in accordance with the latest edition of the ASHRAE Handbook and NFPA Standard for the systems installed on this project. 4.02 Field Acceptance Testing shall be accomplished on each item of mechanical distribution equipment installed or connected to a part of this contract. This shall include,but is not limited to: ' A. All air movement equipment(air handler,fans,heat rejection equipment,etc.). B. Duct distribution system and accessories(VAVs,heat pumps,etc.). ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANII SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 23 05 10 ACCEPTANCE TESTING C. All pumps. 1. All piping systems. ' 2. All fire detection and suppression systems. 3. All building automation and control systems. 4. All plumbing and drainage systems. 4.03 Systems shall be energized or otherwise placed in service only after completion of all required tests and an , evaluation of the test results has been completed. PART 5-SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS ' 5.01 Each system provided in this contract, and covered by this Division 23 section of specifications, shall be ' function tested to ensure total system operation. The Contractor shall verify that all systems interface correctly with all related systems. 5.02 After the manufacturers complete their individual start-up checks,services and testing,the Contractor shall ' provide a total system test. 5.03 A service representative of the manufacturer of the major mechanical equipment and components shall be present during the system test. The representatives shall be qualified to service the equipment and make , necessary checks and adjustments to ensure proper operation of their respective equipment. 5.04 The system test shall be conducted at the direction of the engineer. ' 5.05 Any failure during the system test shall be corrected immediately. The test procedure in progress at the time of failure shall be restarted The contractor shall warrant that errors and omissions in the test report shall be corrected without charge to the Owner when so found within 12 months from acceptance of the ' report. 5.06 The engineer reserves the right to accept or reject test data which does not conform to the manufacturer's data or is not obtained in accordance with these specifications PART 6-DOCUMENTATION 6.01 Provide certified test reports for review and approval.Copies of the approved report shall be included in the ' manuals required in Division 01,General Requirements for Mechanical Work. END OF SECTION 23 05 10 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 23 05 19-METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Thermometers. 2. Gauges. 3. Test Plugs. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber. B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated;include performance curves. ' B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers and gauges indicating manufacturer's number, scale range,and location for each. C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer and gauge signed by product manufacturer. PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 METAL CASE,LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following ' available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Palmer-Wahl Instruments Inc. 2. Trerice,H.O.Co. ' 3. Weiss Instruments,Inc. 4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit;Dresser Industries;Instrument Div. B. Case: Die-cast aluminum or brass,9-inches(225-mm)long. C. Tube: Red or blue reading,mercury or organic-liquid filled,with magnifying lens. ' D. Tube Background: Satin-faced,non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. E. Window: Glass. ' F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -1 - SECTION 23 05 19 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING G. Stem: Brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 ' percent of range. 2.02 DUCT TYPE,LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. NEI oco Corp: 2. Palmer-Wahl Instruments Inc. 3. Trerice,H.O.Co. ' 4. Weiss Instruments,Inc. B. Case: Die-cast aluminum,7-inches(175-mm)long. C. Tube: Red or blue reading,mercury or organic filled,with magnifying lens. D. Tube Background: Satin-faced,non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. ' E. Window: Glass. F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with , locking device. G. Stem: Brass,for installation in mounting bracket and of length to suit installation. H. Mounting Bracket: Flanged fitting for attachment to duct and made to hold thermometer stem. ' 1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 ' percent of range. 2.03 BIMETALLIC ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following , available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations;Dresser Industries;Instrument Div. ' 2. Ernst Gage Co. 3. Eugene Ernst Products Co. 4. Marsh Bellofi-am. 5. Miljoco Corp. , 6. NANMAC Corporation. 7. Noshok,Inc. 8. Palmer-Wahl Instruments Inc. 9. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation. 10. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 11. Trerice,H.O.Co. , 12. Weiss Instruments,Inc. 13. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit;Dresser Industries;Instrument Div. 14. WIKA Instrument Corporation. 15. Winters Instruments. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW. JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 210119 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING B. Description: Direct mounting,bimetallic actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME B40.3. C. Case: Liquid-filled type,stainless steel with 5-inch(125-mm)diameter. D. Element: Bimetal coil. ' E. Dial: Satin faced,non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. F. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal. ' G. Window: Glass. H. Ring: Stainless steel. I. Connector: Adjustable angle type. J. Stem: Metal,for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. K. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.04 THERMOWELLS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: ' 1. AMETEK,Inc.;U.S.Gauge Div. 2. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations;Dresser Industries;Instrument Div. 3. Ernst Gage Co. 4. Marsh Bellofram. ' 5. Miljoco Corp. 6. NANMAC Corporation. 7. Noshok,Inc. 8. Palmer-Wahl Instruments Inc. ' 9. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation. 10. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 11. Trerice,H.O.Co. ' 12. Weiss Instruments,Inc. 13. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit;Dresser Industries;Instrument Div. 14. WIKA Instrument Corporation. 15. Winters Instruments. ' B. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used. C. Description: Pressure tight, socket type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type, 1 diameter,and length required to hold thermometer. 2.05 PRESSURE GAUGES ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: ' 1. AMETEK,Inc.;U.S.Gauge Div. 2. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations;Dresser Industries;Instrument Div. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 23 05 19 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 3. Ernst Gage Co. 4. Eugene Ernst Products Co. ' 5. KOBOLD Instruments,Inc. 6. Marsh Bellofram. 7. Miljoco Corp. 8. Noshok,Inc. t 9. Palmer-Wahl Instruments Inc. 10. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation. 11. Trerice,H.O.Co. 12. Weiss Instruments,Inc. 13. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit;Dresser Industries;Instrument Div. 14. WIKA Instrument Corporation. 15. Winters Instruments. ' B. Direct Mounting,Dial Type Pressure Gauges: Indicating dial type complying with ASME B40.100. 1. Case: Liquid-filled type,drawn steel or cast aluminum 6-inch(150-mm)diameter. 2. Pressure Element Assembly: Bourdon tube,unless otherwise indicated. , 3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN 8), bottom outlet type unless back outlet type is indicated. 4. Movement: Mechanical,with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 5. Dial: Satin faced,non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal. ' 7. Window: Glass. 8. Ring: Metal. , 9. Accuracy: Grade A,plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale. 10. Vacuum Pressure Range: 30-in.Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure (100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure). 11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure. ' C. Remote Mounting,Dial Type Pressure Gauges: ASME B40.100,indicating dial type. 1. Case: Dry type,drawn steel or cast aluminum 6-inch(150-mm)diameter with holes for panel mounting. ' 2. Pressure Element Assembly: Bourdon tube,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN 8), bottom outlet type unless back outlet type is indicated. t 4. Movement: Mechanical,with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 5. Dial: Satin faced,non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal. 7. Window: Glass. ' 8. Ring: Metal. 9. Accuracy: Grade A,plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale. 10. Vacuum Pressure Range: 30-in.Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure (100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure). 11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure. D. Pressure Gauge Fittings: ' 1. Valves: NPS 1/4(DN 8)brass or stainless steel needle type. 2. Syphons: NPS 1/4(DN 8)coil of brass tubing with threaded ends. 3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5,NPS 1/4(DN 8)brass bushing with corrosion resistant,porous metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. , BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 2101 19 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 2.06 TEST PLUGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Flow Design,Inc. ' 2. MG Piping Products Co. 3. National Meter,Inc. 4. Peterson Equipment Co.,Inc. 5. Sisco Manufacturing Co. ' 6. Trerice,H.O.Co. 7. Watts Industries,Inc.;Water Products Div. B. Description: Corrosion resistant brass or stainless steel body with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap,with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping. 1 C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200°F(3450 kPa at 93°C). D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves. ' 1. Insert material for air,water,oil,or gas service at 20 to 200°F(minus 7 to plus 93°C)shall be CR. 2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275°F (minus 35 to plus 136°C) shall be EPDM. IE. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit(s)containing one pressure gauge and adaptor, one thermometer, and carrying case. Pressure gauge, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing elements shall be of ' diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping. 1. Pressure Gauge: Small bourdon tube insertion type with 2-to 3-inch(50 to 75-mm)diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig(0 to 1380 kPa). 2. Low-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1 to 2-inch (25 to 50-mm) ' diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 25 to 125°F(minus 4 to plus 52°C). 3. High-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1 to 2-inch (25 to 50-mm) diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 0 to 220°F (minus 18 to ' plus 104°C). 4. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS ' A. Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the following locations: 1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller. 3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems. 4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger. 5. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit. 6. Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank. 7. Outside-air,return-air,and mixed-air ducts. 8. Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank. B. Install bimetallic actuated dial thermometers in the following locations: 1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- S 1 SECTION 23 05 19 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller. 3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems. ' 4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger. 5. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit. 6. Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank. C. Install liquid-filled case type,bimetallic actuated dial thermometers at suction and discharge of each , pump. D. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers: ' 1. Heating Hot Water: 30 to 240°F, with 2-degree scale divisions(Minus 1 to plus 115°C,with 1-degree scale divisions). 2. Condenser Water: 0 to 160°F,with 2-degree scale divisions(Minus 18 to plus 71°C,with 1- ' degree scale divisions. 3. Chilled Water: 0 to 100°F, with 2-degree scale divisions (Minus 18 to plus 38°C, with 1- degree scale divisions). 4. Steam and Condensate: 30 to 300°F, with 5-degree scale divisions (Minus 1 to plus 150°C, with 2-degree scale divisions). 5. Air Ducts: Minus 40 to plus 110°F, with 2-degree scale divisions (Minus 40 to plus 43°C, with 2-degree scale divisions). .3.02 GAUGE APPLICATIONS A. Install dry-case-type pressure gauges for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. , B. Install liquid filled case type pressure gauges at chilled and condenser water inlets and outlets of chillers. C. Install liquid filled case type pressure gauges at suction and discharge of each pump. ' 3.03 INSTALLATIONS , A. Install direct mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. B. Install remote mounting dial thermometers on panel,with tubing connecting panel and thermometer ' bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length. C. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2-inches(50-mm)into fluid and in vertical Po n piping sition itees where thermometers are indicated. D. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are indicated. Attach to duct with screws. , E. Install direct mounting pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure gauge located on pipe at most readable position. F. Install remote mounting pressure gauges on panel. ' G. Install needle valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gauge for fluids(except steam). , H. Install needle valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam. 1. Install test plugs in tees in piping. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- a ' SECTION 210119 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING J. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions. ' K. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations. 3.04 CONNECTIONS aA. Install gauges adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance for gauges, machines,and equipment. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust faces of gauges to proper angle for best visibility. END OF SECTION 23 05 19 r BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- 1 ' SECTION 23 05 23—GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work of this Section includes the installation of a complete and operable system of expansion compensation including,but not limited to,the following: ' a. Brass ball valves. b. Bronze ball valves. ' c. Iron ball valves. d. Bronze lift check valves. e. Bronze swing check valves. f. Iron swing check valves. ' g. Iron swing check valves with closure control. h. Iron,grooved end swing check valves. i. Iron,center guided check valves. ' j. Iron,plate type check valves. k. Lubricated plug valves. 1. Eccentric plug valves. ' B. Related Sections: I. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special Conditions,and the following listed Sections. 2. 23 05 53"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" 3. 23 21 13"Hydronic Piping" 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 48/A 48M-Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. B. ASTM A 126-Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,Flanges,and Pipe Fittings. ' C. ASTM A 395/A 395M-Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure. ' D. ASTM A 536-Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. E. ASME B 1.20.1 -Unified Screw and Pipe Threads Package. ' F. ASME B16.1 -Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. G. ASME B16.10-Face to Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves. H. ASME B 16.18-Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. I. ASME B 16.34-Valves Flanged,Threaded and Welding End. ' J. ASME B31.1 -Power Piping. ' K. ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping. • L. ASTM B 62-Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING t M. ASTM A 48/A 48M-Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. N. AWWA C606-Grooved and Shouldered Joints. ' O. MSS Compliance Standards. P. NSF compliance Standards. ' 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. t C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene,Buna-N,or nitrile rubber. D. NRS: Nonrising stem. ' E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. F. RS: Rising stem. t G. SWP: Steam working pressure. 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. ' 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. ' B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B 16.10 and ASME B 16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. , 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING ' A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads,flange faces,grooves,and weld ends. , 3. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 4. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: ' 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary,store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. ' C. Use sling to handle large valves;rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use hand wheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- 1 SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves. 1 B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Actuator Types: ' 1. Gear Actuator: For quarter turn valves NPS 8(DN 200)and larger. 2. Hand wheel: For valves other than quarter turn types. 3. Hand lever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6(DN 150)and smaller except plug valves. 4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with one (1) wrench for every ten ' (10)plug valves,for each size square plug valve head. E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch(50-mm)stem extensions and the following features: ' 1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal conductive material,and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. F. Valve End Connections: 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B 16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 2.02 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Two Piece,Full Port,Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. American Valve,Inc. ' b. Conbraco Industries,Inc.;Apollo Valves. c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. ' f. NIBCO INC. g. Red-White Valve Corporation. h. Watts Regulator Co.;a division of Watts Water Technologies,Inc. 2. Description: ' a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150-psig. c. CWP Rating: 600-psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. ' h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome plated brass. J• Port: Full. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- t SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 2.03 IRON BALL VALVES A. Class 125,Iron Ball Valves: ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. American Valve,Inc. b. Conbraco Industries,Inc.;Apollo Valves. c. Kitz Corporation. d. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. e. Watts Regulator Co.;a division of Watts Water Technologies,Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-72. b. CWP Rating: 200-psig. ' c. Body Design: Split body. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126,gray iron. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. , g. Stem: Stainless steel. h. Ball: Stainless steel. i. Port: Full. 2.04 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES t A. Class 125,Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. ' c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Stockham Division. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80,Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200-psig. ' c. Body Design: Vertical flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62,bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. £ Disc: Bronze. 2.05 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 125,Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. American Valve,Inc. b. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Stockham Division. ' e. Hammond Valve. £ Kitz Corporation. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell Valves. j. Red-White Valve Corporation. k. Watts Regulator Co.;a division of Watts Water Technologies,Inc. 1. Zy-Tech Global Industries,Inc. ' 2. Description: BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 210121 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING a. Standard: MSS SP-80,Type 3. t b. CWP Rating: 200-psig(13 80 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62,bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. ' f. Disc: Bronze. 2.06 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 125,Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: ' a. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. ' e. Kitz Corporation. f. Legend Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. ' h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell Valves. j. Red-White Valve Corporation. k. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. 1. Watts Regulator Co.;a division of Watts Water Technologies,Inc. m. Zy-Tech Global Industries,Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-71,Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12,CWP Rating: 200-psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24,CWP Rating: 150-psig. d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. ' e. Body Material: ASTM A 126,gray iron with bolted bonnet. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Trim: Bronze. h. Gasket: Asbestos free. ' 2.07 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL A. Class 125,Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever and Spring Closure Control: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. NIBCOINC. ' 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-71,Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12,CWP Rating: 200-psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24,CWP Rating: 150-psig. d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. e. Body Material: ASTM A 126,gray iron with bolted bonnet. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Trim: Bronze. h. Gasket: Asbestos free. i. Closure Control: Factory installed,exterior lever and spring. ' B. Class 125,Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever and Weight Closure Control: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 970.7-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING t a. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. ' c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. , g. Watts Regulator Co.;a division of Watts Water Technologies,Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-71,Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12,CWP Rating: 200-psig. ' c. NPS 14 to NPS 24,CWP Rating: 150-psig. d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. e. Body Material: ASTM A 126,gray iron with bolted bonnet. ' f. Ends: Flanged. g. Trim: Bronze. h. Gasket: Asbestos free. i. Closure Control: Factory installed,exterior lever and weight. , 2.08 IRON,GROOVED END SWING CHECK VALVES A. 300 CWP,Iron,Grooved End Swing Check Valves: , 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. Anvil International,Inc. b. Tyco Fire Products LP;Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Victaulic Company. 2. Description: a. CWP Rating: 300-psig. ' b. Body Material: ASTM A 536,ductile iron. c. Seal: EPDM. d. Disc: Spring operated,ductile iron,or stainless steel. 2.09 IRON,CENTER GUIDED CHECK VALVES , A. Class 125,Iron,Compact Wafer,Center Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat: ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal a. Anvil International,Inc. b. Hammond Valve. c. Metraflex,Inc. r d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. Mueller Steam Specialty;a division of SPX Corporation. f. NIBCOINC. , g. Watts Regulator Co.;a division of Watts Water Technologies,Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-125. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12,CWP Rating: 200-psig. ' c. NPS 14 to NPS 24,CWP Rating: 150-psig. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126,gray iron. e. Style: Compact wafer. ' f. Seat: Bronze. 2.10 IRON,PLATE TYPE CHECK VALVES A. Class 125,Iron,Dual Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat: BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 210121 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 1 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves. c. Flomatic Corporation. ' d. Mueller Steam Specialty;a division of SPX Corporation. 2. Description: a. Standard: API 594. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12,CWP Rating: 200-psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24,CWP Rating: 150-psig. d. Body Design: Wafer,spring loaded plates. e. Body Material: ASTM A 126,gray iron. f. Seat: Bronze. 2.11 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES ' A. Class 125,Regular Gland,Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: 1 a. Nordstrom Valves,Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-78,Type II. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12,CWP Rating: 200-psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24,CWP Rating: 150-psig. d. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication sealing system. e. Pattern: Regular or short. f. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove. 2.12 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES ' A. 175 CWP,Eccentric Plug Valves with Resilient Seating. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. Clow Valve Co.;a division of McWane,Inc. b. DeZurik Water Controls. c. Homestead Valve;a division of Olson Technologies,Inc. d. M&H Valve Company;a division of McWane,Inc. ' e. Milliken Valve Company. f. Henry Pratt Company. g. Val-Matic Valve&Manufacturing Corp. ' 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-108. b. CWP Rating: 175-psig minimum. c. Body and Plug: ASTM A 48/A 48K gray iron; ASTM A 126, gray iron; or ASTM A 536, ' ductile iron. d. Bearings: Oil impregnated bronze or stainless steel. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Stem Seal Packing: Asbestos free. ' g. Plug, Resilient Seating Material: Suitable for potable water service unless otherwise indicated. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials,such as blocks,used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. ' B. Actuate valve through an open close and close open cycle. Examine functionally significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. Following examination, return the valve closure member to the shipping position. ' C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange.faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, ' length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size,that its material composition is suitable for service,and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves;replace with new valves. ' 3.02 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. Unions are not required on flange devices. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. ' C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. ' E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: , 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Center Guided and Plate Type Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position,between flanges. 3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 3.03 ADJUSTING ' A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before ' final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated,use the following: ' 1. Shutoff Service: Ball,butterfly,gate,or plug valves. 2. Throttling Service except Steam: Globe,angle,ball or butterfly valves. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available,the same types of valves with ' higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Select valves,except wafer types,with the following end connections: , 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder joint valve end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 2. For Copper Tubing,NPS 2-1/2: Flanged ends except where threaded valve end option is indicated , in valve schedules below. 3. For Copper Tubing,NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -8- i SECTION 210121 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 4. For Steel Piping,NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 6. For Steel Piping,NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 7. For Grooved End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved. END OF SECTION 23 05 23 a ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -9- SECTION 23 05 53-IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work of this section includes installation of identification for HVAC piping and equipment, including but not limited to: a. Equipment labels. b. Warning signs and labels. ' c. Pipe labels. d. Duct labels. e. Stencils. f. Valve tags. g. Warning tags. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements 1 of Division 01, any Supplementary and/or Special conditions, and the following listed Sections. 2. 09 90 00"Painting and Finishing." 3. 23 05 00"Common Work Results for HVAC." 1.02 REFERENCES ' A. ASME A13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For color,letter style,and graphic representation required for each identification material ' and device. C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. D. Valve numbering scheme. E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. 1 C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -1 - SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART2-PRODUCTS , 2.01 EQUIPMENT LABELS ' A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer,multicolor,plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16- inch thick,and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. ' 2. Letter Color: White or as requested by the Owner. 3. Background Color: Black or as requested by the Owner. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160°F. ' 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content,but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4-inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24-inches, 1/2-inch for viewing distances up to 72-inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater ' viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact type permanent adhesive,compatible with label and with substrate. ' B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated(plans,details,and schedules),plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled,on 8-1/2-inches x 11-inches bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and any associated electrical circuit designation as specified on drawing (plans, details, and schedules). Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.02 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS ' A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16-inch thick,and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. ' B. Letter Color: White or as requested by the Owner. C. Background Color: Red or as requested by the Owner. , D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160°F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width v for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2- inches �'y �1 � ' inches x 3/4-inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24-inches, 1/2-inch for viewing distances up to 72-inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact type permanent adhesive,compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information,plus emergency notification instructions. , BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 210111 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.03 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color coded, with lettering indicating service,and showing flow direction. B. Pre-tensioned Pipe Labels:Pre-coiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact type,permanent adhesive backing. ' D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings,pipe size,and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions,or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2-inches high. 2.04 DUCT LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16-inch thick,and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: White or as requested by the Owner. C. Background Color: Black or as requested by the Owner. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160°F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2- inches by 3/4-inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24-inches, 1/2- ' inchfor viewing distances up to 72-inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact type permanent adhesive,compatible with label and with substrate. ' I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings,duct size,and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both 1 directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2-inches high. 2.05 STENCILS 1 A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping;minimum letter height of 1-1/4-inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4-inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels,and similar operational instructions. ' 1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior,gloss,alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAIS PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANfl SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.06 VALVE TAGS ' A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch ' numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire link or beaded chain. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system,on 8-1/2-inches x 11-inches bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or ' space), normal operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.07 WARNING TAGS A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted,accident prevention tags,of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size:3 x 5-1/4-inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or"DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. PART 3-EXECUTION i 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt,oil,grease,release agents,and incompatible primers,paints,and encapsulants. 3.02 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION , A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.03 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION ' A. Piping Color Coding. Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section. B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, , at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels,complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system. 1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection,excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious,mark each pipe at branch. ' 3. Near penetrations through walls,floors,ceilings,and inaccessible enclosures. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 210111 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 4. At access doors,manholes,and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 1 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50-feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25-feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. D. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Chilled Water and Condenser Water Piping: a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White. 2. Refrigerant Piping: a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black. ' 3.04 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install plastic laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 1. Blue: For cold air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot air supply ducts. ' 3. Green: For exhaust,outside,relief,return,and mixed air ducts. 4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels,showing service and flow direction may be provided instead of plastic laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1-inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification. C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50- feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. 3.05 VALVE TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing in connections of end use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. 3.06 WARNING TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on,and attach warning tags to,equipment and other items where required. ' END OF SECTION 23 05 53 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 23 05 93-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work of this Section includes the installation of completed and operable systems including, but not limited to the following: a. Testing,adjustment,and balancing of air systems. b. Testing,adjustment,and balancing of hydronic systems. c. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. d. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions. e. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special conditions. 2. 01 41 00"Regulatory Requirements." ' 3. 23 2133"Hydronic Specialties." 4. 23 24 20"Vibration Isolation." 5. 23 77 55"In-Row Cooler(DX)." 1.02 REFERENCES A. AABC-National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation,Total System Balance. B. ASHRAE-Testing,Adjusting and Balancing. C. NEBB-Procedural Standards for Testing,Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. B. Submit test reports as a submittal. C. Prior to commencing work, submit draft reports indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. D. Submit draft report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final report with index page to Construction Manager and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. Include drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. E. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance. 1.04 REPORT FORMS A. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit record documents. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC B. Accurately record actual locations of flow measuring stations,balancing valves,and rough setting. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Agency shall be company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC. Perform Work under ' supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer. B. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation,Total System Balance. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule work under the provisions of Division 01. , B. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project. PART 2-PRODUCTS , 2.01 AGENCIES A. AABC. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Before commencing work,verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following: 1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required,install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Correct fan rotation. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage has been minimized. 12. Hydronic systems have been flushed,filled,and vented. 13. Correct pump rotation. 14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 15. Service and balance valves are open. B. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to Architect/Engineer. C. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system ' balance. D. If,for design reasons,system cannot be properly balanced,report as soon as observed. , E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 210191 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. B. Provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Adjust air handlings stems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or min Y P P PP y y p us 10 percent for return and exhaust systems from figures indicated. B. Adjust hydronic systems to plus or minus 10 percent of design conditions indicated. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Division 01. B. Recorded data shall represent actually measured or observed condition. C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. After adjustment,take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes,and restoring thermostats to specified settings. F. At final inspection,recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. 3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply,return,and exhaust air quantities. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Affect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- r r SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING FOR HVAC r H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units,including filter and coil pressure drops,and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air,return air,and exhaust dampers to check leakage. ' K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate,full cooling,and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply,return,and exhaust air systems to provide required r relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05-inches positive static pressure near the building entries. 3.06 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices,or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on r temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing. D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks,valves,and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 r r r i r BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- r ' ' SECTION 23 09 00—SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work of this Section includes the installation of a complete system of supports and anchors including,but not limited to,the following: a. Pipe,duct,and equipment hangers,supports,and associated anchors. b. Equipment bases and supports. c. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special Conditions,and the following listed Sections. 2. 23 21 13"Hydronic Piping." 3. 23 23 00`.`Refrigerant Piping." 4. 23 24 20"Vibration Isolation." 5. Sections describing piping and equipment for HVAC systems. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9,"Building Services Piping,"for materials,products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,Division 01. B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,"Structural Welding Code-Steel." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 01. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for pipe sizes%2-inch to 1-'/z-inches:Adjustable wrought steel ring. B. Wall support for pipe sizes to 3-inches:Cast iron hook vertical support steel riser clamp. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes up to 6-inches:Carbon steel,adjustable,clevis. D. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6-inches and over:Adjustable steel yoke,cast iron roll,double hanger. E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6-inches and over. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 23 09 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes up to 6-inches: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp; adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for pipe sizes 6-inches and over. G. Vertical Support:Steel riser clamp. H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4-inches and all cold pipe sizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, ' locknut nipple,floor flange,and concrete pier or steel support. I. Floor support for Pipe Sizes 4-inches and over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Copper Pipe Hangers and Support: Carbon steel, adjustable, copper plated, or provide sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping. K. Shield for Insulated Piping: 18-gauge galvanized steel shield over insulation in 1800 segments, minimum 12-inches long at pipe support. L. Saddles for Insulated Piping Conveying Fluids above Ambient Temperature: Carbon steel protective saddles. M. Saddles for Insulated Piping Conveying Fluids below Ambient Temperature: Hard block non- conducting saddles in 90° segments, 12-inches minimum length, and block thickness same as insulation thickness. N. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. , O. Design hangers to impede disengagement by movement of supported pipe. 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Steel Hanger Rods:Threaded both ends,threaded one end,or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case or galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment,top slot for reinforcing rods,lugs for attaching to forms;size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 SPRING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Except as otherwise indicated,provide factory fabricated spring hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58,of one of the following MSS types listed to suit piping systems,in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select spring hangers and supports to suit pipe size and loading. B. Restraint Control Devices:MSS Type 47. C. Approved Manufacturers: . 1. Elcen Metal Products Co. 2. Fee&Mason Mfg.Co.;Div.Figgie International. 3. ITT Grinnell. 4. Mason Industries. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 23 09 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. B. Steel Plates,Shapes,and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A36. C. Cement Grout: Portland Cement (ASTM C150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand(ASTM C404,Size No.2.) Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand,by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. D. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes; select for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. E. Pipe Guides: Provide factory fabricated guides,of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel,consisting of bolted 2-section outer cylinder and base with 2-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.06 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing:26-gauge galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing:5 lb/sq.ft.sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 lb/sq.ft.sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Flexible Flashing:47-mil thick sheet butyl;compatible with roofing. D. Caps:Steel,22-gauge minimum; 16-gauge at fire resistant elements. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. 2.08 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe ' shafts,and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide seismic support as required by local jurisdictional authority. 3.02 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4-inches. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling,provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 23 09 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS E. Where inserts are omitted,drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab. 3.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: MAXM4UM HANGER PIPE SIZE HANGER SPACING DIAMETER %i thru 1'/a-inches 6-feet 6-inches 3/8-inches 1'/z and 2-inches 10-feet 3/8-inches 2'/z and 3-inches 10-feet 1/2-inch 4 thru 6-inches 10-feet 5/8-inches 8 to 12-inches 12-feet 7/8-inches ABS/PVC(All Sizes) 4-feet 3/8-inches C.I.Bell and Spigot(or No-Hub) and at Joints 5-feet 5/8-inches B. Install hangers to provide minimum%2-inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12-inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hanger with 1'/Z-inches minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub,with 5-feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS , A. Provide equipment bases of concrete with chamfered edges. See Section"Vibration Isolation." B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. Anchor all equipment, piping, and ductwork in accordance with code regulations for seismic zone of the project location. C. Construct supports of structural steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.05 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls,floors,and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3-inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked ' 1-inch minimum into hub,8-inches minimum clear on sides with 24-inches x 24-inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls,turn flanges back into wall and calk,metal counter flash and seal. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 2109 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10-inches clear on sides with minimum 36-inches x 36-inches sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor,shower,and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed in i accordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound control. F. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 12-inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flexible sheet flash and counter flash with sheet metal;seal watertight. END OF SECTION 23 09 00 r BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2- DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 23 17 00-MOTORS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY 1 A. Section Includes: 1. Work of this Section includes the installation of motors including, but not limited to, the following: a. Single phase electric motors. b. Three phase electric motors. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 00 and Division 01 Specification sections apply to this section. 2. Division 23—Heating,Ventilation,and Air Conditioning. ' 3. Division 26—Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AFBMA 9-Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. AFBMA 11 -Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. ' C. ANSUIEEE 112-Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. D. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 -Motors and Generators. E. ANSI/NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Submit test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 20 horsepower. 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 01. ' B. Include assembly drawings,bearing data including replacement sizes,and lubrication instructions. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of electric motors and their accessories, with minimum five(5)years documented product development,testing,and manufacturing experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable electrical codes and ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Conform to local energy code. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 23 17 00 MOTORS 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site and store and protect as directed by Owner/Construction Manager. ' B. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weatherproof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store ' separately. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide one(1)year manufacturer's warranty. , PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows: , 1. TECO-Westinghouse Electric Corporation. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Baldor Electric Company. 2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Service:Refer to Division 26 for required electrical characteristics. , B. Motors:Design for continuous operation in 40°C environment and for temperature rise in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class,service factor,and motor enclosure type. C. Explosion Proof Motors: UL approved and labeled for hazard classification, with over temperature protection. D. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, rpm, full load amps, locked ' rotor amps,frame size,manufacturer's name and model number,Service Factor,Power Factor. E. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection boxes, threaded for conduit. For fractional horsepower ' motors where connection is made directly,provide conduit connection in end frame. 2.03 SINGLE PHASE POWER-SPLIT PHASE MOTORS A. Starting Torque:Less than 150 percent of full load torque. ' B. Starting Current:Up to seven times full load current. , C. Breakdown Torque:Approximately 200 percent of full load torque. D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, pre- ' lubricated sleeve or ball bearings. E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, pre-lubricated ball bearings. 2.04 SINGLE PHASE POWER—PERMANENT SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS ' A. Starting Torque:Exceeding one fourth of full load torque. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 23 17 00 MOTORS B. Starting Current:Up to six(6)rimes full load current. ' C. Multiple Speed:Through tapped windings. D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor,prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings,automatic reset overload protector. S 2.05 SINGLE PHASE POWER-CAPACITOR START MOTOR A. Starting Torque:Three times full load torque. B. Starting Current:Less than five times full load current. ' C. Pull-up Torque:Up to 350 percent of full load torque. D. Breakdown Torque:Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors shall have two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. ' G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.06 THREE PHASE POWER-SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS A. Starting Torque:Between one and one and one-half times full load torque. ' B. Starting Current:Six times full load current. C. Power Output,Locked Rotor Torque,Breakdown or Pullout Torque:NEMA Design B characteristics. D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to ANSI/NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. ' E. Insulation System:NEMA Class B or better. F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with ANSIAEEE 112, Test Method B. Load test motors to determine freedom from electrical or mechanical defects and compliance with performance data. G. Motor Frames: NEMA standard T-frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. ' H. Thermister System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermisters imbedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter. I. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for re-lubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt centerline at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. tJ. Sound Power Levels:To ANSI/NEMA MG 1. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3 - SECTION 23 17 00 MOTORS. K. Part Winding Start (Where Indicated and Above 254T Frame Size): Use part of winding to reduce locked rotor starting current to approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor current while ' providing approximately 50 percent of full winding locked rotor torque. L. Weatherproof Epoxy Sealed Motors (Where Indicated): Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and .pressure with rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel. Bearings shall be double t shielded with waterproof non-washing grease. M. Nominal Efficiency: Meet or exceed values in Schedules at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSUIEEE 112. N. Nominal Power Factor:Meet or exceed values in Schedules at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSUIEEE 112. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION ' A. Motors drawing less than 250 watts and intended for intermittent service may be germane to equipment manufacturer and need not conform to these specifications. , B. Motors shall be open drip proof type,except where specifically noted otherwise. C. Motors with frame sizes 254T and larger shall be energy efficient type. ' D. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans,pumps,or blowers shall be permanent split capacitor type. E. Motors located in exterior locations shall be totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy sealed type. ' 3.02 NEMA OPEN MOTOR SERVICE FACTORS HP '.. 00",M ." 8-00)(P 120U`I€PM 900.RPM" 1/6-1/3 1.35 1.35 1.35 1.35 %2 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.15 3/a 1.25 1.25 1.15 1.15 1 1.25 1.15 1.15 1.15 ' 1.5-150 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 3.03 PERFORMANCE SCHEDULES:ELECTRIC MOTORS A. See drawings for specific motor requirements. ' END OF SECTION 23 17 00 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK"PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANII SHORES,FL -4- PART 1 -GENERAL SECTION 23 21 13-HYDRONIC PIPING ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Work of this Section includes the installation of complete and operable systems of hydronic piping including,but not limited to: a. Makeup water piping. b. Condensate drain piping. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special conditions,and the following listed Sections. 2. 23 05 19"Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping." 3. 23 05 23"General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping" 4. 23 05 53"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 5. 23 09 29"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 6. 23 2133"Hydronic Specialties." 7. 23 24 20"Vibration Isolation." 8. 23 25 00"Piping Insulation." 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSFASME-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B. ANSFASME Sec 9-Welding and Brazing Qualifications. ' C. ANSI/ASME B 16.3-Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300. D. ANSFASME B 16.23-Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings—DW V. E. ANSI/ASME B 16.29 -Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings —DWV. F. ANSI/ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping. G. ANSFASTM D2466-Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 40. ' H. ANSI/AWS A5.8-Brazing Filler Metal. I. ANSI/AWS DIA -Structural Welding Code. J. ANSI/AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids. K. ANSI/AWWA C110 -Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings 3"through 48",for Water and Other Liquids. L. ANSI/AWWA C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and ' Fittings. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - 1 SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING M. ANSUAWWA C151 -Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids. ' N. ANSI/AWWA C606—Standard for Grooved and Shouldered.Joints. O. ASTM A53-Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped.Zinc Coated,Welded and Seamless. P. ASTM A120-Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated(Galvanized),Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. Q. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. R. ASTM A536—Ductile Iron Castings. ' S. ASTM B32-Solder Metal T. ASTM B88-Seamless Copper Water Tube. t U. ASTM D1785-Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe Schedules 40;80,and 120. V. ASTM D2235 - Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and , Fittings. W. ASTM D2241 -Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe(SDR-PR). X. ASTM D2310-Machine-Made Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe. Y. ASTM D2466-Socket-Type PVC Plastic Type Fittings,Schedule 40. ' Z. ASTM D2467-Socket-Type PVC Plastic Type Fittings,Schedule 80. ' AA. ASTM D2680-Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene(ABS)Composite-Sewer Piping. BB. ASTM D2683 - Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene ' pipe and Tubing. CC. ASTM D2751 -Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene(ABS)Sewer Pipe and Fittings. DD. ASTM D2855-Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with PVC Pipe and Fittings. EE. ASTM F477-Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets)for Joining Plastic Pipe. , 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. B. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable water service piping,including ' materials,installation,testing,and disinfection. C. Piping materials shall bear label,stamp,or other markings of specified testing agency BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 23 21 13 HYDR ONIC PIPING D. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of ' earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. E. Conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9 and all applicable codes. F. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installers of Pressure Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure seal joint ' manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure seal pipe couplings and fittings. 2. Fiberglass Pipe and Fitting Installers: Installers of RTRF and RTRP shall be certified by the manufacturer of pipes and fittings as having been trained and qualified to join fiberglass piping ' with manufacturer recommended adhesive. B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS Dl.1/DI.1M, ' "Structural Welding Code-Steel." C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series,"Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. ' D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, 'Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,Division 01. 1.05 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement. 3. RTRP and RTRF with adhesive. 4. Pressure-seal fittings. B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, ' supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. ' C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. ' E. Field quality control test reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special duty ' valves to include in emergency,operation,and maintenance manuals. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING G. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site. ' 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene. , B. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin(fiberglass)fittings. C. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin(fiberglass)pipe. ' 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves,including fire hydrants,according to the following: ' 1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling. ' B. During Storage: Use precautions according to the following: 1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection;then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-point ' temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary. C. Deliver piping with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt,debris,and moisture. D. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural ' capacity of floor when storing inside. E. Protect flanges,fittings,and specialties from moisture and dirt. ' F. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.08 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature: 1. Makeup Water Piping:80-psig at 150°F. ' 2. Condensate Drain Piping: 150°F. PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Type M (C) in paragraph below is not included in Table 5, "Application of Pipe, Fittings, and , Valves for Heating and Air Conditioning," in the ASHRAE HANDBOOK - "HVAC Systems and Equipment." ' B. Annealed Temper Copper Tubing:ASTM B 88,Type L. C. DWV Copper Tubing:ASTM B 306,Type DWV. ' D. Wrought Copper Fittings:ASME B16.22. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 ' MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- 1 i SECTION 2121 13 HYDRONIC PIPING 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. Anvil International,Inc. b. S.P.Fittings;a division of Star Pipe Products. c. Victaulic Company of America. ' 2. Grooved End Copper Fittings:ASTM B 75,copper tube or ASTM B 584,bronze casting. 3. Grooved End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasket fitting. Ductile iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, EPDM gasket razed for ' minimum 230°F for use with housing,and steel bolts and nuts. E. Copper or Bronze Pressure Seal Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. NIBCO Inc. b. Stadler-Viega. 2. Housing: Copper. ' 3. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM. 4. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. 5. Minimum 200-psig working pressure rating at 250°F. F. Copper,Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on copper water tube. I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. T-DRILL Industries Inc. G. Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B 16.22. ' 2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as ' indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. B. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. ' C. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3,Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. D. Malleable Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. E. Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1,Classes 25, 125,and 250;raised ground face,and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. F. Wrought Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M,wall thickness to match adjoining pipe. ' G. Wrought Cast and Forged Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group,end connections,and facings: ' 1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. ' H. Grooved Mechanical Joint Fittings and Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING a. Anvil International,Inc. b. Central Sprinkler Company;a division of Tyco Fire&Building Products. c. National Fittings,Inc. d. S.P.Fittings;a division of Star Pipe Products. e. Victaulic Company of America. 2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 ' malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53K Type F, E, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved end couplings; with nuts,bolts,locking pin,locking toggle,or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. 3. Couplings: Ductile or malleable iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity ' pressure responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. 1. Steel Pressure Seal Fittings or Push-to-Connect Fittings: ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. Victaulic Company of America. , 2. Housing: Steel. 3. O-Rings and Pipe Stop: EPDM. 4. Tools: Manufacturer's special tool. 5. Minimum 300-psig working pressure rating at 230°F. ' J. Steel Pipe Nipple • ASTA 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed. 2.03 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441/17441K Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends as indicated in Part 3 ' "Piping Applications"Article. B. CPVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 pipe; ' ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80 pipe. C. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends as indicated in Part 3 'Piping Applications"Article. ' D. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe. 2.04 FIBERGLASS PIPE AND FITTINGS ' A. RTRP: ASTM D 2996,filament wound pipe with tapered bell and spigot ends for adhesive joints. B. RTRF: Compression or spray-up/contact molded of same material, pressure class, and joining ' method as pipe. C. Flanges: ASTM D 4024. Full-face gaskets suitable for the service,minimum 1/8-inch thick,60-70 ' durometer. ASTM A 307,Grade B,hex head bolts with washers. 2.05 JOINING MATERIALS , A. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of-piping system contents. ' 1. ASME B16.21,non-metallic,flat,asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW': JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- ' SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING a. Full Face Type: For flat face,Class.125,cast iron and cast bronze flanges. ' b. Narrow Face Type: For raised face,Class 250,cast iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1,carbon steel,unless otherwise indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system ' manufacturer,unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water flushable flux according to ' ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8,BCuP Series, copper phosphorus alloys for joining copper with ' copper;or BAg-1,silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/1310.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. SG. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. ' a. Use CPVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24). b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24). ' 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. a. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24). ' b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24). H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. ' 1. Use fiberglass adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24). 1. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working ' temperatures and pressures. 2.06 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. General Requirements: 1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. ' 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Fitting Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. ' C. Sleeve Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ' following or approved equal: a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b. Dresser,Inc.;Dresser Piping Specialties. c. Ford Meter Box Company,Inc.(The). ' d. JCM Industries. e. Romac Industries,Inc. f. Smith-Blair Inc;a Sen sus company. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING g. Viking Johnson;c/o Mueller Co. D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. ' b. IPEX Inc. c. KBi. 2. CPVC or PVC one piece fitting with one threaded brass or copper insert and one Schedule 80 solvent cement joint end. ' E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ' following: a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. b. IPEX Inc. c. KBi. , d. NIBCO INC. 2. MSS SP-107,CPVC or PVC union. Include brass or copper end, Schedule 80 solvent cement joint end,rubber gasket,and threaded union. 2.07 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS , A. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder joint,plain,or weld neck end connections that match piping system materials. ' B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid,pressure,and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: , a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International,Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.;a division of Watts Water Technologies,Inc. ' e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;AquaSpec Commercial Products Division. 2. Factory fabricated union assembly,for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180°F. D. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. ' c. Watts Regulator Co.;a division of Watts Water Technologies,Inc. 2. Factory fabricated companion flange assembly, for 150 or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. ' E. Dielectric Flange Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ' a. Advance Products&Systems,Inc. b. Calpico,Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. ' d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator,Inc. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -8- t 1 ' SECTION 2121 13 HYDRONIC PIPING 2. Companion flange assembly for field assembly.. Include flanges, full face or ring type t neoprene or phenolic gasket,phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves,phenolic washers,and steel backing washers. 3. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150 or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. F. Dielectric Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a. Calpico,Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation. 2. Galvanized steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining;threaded ends;and ' 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225°F. G. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ' following or approved equal: a. Perfection Corporation;a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. Precision Plumbing Products,Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company,Inc. d. Victaulic Company of America. 2. Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive,thermoplastic lining;plain,threaded,or grooved ends;and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225°F. ' PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Makeup water piping installed aboveground shall be the following: 1. Type L,drawn temper copper tubing,wrought copper fittings,and soldered or pressure seal or push-to-connect joints.Use the fewest possible joints. B. Makeup Water Piping NPS 3 and below,Installed belowground and within Slabs: ' 1. Type L,drawn temper copper tubing,wrought copper fittings,and soldered or pressure seal or push-to-connect joints.Use the fewest possible joints. C. Makeup Water Piping NPS 4 and larger, Installed Belowground and within Slabs: 1. Ductile Iron,cement lined in accordance with AWWA specification C104,ductile iron fittings and flange fittings. ' D. Condensate Drain Piping: 1. Type DWV,drawn temper copper tubing,wrought copper fittings,and soldered joints. 3.02 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION ' A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale,slag,dirt,and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -9- SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813,water flushable flux,unless otherwise indicated,to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead free ' solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's"Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"Chapter, using copper phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. ' F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 131.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. ' Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS 1310.12/D10.12M,using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance"Article. , H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ' ASME B31.9. I. Plastic Piping Solvent Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: , 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/132846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket ' fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other than schedule number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 4. PVC Non-Pressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. J. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings,apply adhesive,and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. K. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Roll grooves in ' ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved end fittings and rigid,grooved end pipe couplings. 1. Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's ' guidelines and recommendations. All grooved couplings, fittings,valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. The gasket style and elastomeric material(grade)shall be verified as , suitable for the intended service as specified. Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations,projections,and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. A factory trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved piping products. ' Factory trained representative shall periodically review the product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. L. Mechanically Formed, Copper Tube Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer recommended tool and ' procedure,and brazed joints. M. Pressure Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion marks ' on pipe after assembly. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL _ 10- ' SECTION 2121 13 HYDRONIC PIPING 1. Stainless.Steel, Pressure Sealed Joints: Pipe shall be square cut, +/- 0.030-inch, properly deburred and cleaned. Pipe ends shall be marked at the required location, using a manufacturer-supplied gauge, to ensure full insertion into the coupling or fitting during assembly. 2. Copper, Push-To-Connect Joints: Install in accordance with manufacturer's latest ' recommendations. Pipe ends shall be cleaned, free from indentations, projections, burrs, and foreign matter. Use a tube preparation tool as supplied by manufacturer to clean. Apply installation mark in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Push copper tube into ' fittings to installation depth mark, per manufacturer's installation instructions. Keep fittings free of dirt and oil;use only on potable water or oil free compressed air systems. 3.03 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations,unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls and structure. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically ' indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. ' E. Install piping to conserve building space,and not to interfere with use of space and other work. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. ' G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. ' 1. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. ' J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. ' L. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, when practical, and spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. M. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 gate or ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, between all isolation valves and at low points in piping system mains, base of vertical risers and at equipment or elsewhere required for system drainage. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers,connect the branch to the top ' ofthe main pipe. P. Install valves according to Section 23 05 23"General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." BARRY UNIVERSITY . BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 11 - SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING Q. Install unions in piping,NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R Install flanges in piping,NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as ' indicated. S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve,pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line ' pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blow down connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blow off connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. ' T. Install expansion loops,expansion joints,anchors,and pipe alignment guides. U. Where pipe support members are welded to building structure framing, scrape, brush clean and ' apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. V. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. t W. Prepare pipe,fittings,supports and accessories for finish painting. X. Identify piping as specified in Section 23 05 53"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." , 3.04 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment , connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. , C. Install ports for pressure gauges and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints,including welds,un-insulated and exposed for examination during test. ' 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical,isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer , screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. ' 5. Install safety valve,set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure,to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. 6. At completion,chemically treat system as required. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: ' 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing.Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. ' 2. While filling system,use vents installed at high points of system to release air. 3. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 4. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 5. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's ' working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve,or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 12- ' SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum' mum field strength or 1.7 times value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9,'Building Services Piping." 6. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10-minutes,examine piping,joints, and connections for leakage.Eliminate leaks by tightening,repairing,or replacing components and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 7. Prepare written report of testing. C. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely ' (automatic type),or bleed air completely(manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment,such as boilers,chillers,cooling towers,to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. ' END OF SECTION 23 21 13 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 13- 1 SECTION 23 2133-HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Work of this Section includes the installation of hydronic specialties including,but not limited to, the following: a. Air Vents. ' b. Strainers. c. Flow Meters. ' d. Automatic Flow Control Valves. e. Air Control Fittings. f. Balancing Valves. g. Relief Valves. ' h. Pressure Regulating Valve. B. Related Sections: ' 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any supplementary and/or Special Conditions,and the following listed Sections. 2. 23 21 13"Hydronic Piping." ' 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. ' B. ANSI/ASME Sec 9-Welding and Brazing Qualifications. C. ANSI/ASME B 16.3-Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300. ' D. ANSI/ASME B 16.23 -Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings—DWV. E. ANSI/ASME B16.29 -Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings— DWV. F. ANSI/ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping. ' G. ANSI/ASTM D2466-Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings,Schedule 40. H. ANSFAWS A5.8-Brazing Filler Metal. ' I. ANSI/AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. ' J. ANSI/AWWA C105-Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids. K. ANSI/AWWA C110 - Ductile - Iron and Gray - Iron Fittings 3 inches through 48-inches, for Water and Other Liquids. ' L. ANSIIAWWA CI I I -Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. M. ANSI/AWWA C151 -Ductile-Iron Pipe,Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds,for ' Water or Other Liquids. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - 1 1 SECTION 23 2133 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES N. ANSI/AWWA C606—Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints. O. ASTM A53-Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated,Welded and Seamless. ' P. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. ' Q. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. R. ASTM A536—Ductile Iron Castings. ' S. ASTM B32-Solder Metal. ' T. ASTM B88-Seamless Copper Water Tube. U. ASTM D1785-Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe Schedules 40,80,and 120. ' V. ASTM D2235-Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene(ABS)Plastic Pipe and Fittings. W. ASTM D2241 -Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe(SDR-PR). ' X. ASTM D23 10-Machine-Made Reinforced Thermosetting P Resin Pipe. Y. ASTM D2466-Socket-Type PVC Plastic Type Fittings,Schedule 40. ' Z. ASTM D2467-Socket-Type PVC Plastic Type Fittings,Schedule 80. ' AA.ASTM D2680-Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene(ABS)Composite-Sewer Piping. BB.ASTM D2683-Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene pipe ' and Tubing. CC.ASTM D2751 -Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene(ABS)Sewer Pipe and Fittings. DD.ASTM D2855-Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with PVC Pipe and Fittings. EE. STM F477-Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets)for Joining Plastic Pipe. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Section 8D for manufacture of tanks. t 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified,provide components by same manufacturer throughout. ' 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 01. ' B. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- 1 a SECTION 212111 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES C. Include component sizes rough-in requirements, service sizes and finishes. Po , gh q Include product ' description,model,and dimensions. D. Submit inspection certificates for pressure vessels from authority having jurisdiction. ' E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ' A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 01. B. Include installation instruction,assembly views,lubrication instructions,and replacement parts list. 1 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver products to site and store and protect under provisions of Division 01. PART2-PRODUCTS i2.01 AIR VENTS A. Manual Type: Short sections of 3/4-inches diameter pipe with ball valve,hose nipple,and cap. Locate at tops of risers and or piping. B. Float Type: Cast iron body, copper float, stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system ' operating temperature and pressure;with isolating valve. 2.02 STRAINERS A. Size 2-inches and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 125-psig,working pressure,Y pattern with 1/32-inch stainless steel perforated screen. ' B. Size 2%-inches and Larger: Flanged iron body for 125-psig, working pressure,Y pattern with 3/64- inch stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 2-inches through 18-inches: Grooved, Y-pattern ductile iron body, rated for 300-0sig working pressure,type 304 stainless steel metal removable basket with 0.062-inch diameter perforations,blow down port fitted with pipe plug. Victaulic Style 732 and W732. D. Size 2-inches through 24-inches: Grooved, T-Pattern ductile iron or carbon steel body; rated up to ' 750-psig working pressure, type 304 stainless steel frame and mesh removable basket with 12 mesh sizes, removable coupling and end cap or T-bolt hinged closure/cap for strainer maintenance. Victaulic Series 730 and W730. E. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows: 1. Bell&Gossett 2. Hammond Valve Corporation 3. Keckley Company 4. Victaulic 2.03 VENTURI FLOW METERS tA. Venturi element flow stations with meter set. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 23 2133 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 1. Measuring Station: Steel insert type, rated to 275-psig at 400°F, with safety shutoff valves and quick coupling connections, and permanent metal tag indicating design flow rate, reading for ' design flow rate,metered fluid,line size,station or location number. Accuracy of flow measuring elements shall be plus or minus 0.55 to minus 2.30%. 2. Portable Meter Set: Dry Single Diaphragm type pressure gage with 6-inches dial pointer,stainless steel wetted metal parts,variable pulsation damper,equalizing valve,two bleed valves,and master ' chart for direct conversion of meter readings to flow rate,mounted in rustproof carrying case with two ten foot long rubber test hoses with brass valves or quick connections for measuring stations. B. Acceptable Manufacturers are as follows: ' 1. Armstrong. 2. Badger Meter Inc. 3. Bailey Fischer&Porter Co. 4. Flow Design. 1 5. Victaulic Company. 2.04 BALANCING VALVES ' A. 3-inches and Under: 125 lb.brass body,brass trim,integral orifice/balancing type,calibrated for water flow,high and low pressure measuring taps,positive shut off,memory stop. B. Provide portable flow meter similar to Bell and Gossett Type RO-2 compatible with balancing valves. Meter may be used for balancing waters stems. On completion of work,meter shall be handed to the Y g Y P � project Superintendent for delivery to Owner. C. 2-inches and Under: Y-pattern, globe type balancing valve with Ametal brass copper alloy body providing dielectric protection with soldered or threaded ends, EPDM o-ring seals, 4-turn digital readout handwheel for balancing and concealed memory feature with locking, tamper proof setting, ' built in check valve for connecting a portable differential pressure meter for flow reading, 300-psig maximum pressure rating at 250°F. Victaulic/Tour&Andersson Series 78K,786 or 787. 1. Install a Series 78U union port fitting and Series 78Y strainer/ball valve combination to complete terminal hookup at coil outlet. D. 2-1/2-inches and Over: Y-pattern, globe type balancing valve, ductile iron body with flanged or grooved ends, EPDM O-ring seals, multiple turn digital readout handwheel for balancing and ' concealed memory feature with locking, tamper proof setting, built-in check valve for connecting a portable differential pressure meter for flow reading,rated up to 350-psig at 250°F. Victaulic/Tour& Andersson Series 788 or 789. E. Acceptable Manufacturers are as follows: 1. Victaulic/Tour&Andersson. 2. Or Approved Equal. 2.05 AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES A. Automatic flow control valve cartridges shall automatically control flow rates with±5%accuracy over ' an operating pressure differential range of at least fourteen (14) times the minimum required for control. Four(4)operating pressure ranges shall be available with the minimum range requiring less than 3 PSID to actuate the mechanism. B. Valve internal control mechanism shall consist of a stainless steel one-piece cartridge with segmented ' port design and full travel linear coil spring. C. Manufacturer shall be able to provide certified independent laboratory tests verifying accuracy of ' performance.(Consult the factory for details.) BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 212111 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES D. All flow control valve cartridges shall be warranted by the manufacturer for five years from date of t sale. E. 1/2-inches through 1-1/2-inches: ASTM brass alloy body, rated at no less than 400-psi/250°F, one- piece body to include a handle ball valve, a flow control cartridge assembly, dual pressure or ' pressure/temperature test valves for verifying accuracy of flow performance combined with a manual air vent, and a union end which will accept various end pieces, removable 20 mesh stainless steel strainer.Flow rates shall be from 0.25 GPM to 160.0 GPM. ' F. 1-1/2-inches through 3-inches: CAST brass alloy body,rated at no less than 275-psi/250°F,one-piece body to include a handle ball valve, a flow control cartridge assembly, dual pressure or pressure/temperature test valves for verifying accuracy of flow performance combined with a manual air vent, and a union end which will accept various end pieces, removable 20-mesh stainless steel ' strainer. Flow rates shall be from 0.25 GPM to 160.0 GPM. G. The body design shall allow inspection or removal of cartridge or strainer without disturbing piping connections. ' H. The body design shall allow inspection or repair of handle operated stem without disturbing piping connections. The repairable stem shall include two (2) Teflon seals and one EPDM o-ring for protection against chemicals and modulating temperature. 1. The valve shall come fully assembled and be permanently marked to show direction of flow;shall have a body tag to indicate flow rate and model number. J. 3-inches through 24-inches: Class 150 Wafer valves shall consist of a gray iron (ASTM A126-61T, Class 30) body and stainless steel flow control cartridge assemblies; shall be rated at 200-psi/250°F; shall be mechanically compatible with ANSI B16.5-1968 150 lb. steel flanges;valve shall be supplied with dual pressure or pressure/temperature test valves for verifying accuracy of flow performance; ' shall be permanently marked to show direction of flow,shall have body tag to indicate model number and flow rate; shall have single or multiple, parallel installed stainless steel cartridge assemblies to provide rated flow rate; shall include all plated steel studs required for installation; flow rates from 14.0 GPM to 11,000.0 GPM. K. Grooved End Valves shall consist of steel pipe,schedule 40 or greater,and stainless steel flow control cartridge assembly(assembled with grooved end clamp on 1-inches to 3-inches sizes;shall be rated at 400-psi/200°F; shall be supplied with dual pressure or pressure/temperature test valves for verifying ' accuracy of flow performance for all sizes;shall have grooved ends compatible with Victaulic grooved end clamps; shall be permanently marked to show direction of flow, shall have body tag to indicate model number and flow rate; shall be available in 1-1/4-inches through 20-inches sizes with flow rates from 3.0 GPM to 6,800.0 GPM. L. Class 150 Flange End Valves shall consist of steel pipe with flange ends, and stainless steel flow control cartridge assembly; 230-psig/300°F shall be supplied with dual pressure or pressure/ temperature test valves for verifying accuracy of flow performance for all sizes;shall have flange ends ' compatible with ANSI B 16.5-1968 150 lb. Steel flanges; shall be permanently marked to show direction of flow, shall have body tag to indicate model number and flow rate; shall be available in 2- inches through 20-inches sizes with flow rates from 14.0 GPM to 6,800.0 GPM. M. Identification tags shall be available for all valves;tags shall be indelibly marked with flow rate,model number,zone identification:tags shall be 3-inches x 3-inches aluminum. N. Pressure/temperature test valves or pressure only test valves shall be available at 1/4-inches NPT for measuring pressure or temperature in fluid systems. O. Acceptable Manufacturers are as follows: 1. Griswold. 2. Flow Design. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 23 2133 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 2.06 AIR CONTROL FITTINGS A. Furnish the following minimum air control fittings and additional components as required by ' manufacturer for control of air to water ratio in compression tank and remove air released through air separator. 1. High capacity air vent. ' 2. Air vent tank fitting. 3. Pressure gauges. B. Acceptable Manufacturers are as follows: ' 1. Amtrol. 2. Armstrong. 3. Bell&Gossett. ' 4. Taco. 2.07 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES A. 2-inches and Under: Spring loaded diaphragm operated with adjustable setting,bronze body and trim, , single seat for dead end service,25-psig,initial setting in center of range. B. Acceptable Manufacturers are as follows: ' 1. Conbraco Industries. 2. Watts Industries. 3. Zurn Plumbing Products. 2.08 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze or cast iron body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure ' actuated,capacities ASME certified and labeled. B. Acceptable Manufacturers are as follows: ' 1. Bell&Gossett. 2. Conbraco Industries. 3. Watts Industries. 4. Zurn Plumbing Products. , PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance. t B. Where large air quantities can accumulate,provide enlarged air collection standpipes. C. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated. ' D. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection. E. . Provide gate or ball valves on inlet to all terminal units. F. Provide ball or plug valves for balancing on outlet of all terminal units. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 0707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 212111 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES G. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers, and ' expansion tanks. H. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment. I. Pipe relief valve outlets to nearest floor drain. ' END OF SECTION 23 2133 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- I 1 SECTION 23 23 00-REFRIGERANT PIPING PART1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Work of this Section includes the installation of complete and operable systems of refrigerant piping including,but not limited to: a. Pipe and pipe fittings. b. Valves. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special conditions,and the following listed Sections. 2. Division 07 Sections"Firestopping." 3. 23 05 00"Common Work Results for HVAC." 4. 23 05 53"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" ' 5. 23 25 00"Piping Insulation." 1.02 REFERENCES ' A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15—Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. B. ANSI/ASHRAE 34—Number Designation of Refrigerants. ' C. ANSI/ASME B 16.22—Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. D. ANSI/ASME B 16.26—Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. ' E. ANSI/ASME B31.5—Refrigeration Piping. F. ANSI/ASTM B32—Solder Metal. G. ANSI/AWS A5.8-Brazing Filler Metal. ' H. ASTM B280—Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. I. MIL-V-23450C—Valves,Expansion,Thermostatic,Refrigerant 12 and Refrigerant 22. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: 1Section IX,"Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. Comply with ASHRAE 15,"Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems." ' C. Comply with ASME B31.5,"Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components." ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - 1 SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop,based on manufacturer's test data,for the following: 1. Thermostatic expansion valves. ' 2. Solenoid valves. 3. Hot gas bypass valves. 4. Filter dryers. 5. Strainers. ' 6. Pressure regulating valves. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe,tube, and fitting ' sizes, flow capacities,valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps,double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. 1. Shop Drawing Scale: '/a-inch equals 1-foot. ' 2. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor ' and evaporator,and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment. C. Welding certiflcates. , D. Field quality control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in ' maintenance manuals. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-134a: 1. Suction Lines for Air Conditioning Applications: 115-psig. 2. Suction Lines for Heat Pump Applications: 225-psig. ' 3. Hot Gas and Liquid Lines: 225-psig. B. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-407C: 1. Suction Lines for Air Conditioning Applications: 230-psig. 2. Suction Lines for Heat Pump Applications: 380-psig. 3. Hot Gas and Liquid Lines: 380=psig. C. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-41 OA: , 1. Suction Lines for Air Conditioning Applications: 300-psig. 2. Suction Lines for Heat Pump Applications: 535-psig. 3. Hot Gas and Liquid Lines: 535-psig. ' 1.06 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and , exterior are clean when installed. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports,and roof penetrations. These items. are specified in Division 07. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280,Type ACR B. Wrought Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.22. C. Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B 16.22. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. F. Flexible Connectors: 1. Body:Tin-bronze bellows with woven,flexible,tinned bronze wire reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inches long ' assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500-psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250°F. 2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; Type, Grade, and wall thickness as selected in Part 3 piping applications articles. B. Wrought Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234K for welded joints. ' C. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, steel, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets, bevel- welded end connection,and raised face. D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D 10.1 2/D 10.12M for welding materials appropriate for ' wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. E. Flanged Unions: ' 1. Body: Forged steel flanges for NPS 1 to NPS 1-1/2 and ductile iron for NPS 2 to NPS 3. Apply rust-resistant finish at factory. 2. Gasket: Fiber asbestos free. 3. Fasteners: Four plated steel bolts, with silicon bronze nuts. Apply rust resistant finish at factory. 4. End Connections: Brass tailpiece adapters for solder end connections to copper tubing. 5. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inches long assembly. ' 6. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 400-psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 330°F. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING F. Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless steel bellows with woven, flexible, stainless-steel-wire-reinforced protective ' jacket 2. End Connections: a. NPS 2 and Smaller: With threaded end connections. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: With flanged end connections. ' 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inches long assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500-psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250°F. 2.03 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight through or angle pattern. 2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless steel spring. ' 3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel. 4. Seat: Nylon. 5. End Connections: Socket,union,or flanged. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500-psig. , 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275°F. B. Packed Angle Valves: , 1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Packing: Molded stem,back seating,and replaceable under pressure. 3. Operator: Rising stem. 4. Seat: Nonrotating,self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene. ' 5. Seal Cap: Forged brass or valox hex cap. 6. End Connections: Socket,union threaded or flanged. � 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500-psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275°F. ' C. Check Valves: 1. Body: Ductile iron,forged brass,or cast bronze;globe pattern. 2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron,forged brass,or cast bronze;or brass hex plug. 3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat. 4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel. 5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap,plated steel stem,and graphite seal. ' 6. End Connections: Socket,union,threaded,or flanged. 7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50-psig. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500-psig.. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275°F. , D. Service Valves: 1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. ' 2. Core: Removable ball type check valve with stainless steel spring. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Copper spring. 5. Working Pressure Raring: 500-psig. E. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code;listed and labeled by an NRTL. , 1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel,with neoprene O-ring seal. 2. Piston,Closing Spring,and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- r SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING r 3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene. ' 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 400-psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240°F. ' F. Straight Type Strainers: 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion resistant coating. 2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Socket or flare. 4. Working Pressure Rating: 500-psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275°F. G. Angle Type Strainers: 1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze. 2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug. 3. Screen: 100-mesh monel. 4. End Connections: Socket or flare. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500-psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275°F. H. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 1. Body: Forged brass. 2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter screen. 3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm. 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. 5. End Connections: Socket or flare. ' 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500-psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240°F. I. Replaceable Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. ' 1. Body and Cover: Painted steel shell with ductile iron cover,stainless steel screws,and neoprene gaskets. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron,pleated with integral end rings;stainless steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal. 4. Designed for reverse flow(for heat-pump applications). 5. End Connections: Socket. 6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2-psig. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500-psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240°F. J. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. Body and Cover: Painted steel shell. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron,pleated with integral end rings;stainless steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal. 4. Designed for reverse flow(for heat pump applications). 5. End Connections: Socket. ' 6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 7: Maximum Pressure Loss: 2-psig. ' 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500-psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240°F. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- r 1 SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING r K. Mufflers: 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion resistant coating. ' 2. End Connections: Socket or flare. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 500-psig. 4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275°F. L. Receivers: Comply with ARI 495: ' 1. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code;listed and labeled by an NRTL. 2. Comply with UL 207;listed and labeled by an NRTL. 3. Body: Welded steel with corrosion resistant coating. 4. Tappings: Inlet,outlet,liquid level indicator,and safety relief valve. 5. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500-psig. ' 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275°F. M. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495. 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion resistant coating. 2. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 500-psig. 4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275°F. ' 2.04 REFRIGERANTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: 1. Atofina Chemicals,Inc. 2. DuPont Company;Fluorochemicals Div. ' 3. Honeywell,Inc.;Genetron Refrigerants. 4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC. B. ASHRAE 34,R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane. ' C. ASHRAE 34,R-407C: Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane. D. ASHRAE 34,R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane. ' PART 3-EXECUTION r 3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-134a A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR,annealed temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered joints. ' B. Suction Lines NPS 2 and Larger for Conventional Air Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ' ACR,drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered joints. C. Hot Gas and Liquid Lines,and Suction Lines for Heat Pump Applications: Copper, Type ACR, ' drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered joints. D. Safety Relief Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type L, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered joints. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- 1 SECTION 212100 REFRIGERANT PIPING 3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-407C A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR,annealed temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered joints. ' B. Suction Lines NPS 2 and Larger for Conventional Air Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR,drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered joints. C. Hot Gas and Liquid Lines,and Suction Lines for Heat Pump Applications: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered joints. D. Safety Relief Valve Discharge Piping: Schedule 40, black steel and wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. E. Safety Relief Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type L, drawn temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints. 3.03 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-41 OA ' A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR,annealed temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered joints. B. Suction Lines NPS 2 and Larger for Conventional Air Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ' ACR,drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered joints. C. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines,and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: ' 1. NPS 5/8 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, annealed or drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered joints. 2. NPS 3/4 to NPS 1 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, annealed or drawn temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints. ' 3. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Copper,Type ACR,drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with 95-5 tin-antimony soldered joints. 4. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 2: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with Alloy HB soldered joints. D. Safety Relief Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type L, annealed or drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with soldered joints. 3.04 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS A. Install valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor. B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot gas bypass valves and strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers. C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection. D. Except as otherwise indicated,install valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers. E. Install a full sized,three valve bypass around filter dryers. F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators. 1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction line pressure at bulb location. H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety relief valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15. 1. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube. J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for device being protected: 1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Hot gas bypass valves. 4. Compressor. K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve. L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump down charge. M. Install flexible connectors at compressors. , 3.05 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping ' systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings. ' B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right ' angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. ' F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. J. Refer to Division 23 for control wiring,and sequence of operation. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -8- 1 � SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING K. Install piping as short and direct as possible,with a minimum number of joints,elbows,and fittings. L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Division 08 if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces. M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground. N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. I 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. P. When brazing or soldering,remove solenoid valve coils and sight glasses;also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion valve bulb. Q. Before installation of steel refrigerant piping,clean pipe and fittings using the following procedures: 1. Shot blast the interior of piping. 2. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through tubing by means of a wire or electrician's tape. ' 3. Draw a clean,lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe. Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt. 4. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint. 5. Finally,draw a clean,dry,lintless cloth through the tube or pipe. 6. Safety-relief-valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required to be open to allow unrestricted flow. R. Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies. S. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section"Firestopping." T. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. U. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full thickness insulation. V. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls. W. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.06 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale,slag,dirt,and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -9- SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide),during brazing or welding, to prevent scale formation. , D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's"Copper Tube Handbook." E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's"Brazing Handbook,"Chapter"Pipe and Tube." , 1. Use Type BcuP,copper phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. 2. Use Type BAg,cadmium free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. F. Threaded Joints: Thread steel pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut ' threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry-seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Steel pipe can be threaded,but threaded joints must be seal brazed or seal welded. t H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS 1310.12/1310.12M. I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size,type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: ' 1. Comply with ASME B31.5,Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. 3. Test high and low pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part I "Performance Requirements"Article. a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gauge throughout duration of test. c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. ' 3.08 SYSTEM CHARGING A. Charge system using the following procedures: 1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500-micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12-hours,system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas,allowing pressure to build up to 2-psig. 4. Charge system with a new filter dryer core in charging line. 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL _ 10- SECTION 212100 REFRIGERANT PIPING B. Adjust high and low pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure. C. Adjust set-point temperature of air conditioning or chilled water controllers to the system design temperature. D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. ' 5. Check open compressor motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings. E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established. END OF SECTION 23 23 00 i i 1 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL SECTION 23 24 20-VIBRATION ISOLATION PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work of this Section includes the installation of Vibration Isolation including, but not limited to, the following: a. Inertia bases. b. Vibration isolation. c. Equipment isolators. B. Related Work: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special Conditions,and the Following listed Sections. 2. 23 05 00"Common Work Results for HVAC." 3. 23 17 00"Motors." 4. 23 63 13"Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers." 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE-Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load condition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, and manufacturer's installation instructions product data under provision of Division 01. B. Indicate inertia bases on shop drawings. C. Indicate vibration isolator locations, with static and dynamic load on each, on shop drawings and described on product data. 1.05 CERTIFICATES A. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Division 01 that isolators are properly installed and properly adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows: I. California Dynamics Corporation. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries,Inc. 4. Vibration Eliminator Co. 5. Vibration Mountings&Controls,Inc. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - I - SECTION.23 24 20 VIBRATION ISOLATION 2.02 INERTIA BASES A. Type A: Integral structural steel fan and motor base with motor slide rails. B. Type B: Slung structural steel base with gussett brackets. C. Type C: Reinforced 3,000-psi concrete base set in full depth perimeter structural steel channel fume, ' with gussett brackets and anchor bolts. D. Type D: Reinforced 3,000-psi,6-inches high,concrete base without channel frame. ' 2.03 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Type 1: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. B. Type 2: Open spring mount with stiff springs(horizontal stiffness equal to vertical stiffness). C. Type 3: Open spring mount with stiff springs,heavy mounting frame,and limit stop. , D. Type 4: Closed spring mount with stiff springs and limit stop. E. Type 5: Closed spring hanger acoustic washer. i F. Type 6: Closed spring hanger with 1-inch thick acoustic isolator. G. Type 7: Elastomer mount with threaded insert and hold down holes. H. Type 8: Neoprene jacketed pre-compressed molded glass fiber. 1. Type 9: Rubber waffle pads, 30 durometer, minimum '/z-inch thick, maximum loading 40-psi. Use neoprene in oily or exterior locations. J. Type 10: %i-inch thick rubber waffle pads bonded each side of thick steel plate. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Provide pairs of neoprene side snubbers or restraining springs where side torque or thrust may develop. B. Color code spring mounts. ' C. Select springs to operate at 2/3 maximum compression strain,with''/4-inch ribbed P neoprene ads. P PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION ' A. Examine the Contract Drawings and Specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under this Section. Provide supplementary parts necessary to complete work, though not ' specifically indicated or specified herein. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 23 24 20 VIBRATION ISOLATION B. Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and scheduling ' of the work of this Section with the work of related trades so as not to delay job progress. 3.03 INSTALLATION ' A. General Requirements: 1. Provide vibration isolation for all rotating equipment. 2. Provide rubber-in-shear isolation where spring isolators or inertia bases are not indicated on ' drawings. 3. Provide accurate templates showing openings for anchor bolts,drains,and other required openings and detailed installation instructions for equipment and motor bases and supports. 4. Align equipment level throughout. Provide shims to facilitate pipe connections and leveling. 5. Position the isolation units in accordance with the load distribution. Locate isolation mounts so that the load,including the drive,is supported over or between the mounts with no overhang. 6. Construct suspended or wall hung isolators, supports, and accessories including hangers, cradles, and wall brackets to sustain a load of at least five(5)times the actual operating load. 7. Provide factory applied protection for mounting systems exposed to weather. Metal parts of mountings (except springs and hardware) shall be hot dip galvanized. Cadmium plate and neoprene coat springs. Cadmium plate nuts and bolts. ' 8. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation. 9. Anchor and attach units to structure and equipment,as indicated and required,for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces. 10. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as 1 required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly. 11. Install inertia base frames on isolator units as indicated, so that minimum of 2-inches clearance below base will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed and loaded for operation. 12. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible. 13. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading and operations. 14. Bond flanges of flexible duct connectors to ducts and housings to provide airtight connections. ' Seal seams and penetrations to prevent air leakage. B. Concrete Housekeeping Pads: Erect floor mounted equipment including casings, plenums, and equipment installed on vibration isolators, on 4-inches thick concrete housekeeping pads. Mount ' isolators on top of housekeeping pads. Refer to drawings for pad locations. C. Rubber Isolators-General: ' 1. Where specified,support floor mounted equipment on rubber or neoprene isolators. 2. Bolt equipment directly to isolators. Rest isolators directly on pad or floor and bolt in place. D. Spring Isolators-General: 1. Provide isolators consisting of steel compression springs with steel or cast iron top and bottom plates and built-in leveling bolts. Mount on Type PR-30 Isolation Pads. 2. Design, install, and align isolators so there are no restraints, binding, or distortion of any kind. Achieve horizontal stability in the isolator by the configuration and relationship of diameter to ' operating height of the springs in each isolation unit. Where restraints are required because of extreme side thrusts or because of forces on startup, arrange them to provide no resistance to vertical movement or to be effective only upon startup. Maximum permitted lateral motion is ''/a- inch. 3. Minimum spring run out beyond operating point shall be 25 percent of static deflection of V/2- inches,whichever is greater. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,n -3- I SECTION 23 24 20 VIBRATION ISOLATION 4. Construct and install units to be visible and accessible for inspection,adjustment,and replacement of the spring element without disturbing the equipment or the base. ' 5. Provide spring isolators on piping connected to isolated equipment as follows: Up to 4-inches diameter, first three (3) points of support; 5-inches to 8-inches diameter, first four (4) points of support; 10-inches diameter and over,first six(6)points of support. Static deflection of first point shall be twice deflection of isolated equipment. ' 6. Provide spring isolators on all piping in Mechanical rooms. 7. Unless noted otherwise,provide spring isolators of Type 3 or spring hangers of Type 6 for support of motor driven equipment and/or piping. END OF SECTION 23 24 20 ' i BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 23 25 00-PIPING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Work of this Section includes the installation of a complete system of piping insulation including, but not limited to,the following: a. Piping insulation. b. Jackets and accessories. 2. The following piping shall be provided with insulation: a. Domestic hot and cold water line. b. Condensate drain lines. c. Chilled water supply and return lines. d. Condenser water supply and return lines. ' e. Refrigerant lines. B. Related Work: ' 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special Conditions. 2. 09 90 00"Painting and Finishing." 3. 23 05 53"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." ' 4. 23 21 13"Hydronic Piping." 5. 23 23 00"Refrigerant Piping." 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM C195-Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement. ' B. ANSI/ASTM C533-Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. C. ANSI/ASTM C547-Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. D. ANSI/ASTM C552-Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. E. ANSI/ASTM C578-Preformed,Block Type Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. F. ASTM B209-Aluminum and Aluminum-alloy Sheet and Plate. G. ASTM C449-Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. ' H. ASTM C610-Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. I. ASTM E84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ' J. NFPA 255-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ' K. UL 723-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with five (5) years minimum experience. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 23 25 00 PIPING INSULATION B. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84,NFPA 255, and UL 723. ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 01. ' B. Include product description,list of materials,and thickness for each service,and locations. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS , A. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows: 1. Armacell. 2. Certain-Teed. ' 3. Johns-Manville Corporation. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation. 6. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. ' 2.02 INSULATION A. Type A: Glass fiber insulation;ANSI/ASTM C547;'k'value of 0.23 at 75°F non-combustible. t B. Type B: Expanded polystyrene; ANSI/ASTM C578; rigid closed cell; maximum water vapor transmission rating of 0.1 perms;'k'value of 0.23 at 75°F. ' C. Type C: Hydrous calcium silicate; kNSI/ASTM C533; rigid white; asbestos free; 'k'value of 0.44 at 300°F. D. Type D:Cellular foam;flexible,plastic;'k'value of 0.28 at 75°F. ' 2.03 JACKETS A. Concealed Interior Applications:•Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with self- sealing adhesive joints. Jackets and sealants must meet flame spread and smoke requirements. B. Exterior Applications:Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209;0.020-inches thick;smooth finish. ' C. Exposed Interior Applications:PVC Jackets with self-sealing joints in ASHRAE recommended ' standard colors. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation Bands: 3/4-inch wide;0.007-inch thick aluminum. ' B. Metal jacket Bands: 3/8-inch wide;0.015-inch thick aluminum. C. Insulating Cement: ANSI/ASTM C195;Hydraulic Setting mineral wool. t D. Finishing Cement: ASTM C449. ' E. Fibrous Glass Cloth: Untreated;9 oz/sq.yd.weight. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- t SECTION 212100 PIPING INSULATION F. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install materials atter piping has been tested and approved. Insure surface is clean and dry prior to installation.Insure insulation is dry before and during installation.Insure piping will not exceed 212°F ' during installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION ' A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through exterior penetrations. Pack around pipes with fireproof, self-supporting insulation,fully sealed through fire rated walls and between floors. C. In exposed piping,locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. ' D. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections,and expansion joints. E. On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids 140°F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment,but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations. F. Provide an insert, not less than 6-inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping,but under the finish jacket,on piping 2-inches diameter or larger,to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used. G. Neatly finish insulation at supports,protrusions,and interruptions. H. Jackets: ' 1. Indoor,Concealed Applications:Insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature shall have standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass cloth and adhesive. 2. Indoor,Concealed Applications:Insulated dual temperature pipes of pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature shall have vapor barrier jackets, factory applied.Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe,and finish with glass ' cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. 3. Indoor, Exposed Applications: For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces,insulate as for concealed applications.Finish with canvas jacket;size for finish painting. 4. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jackets. Cover with aluminum jacket withseams ' located on bottom side of horizontal piping. Insulate fittings,joints,and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe,and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANII SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 23 25 00 PIPING INSULATION 3.03 INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE SCHEDULE-INSULATION THICKNESS BASIS OF DESIGN PIPING SYMBOL PIPE SIZES INSULATION INSULATION REMARKS SERVICE THICKNESS TYPE , Coil Condensate D,PC All Sizes 1/211 A,B OR D Jacketed if outdoors for type Drain A and B 2"And Below 1" A All piping shall be jacketed, Domestic Cold Water CW exposed piping shall PVC 2'/z"And Over 2" A jacketed(dark green) ' Non-Potable Cold All piping shall be jacketed; Water NPCW All Sizes 2" A exposed piping shall PVC jacketed(light green) , Hot Gas, Exterior piping shall be Refrigerant Piping .Liquid All Sizes 1/2" D aluminum jacketed Line Expansion Tanks, Pump Heads,Air XT AS Match adjacent Pump head and balancing Separator and flow control. CHWii, Balancing And CV BV, Not Applicable insulation thickness or A Valve insulation shall be Flow Control ' „ removable for component Valves,Strainers, ACV 1/Z (min.) access. And Appurtenances NOTES: ' a. COLOR FOR PVC JACKETING IS BASED ON JOHNS MANVILLE ZESTON 2000 SERIES PVC JACKETING (CEEL-CO)SAMPLE RING. END OF SECTION 23 25 00 r BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- t ' SECTION 23 63 13-AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work of this section includes the installation of two(2)air-cooled condenser units,but not limited to the following: a. Pipe connections b. ElectricalP ower and control connections. c. Equipment bases and/or supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of ' Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special conditions,and the following listed Sections. 2. 23 17 00"Motors." 3. 23 21 13"Hydronic Piping." 4. 23 23 00"Refrigerant Piping." 5. 23 24 20"Vibration Isolation." 1.02 DEFINITIONS ' A. BAS:Building Automation System. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. ' B. Product Data: For each air-cooled refrigerant condenser. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. Include equipment dimensions, weights and structural loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. tC. Shop Drawings: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers. Include plans,elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,weights,loads,required clearances,method of field assembly,components,and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power,signal,and control wiring. ' D. Delegated Design Submittal: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to ' structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. ' E. Field quality control reports. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 23 63 13 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS , A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers to include in emergency, operation,and maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a ' qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." ' C A HRAEAESNA 90.1 Compliance:ance. Applicab1a requirements in ASHRAE/ESNA 90.1, Section 6 - Heating,Ventilating,and Air-Conditioning. 1.06 COORDINATION ' A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs,equipment supports,and roof penetrations. C. Coordinate location of refrigerant piping and electrical rough-ins. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following or ' approved equal: 1. APC 2. Liebert Corporation 3. Or Approved Equal ' 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of casing, mounting legs, condenser coils, condenser fans and motors,and unit controls suitable for outdoor use. B. Refrigerant: R-41 OA. C. Condenser Coil: Micro-channel coils shall be constructed of aluminum micro-channel tubes, fins and ' manifolds. Tubes shall be flat and contain multiple, parallel flow micro-channels and span between aluminum headers.Full-depth louvered aluminum fins shall fill spaces between the tubes. Tubes, fins ' and aluminum headers shall be oven-brazed to form a complete refrigerant-to-air heat exchanger coil. Copper stub pipes shall be electric resistance welded to aluminum coils and joints protected with polyolefin to seal joints from corrosive environmental elements. Hot gas and liquid lines shall be , copper and brazed using nitrogen gas flow to the stub pipes with spun closed ends for customer piping connections and include a factory-installed Schrader valve. 1. Factory tested at 300 psig. 2. Tube:Aluminum micro-channel. ' 3. Coil Fins:Full-depth fin collars,aluminum micro-channel. 4. Circuits:Single. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- 1 ' SECTION 2161 13 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 5. Coating: Flexible epoxy coating to all coil surface areas without material bridging between fins. ' Coating shall increase coil corrosion protection and shall reduce heat rejection capacity degradation to less than 10% after a severe 2000 hour 5% neutral salt spray test(ASTM B117). The coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation,and the color shall be black. t D. Hot Gas and Liquid Lines: The hot-gas and liquid lines shall be spun shut and shall include a factory installed Schrader valve. E. Inlet Coil Connector Tubes: Tubes shall pass through relieved holes in the tube sheet for maximum resistance to piping strain and vibration. F. Condenser Fans and Drives: Propeller fans with cast aluminum or glass reinforced polymer fan blades ' secured to corrosion protected steel hub, for vertical air discharge; direct driven with permanently lubricated ball bearing motors with integral current and thermal overload protection.Propeller fan shall have aluminum blades secured to corrosion protected steel hub.Fans shall be secured to the fan motor shaft by means of the keyed hub and dual setscrews. Fans shall be factory balanced and run before ' shipment. G. Operating and Safety Controls: Include condenser fan motor thermal and overload cutouts; 115-V ' control transformer, if required; magnetic contactors for condenser fan motors and a non-fused, locking type, factory mounted and wired disconnect switch for single external electrical power connection. H. The EC Fan control: 1. Electronic control board. 2. EC fan motor(s)with internal overload protection, ' 3. Refrigerant and ambient temperature thermistors. 4. Refrigerant pressure transducers. 5. The control board shall receive an indoor unit run signal via field supplied low voltage interlock wires to the compressor side switch,via field-supplied communication wires from the indoor unit's ' controller or via both. 6. The control board shall use sensor and communication inputs to maintain refrigerant pressure by controlling each EC fan on the same refrigerant circuit to the same speed. ' I. Casings: Bright aluminum sheet and divided into individual fan sections by full-width baffles. Structural support members, including coil support frame, motor and drive support, are galvanized steel for strength and corrosion resistance. Aluminum legs shall be provided to mount unit for vertical ' air discharge and have rigging holes for hoisting the unit into position. Unit shall be designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and controls,and with the following: 1. Removable panels for access to controls,condenser fans,motors,and drives. 2. Integral NEMA 3R weatherproof electrical panel section. ' 3. Fan guards shall be heavy gauge, close-meshed steel wire with corrosion resistant PVC finish. Lifting eyes. 4. Removable aluminum legs, 18-inches high. ' J. Coil Testing:Factory leak-tested at 300 psig,dehydrated,then filled and sealed with a nitrogen holding charge for shipment.Field relief of the Schrader valve shall indicate a leak-free system. ' 2.03 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 "Motors." 1. Enclosure Type:Totally enclosed,fan cooled. 2. Motor Sizes:Minimum size as indicated.If not indicated, large enough so operating load will not require motor too operate in service factor range above 1.0. q P ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 23 63 13 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 3. Mount unit mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit. 4. Weather proof motors with rain shield and shaft slinger. ' 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate air-cooled refrigerant condensers according to ARI 460. ' B. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to ARI 270. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine substrates,areas,and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of air-cooled refrigerant condensers. B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections , before equipment installation. C. Examine walls,floors,and roofs for suitable conditions where air-cooled condensers will be installed. ' D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION ' A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. , B. Equipment Mounting: Install air-cooled condenser refrigerant condensers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s)using elastomeric pads, elastomeric mounts,or restrained spring isolators. Comply ' with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 23 "Vibration Isolation." C. Equipment Mounting: Install air-cooled condenser refrigerant condensers using elastomeric pads, elastomeric mounts, or restrained spring isolators. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation , devices specified in Section 23 24 20"Vibration Isolation." D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. ' E. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 23 "Hydronic Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties. ' B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Refrigerant Piping: Connect piping to unit with pressure relief, service valve, filter-dryer, and ' moisture indicator on each refrigerant circuit liquid line. Refrigerant piping and specialties are specified in Section 23 "Refrigerant Piping." BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 23 63 13 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 1 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer i Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect,test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in ' testing. B. Tests and Inspections: ' 1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. ' C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist. ' D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Verify proper airflow over coils ' F. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure. G. Air-cooled refrigerant condensers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. ' H. Prepare test and inspection reports. ' 3.05 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and ' perform the following: a. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing. b. Verify that access doors move freely and are weather tight. c. Clean units and inspect for construction debris. d. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight. e. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections. f. Verify that controls are connected and operational. 2. Lubricate bearings on fan motors. 3. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding. 4. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 5. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's startup ' checklist. 6. Measure and record airflow and air temperature rise over coils. 7. Verify proper operation of capacity control device. 8. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to ' structure. 9. After startup and performance test,lubricate bearings. ' 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,and maintain air-cooled refrigerant condensers. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 23 63 13 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 3.07 ACCEPTANCE TESTING ' A. Acceptance testing shall not start until start-up testing is completed. B. The acceptance tests shall be performed under the supervision of a factory trained representative of the ' manufacturer. Tests shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's procedures and requirements. Results shall be recorded on manufacturer's standard test report forms. The certified report shall be given to the construction manager with a copy to the Architect/Engineer, upon completion of tests. ' C. A complete check of all safety and control circuitry,sensors,and instrumentation shall be performed. D. Vibration readings and noise level readings shall be recorded,as required. ' E. Automatic restart after momentary power interruption shall be demonstrated. F. Individual unit diagnostics and monitoring functions shall be demonstrated and field verified via unit ' mounted gauges,meters,or sensors. G. Lead-lag operation,if applicable,shall be demonstrated in conjunction with BAS vendor. H. Remote BAS monitoring,alarm,and control points shall be verified correct and within normal ranges of deviation from field measured readings. ' 1. Equipment that does not meet the test requirements shall be retested at no additional cost to the Owner. J. The manufacturer's bid shall include the necessary labor and material costs to perform all tests as t specified. END OF SECTION 23 63 13 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 23 77 55—IN ROW COOLER(DX) PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. The furnishing and delivery of two (2) operable air-cooled computer room in-row conditioning ' units including,but not limited to,the following: a. Piping connections. b. Electrical power and control connections. c. Equipment bases and/or supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Work related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 1,any Supplementary and/or Special Conditions,and the following listed Sections. 2. 23 17 00"Motors." 1.02 REFERENCES ' A. ANSUNEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum) B. ANSI/NFPA 90A-Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems C. ASHRAE 52-Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter D. UL-Underwriters Laboratories. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A and applicable codes for the installation of computer room air conditioning units. ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data and manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with ' Division 01. B. Indicate water,drain,electrical,and other rough-in connections on shop drawings or product data. ' 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 01. B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide one(1)year parts and labor manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Division 01. ' B. Compressor: Provide five(5)year compressor warranty under provisions of Division 01. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL 1 1 SECTION 23 77 55 IN ROW COOLER(DX) 1 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The system shall be completely factory tested prior to shipment. Testing shall include, but not be 1 limited to: complete pressure and leak testing to ensure system integrity, "Hi-Pot"test, and controls calibration and settings. Each system shall ship with a completed test report to verify completion of , factory testing procedure. The system shall be NTRL listed,MCA,and electrical system shall be UL Listed to UL 1995. PART H-PRODUCTS 1 2.01 MANUFACTURERS , A. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows: 1. APC 2. Liebert Corporation 1 3. Or approved equal 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS 1 A. Provide packaged, air-cooled, factory assembled, pre-wired and pre-piped unit, consisting of cabinet, fans,DX coils,filters and controls. 2.03 CABINET CONSTRUCTION ' A. The exterior panels shall be 20-gauge steel and powder coated with paint to protect against corrosion. The double wall constructed side panels separate the 1/2-inch,2.0 lb/cft insulation from the airstream 1 and increase unit rigidity. B. The unit shall be mounted on casters for quick installation and provided with leveling feet. The 1 perforated inlet and outlet panels shall have 81%open area. C. The rear door shall utilize Kniirr rack style handle and hinges to mirror the appearance of neighboring server racks. 1 2.04 VARIABLE SPEED FANS A. The unit shall be equipped with two (2) plug fans with backward curved blades and Electronically , Commutated DC motors;commonly referred to as EC plug fans. Each fan has a dedicated motor,fault monitoring circuitry and speed controller which provides a level of redundancy. Both impellers shall be made of steel and balanced. 1 2.05 COMPRESSOR A. The compressor shall be scroll type with variable capacity operation from 20-100%,commonly known 1 as a Digital Scroll. The compressor solenoid valve shall unload the compressor to provide variable capacity operation.The compressor shall have a suction gas cooled motor,vibration isolators, internal thermal overloads, manual reset high pressure switch, rotolock service valves, low pressure and high , pressure transducer, crankcase heater, internal centrifugal oil pump and an operating speed of 3500 RPM at 60Hz. B. The compressor shall be located outside the airstream and shall be removable and serviceable from the ' rear of the unit. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 1 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- 1 ' SECTION 2177 55 IN ROW COOLER(DX) 2.06 EVAPORATOR COILS ' A. The direct expansion tilted slab coolingcoil shall have 7.25 ft2 face are four or five rows a, deep.It shall be constructed of copper tubes and hydrophilic coated aluminum fins. The hydrophilic coating shall significantly improve the speed of condensate drainage from the fins and shall provide superior water carryover resistance. B. Two(2)stainless steel condensate drain pans shall be provided. C. Single refrigeration circuit utilizing R410A shall include a liquid line filter drier, a refrigerant sight glass with moisture indicator, an adjustable externally equalized expansion valve and a liquid line solenoid valve. The indoor evaporator refrigerant piping shall be spun shut with a nitrogen holding charge.Field relief of the Schrader valve shall indicate a leak-free system. 2.07 FILTERS ' A. Media:Pleated 4-inches thick with an ASHRAE 52.2 MERV 8 rating. B. Rating:ASHRAE 52.1,30%disposable type 4-inches depth. ' C. Alarm: Filter clog alarm. 2.08 LIQUID LEAK DETECTORS ' A. One(1) solid state water sensor with no moving parts shall be provided internal to the unit. When the sensor detects the presence of moisture the alarm system is activated. ' 2.09 REHEAT COILS A. The low watt density, 304/304, stainless steel, finned tubular electric reheat coils shall be capable of ' maintaining room dry bulb conditions when the system is calling for dehumidification. B. The reheat section shall include UL recognized safety switches to protect the system from overheating. ' C. The reheat coils shall be controlled in one stage.The reheat elements shall be accessible from the front of the cabinet. ' 2.10 HUMIDIFIER A. Steam Generating Canister Type: It is complete with disposable cylinder,all supply and drain valves, steam distributor and electronic controls.The humidifier is designed to operate with water conductivity ' from 330-670 (601-1z) microS/cm. System shall automatically fill and drain as well as maintain the required water level based on conductivity. An air-gap within the humidifier assembly shall prevent backflow of the humidifier supply water. The humidifier canister shall be removable from the rear of the cabinet. 2.11 ELECTRICAL PANEL ' A. Control Cabinet: NEMA enclosure, UL listed, with piano hinged door, grounding lug, magnetic starters with overload relays,circuit breakers,and fusible control circuit transformer. B. Disconnect Switch: Non-automatic molded case circuit breaker with handle accessible with panel ' closed. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 23 77 55 IN ROW COOLER(DX) 2.12 ICOMTM MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL WITH LARGE GRAPHIC DISPLAY A. The iCOM unit control shall be factory set for Intelligent Control which uses"fuzzy logic and"expert , systems" methods. Proportional and Tunable PID shall also be user selectable options. Internal unit component control shall include the following: 1. System Auto Restart-The auto restart feature will automatically restart the system after a power ' failure.Time delay is programmable. 2. Sequential Load Activation-On initial startup or restart after power failure,each operational load is sequenced with a minimum of one second delay to minimize total inrush current. 3. Predictive Humidity Control - calculates the moisture content in the room and prevents ' unnecessary humidification and dehumidification cycles by responding to changes in dew point temperature. B. The iCOM control shall be compatible with all Liebert remote monitoring and control devices. ' Provide BMS interface. C. The iCOM control processor shall be microprocessor based with a 320 x 240 dot matrix graphic front ' monitor display and control keys for user inputs mounted in an ergonomic, aesthetically pleasing housing. The display & housing shall be viewable while the unit panels are open or closed. The controls shall be menu driven. The display shall be organized into three main sections: User Menus, Service Menus and Advanced Menus. The system shall display user menus for. active alarms, event ' log,graphic data,unit view/status overview(including the monitoring of room conditions,operational status in%of each function,date and time),total run hours,various sensors,display setup and service contacts. A password shall be required to make system changes within the service menus. Service , menus shall include: setpoints, standby settings (lead/lag), timers/sleep mode, alarm setup, sensor calibration, maintenance/wellness settings, options setup, system/network setup, auxiliary boards and diagnostics/service mode. A password shall be required to access the advanced menus which include the factory settings and password menus. , D. The User Menus Shall be Defined as Follows: 1. System View-Status Overview:"System View"shall display a summary of operation for the total number of operating units within a Unit-to-Unit(U2U)configuration. ' 2. Spare Parts List:Menu shall include a list of critical spare parts,their quantity and part numbers. 3. Unit Diary:Menu shall include a free field area within the unit memory where unit history may be stored for reference. ' 4. Active Alarms: Unit memory shall hold the two hundred(200)most recent alarms with time and date stamp for each alarm. 5. Event Log: Unit memory shall hold the four hundred (400) most recent events with ID number, time and date stamp for each event. ' 6. Graphic Data View: Eight graphic records shall be available: return air temperature, return air humidity,supply air temperature,outdoor temperature and four custom graphs. 7. Unit View - Status Overview: Simple or Graphical "Unit View" summary displays shall include temperature and humidity values,active functions(and percent of operation)and any alarms of the ' host unit. 8. Total Run Hours: Menu shall display accumulative component operating hours for major components including fan motor,humidifier and reheat. ' 9. Various Sensors:Menu shall allow setup and display of optional custom sensors.The control shall include four customer accessible analog inputs for sensors provided by others. The analog inputs shall accept a 4 to 20 mA signal.The user shall be able to change the input to 0 to 5VDC or 0 to IOVDC if desired. The gains for each analog input shall be programmable from the front display. ' The analog inputs shall be able to be monitored from the front display. 10. Display Setup: Customer shall pre-select the desired grouping of display languages at the time of the order from the following choices: Group 1: English,French,Italian,Spanish,German. ' Group 2: English,Russian,Greek. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 2177 55 IN ROW COOLER(DX) Group 3: English,Japanese,Chinese,Arabic. 11. Service Contacts:Menu shall allow display of local service contact name and phone number. ' E. The service menus shall be defined as follows: 1. Setpoints:Menu shall allow setpoints within the following ranges: ' a. Temperature Setpoint 50-85°F* b. Temperature Sensitivity+1-10°F c. Humidity Setpoint 20-80%RH* d. Humidity Sensitivity 1-30%RH ' e. High Temperature Alarm 35-90°F f. Low Temperature Alarm 35-90°F g. High Humidity Alarm 15-85%RH ' h. Low Humidity Alarm 15-85%RH *The microprocessor may be set within these ranges, however, the unit may not be able to control to extreme combinations of temperature and humidity. 2. Standby Settings/Lead-Lag:Menu shall allow planned rotation or emergency rotation of operating ' and standby units. 3. Timers/Sleep Mode:Menu shall allow various customer settings for turning on/off unit. 4. Alarm Setup: Menu shall allow customer settings for alarm notification (audible/local/remote). ' The following alarms shall be available: a. High Temperature b. Low Temperature c. High Humidity ' d. Low Humidity e. Main Fan Overload(Optional) f. Humidifier Problem g. High Head Pressure h. Change Filter i. Fan Failure j. Unit Off ' 5. Audible Alarm:The audible alarm shall annunciate any alarm that is enabled by the operator. 6. Common Alarm: A programmable common alarm shall be provided to interface user selected alarms with a remote alarm device. 7. Remote Monitoring: All alarms shall be communicated to the Liebert monitoring system with the ' following information: Date and time of occurrence, unit number and present temperature and humidity. 8. Sensor Calibration:Menu shall allow unit sensors to be calibrated with external sensors. 9. Maintenance/Wellness Settings: Menu shall allow reporting of potential component problems ' before they occur. 10. Options Setup:Menu shall provide operation settings for the installed components. 2.13 ACCESSORIES A. Provide with six(6)remote rack inlet temperature 2T sensors. ' B. Provide auto-restart programmable time-day. C. Reheat&humidification lockout. ' D. Locking disconnect switch. E. Smoke detector. ' F. Adjustable supply air baffle. BARRY UNIVERSITY _ B RUNS PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25 2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 23 77 55 IN ROW COOLER(DX) t G. Intellislot unity(Web,SNMP,ModBus,BACnet)communication card. H. Remote shut down terminal. ' I. Common alarm contact. J. (1)VNSA8. , 2.14 SCHEDULE A. See drawing for equipment schedule. END OF SECTION 23 77 55 1 t BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 23 99 10-TESTING AND APPROVAL PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Testing and jurisdictional approval of installed services. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01, any Supplementary and/or Special conditions,and the following listed Sections. ' 2. 23 05 00"Common Work Results for HVAC" 1.02 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' A. Submit record documents under provisions of Division 01. B. Accurately record actual locations of all underground and concealed piping systems. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping System testing shall be performed in accordance with jurisdictional requirements to ' demonstrate underground and concealed systems acceptability. 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence testing and approval to allow phasing of work and completion of systems to meet Master Project Schedule constraints. ' PART 2—PRODUCTS-Not Used. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION ' A. Provide instruments and devices required for testing and approval. Coordinate and provide for jurisdictional authority's requirements. ' 3.02 TEST PROCEDURE A. Cap all pressure piping and pressurize as directed by jurisdictional authority.Maintain pressure during test.Make necessary repairs until written approval is received. ' B. Provide testing of underground water services in accordance with jurisdictional requirements.Maintain test during backfill procedures.Make necessary repairs and retest upon completion of backfill prior to placement of concrete. END OF SECTION 23 99 10 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL PAGES Section 26 00 10: General Requirements for Electrical Work.............................................................................14 Section 26 00 15: Electrical Alteration Provisions................................................................................................3 Section 26 05 00: Common Work Results For Electrical Work............................................................................3 ' Section 26 05 10: Acceptance Testing...................................................................................................................3 Section 26 05 19: Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables............................................................7 Section 26 05 23: Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables.................................................................................8 ' Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.......................................................................4 Section 26 05 29: Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems...........................................................................5 Section 26 05 33: Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems..........................................................................11 Section 26 05 36: Cable Trays for Electrical Systems...........................................................................................6 ' Section 26 05 44: Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling...............................................3 Section 26 05 48: Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems............................................................6 Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems.........................................................................................8 Section 26 05 73: Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.................................................................6 ' Section 26 24 16: Panelboards...............................................................................................................................6 Section26 27 26: Wiring Devices.........................................................................................................................6 Section 26 28 16: Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers..................................................................................4 ' Section 26 43 13: Lightning&Surge Protection Unit...................................................................................... ..4 Section26 5100: Interior Lighting........................................................................................................................7 r BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25 2014 MIANNII SHORES,FL - 1 SECTION 26 00 10—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK ' PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Conditions, and Special Conditions and ' other information contained in the Project Manual shall be incorporated as part of all Sections of this Division of work. 2. Under this Contract and all sections herein, provide to the Owner, rooms with complete and operative electrical systems and the necessary connections to all electrically operated equipment as ' outlined herein and as guided by the Contract Drawings. 3. All labor and materials supplied under this Division shall be the highest quality as judged by the Architect/Engineer. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and,Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 DEFINITION OF TERMS IN THIS SECTION A. "Provide and Install": Arrange for and assume all costs for providing and installing on the job site, ' complete,operable systems as specified and/or indicated on the Drawings. B. "Provide": Used interchangeably with"Provide and Install". C. "Install': Utilize trade manpower and expertise to connect items provided by others. Connection includes receiving,rigging,and placement as required. D. "Work": Used to include all labor and materials required to satisfy the requirements of the Electrical Division of the Specifications and Drawings. E. "Contractor", "Electrical Contractor": Use in this Division refers to the Electrical Trade Contractor, ' who shall be responsible for all work under the Electrical Division of work. F. "Approved","Approved Equal": Acceptable for the use intended and in compliance with all applicable ' codes,regulations,and satisfies contractual obligations relative to function and quality as judged by the Architect/Engineer,Owner,and Engineer. G. "Responsible", "Responsibility": Assume all consequences or contingencies,monetary and otherwise, ' under this basic Contract,with no additional costs passed on to others by Contractor. H. "Neat Workmanlike Manner", "Properly Installed": Installed in accordance with all applicable codes ' and good recommended practice, such as would be instructed in a trade school. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to judge acceptability. 1. 'Power Wiring": All wiring carrying the operating current from an electrical power source to electric operated devices,operating at 100 volts or more. J. "Control Wiring": All wiring, other than power wiring, from electric operated equipment to control devices and between various control devices. Control wiring shall include wiring for monitoring and alarm systems. K. "Furnish": Electrical Contractor shall furnish on the job site for use by others. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 1.03 CODES,REGULATIONS,AND CONDITIONS GOVERNING WORK A. Bid price shall reflect the investigation of all conditions governing work, including the cost of all ' modifications to systems, should they be necessary, to meet all code and local regulations and all conditions that will affect work. The following shall be included in the investigation of conditions: 1. Contract Drawings and Specifications. ' 2. Conditions at site. 3. Constraints and conditions due to partial Owner occupancy during construction. 4. All applicable codes and local regulations. ' 5. Anticipation of weather conditions during the construction period. 6. Local regulations or requirements of the local Electrical and/or Building Inspector. 7. Anticipation of strikes onforced work stoppages. B. The Electrical Contractor shall be totally responsible for all assumptions, omissions,and errors in the ' investigation of conditions. C. All work shall be done in strict accordance with the latest accepted edition of all governing codes and ' regulations including,but not limited to,the following: 1. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code. ' 3. NFPA 72-Signaling System. 4. International Building Code. 5. All state and local codes and enforced regulations affecting work. D. In no way shall the information on the Drawings or in the Specifications preclude code compliance. , Where work indicated on the Contract Documents exceeds code requirements,the work as outlined in the Contract Documents shall take precedence. E. Secure and keep current all licenses, permits, approvals, or certificates required for work under this ' Division of the Contract. F. Conduct all testing as required by the inspecting authorities. , 1.04 DRAWING INTERPRETATION A. Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and intended to outline basic engineering and systems design; t therefore, do not show minor details and accessories.Because a minor component is not shown, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for furnishing and installing all such items necessary to provide complete, operative, and properly installed systems to the Owner under the basic Contract. If ' there are any doubts as to work required,the Contractor shall obtain a clarification from the Architect/ Engineer in the bid stage. B. The Contract Drawings show the intended location of equipment; however, the Contractor shall be ' responsible for any minor adjustments or relocations necessary due to choice of.equipment and coordination conflicts. All equipment relocations must be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. ' C. The project drawings, specifications, and other documents are complimentary. Items required by one shall designate requirement by the other,whether explicitly stated or not. Where documents conflict, ' the work of the more stringent nature shall be required. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 1.05 RECORD DRAWINGS ' A. An accurate record shall al be kept of all electrical work, showing the exact final location of all access doors, ducts, pull boxes, junction boxes, concealed feeders, outlets, switches, motors, appliances, panelboards,and equipment when not as shown on the Contract Drawings. ' B. All changes made by Addenda or Change Order shall be incorporated on the Record Drawings. ' C. Record Drawings shall be turned over to the Architect/Engineer for approval at the time of notification of completion of the project. D. Refer to the Project Manual for General Conditions,Supplementary General Conditions,and additional ' requirements. 1.06 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION OF WORK ' A. Work shall be scheduled to meet the Construction Manager's overall construction schedule, as well as coordinate with the schedules of all other Contractors and Subcontractors, so that work progresses smoothly with no delays. B. Refer to the Project Manual for basic sequence of Construction. C. Clearances and access spaces shall be maintained around equipment.Installations shall be coordinated ' with the equipment and system of all other trades. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to eliminate any conflicts that arise due to failure to coordinate. ' D. Permitted use,location,and type of all anchors,supports,sleeves,and other materials that shall be cast into concrete,must be verified with the Architect/Engineer and are subject to approval. 1.07 MATERIALS AND SUBMISSION FOR APPROVAL A. Refer to Division 01 for basic guidelines,covering submission of materials for approval. B. Provide the proper materials necessary to complete all work included in this Division of the Contract. Additional Costs incurred in any Division of work consequent to substitution of materials, shall be investigated prior to submission. All cost penalties shall be the responsibility of the Contractor regardless of approval of such materials. ' C. The materials specified herein are indicative of both the characteristics and quality of materials necessary to satisfy Contract responsibilities; type and quality standards will be strictly upheld in consideration for approval of equipment and the Architect/Engineer's judgment of compliance will be ' final. D. Requests for substitutions will not be considered until after award of Contract, and then will be ' accepted only from the Contractor through the Architect/Engineer.All requests must be in writing or in the form of material submittals with special cover letter giving credits available or reasons for the proposed substitution. The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying, on request, information and samples of both specified and substituted materials. ' E. The Architect/Engineer and Owner reserve the right to refuse approval of materials and equipment used on the job that, in their opinion, does not meet the standards outlined herein. Only after documentation of approval,where approval is required,shall materials be ordered and installed on this project. All installed materials requiring approval that have not been approved, shall be removed and replaced as directed by the Architect/Engineer. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 1 F. Architect/Engineer's review of Shop Drawings will cover materials only. Quantities and dimensions necessary to satisfy the Contract and to coordinate with other trades will be the Contractor's , responsibility. G. Material approvals shall be obtained in time so material can be manufactured and delivered to the job site in coordination with project work schedules. Additional costs to all trades arising because of t material not being available when necessary shall be the responsibility of the Contractor causing the delay. H. Material submissions shall contain the following information in reiteration and in addition to the ' information required in the Project Manual: 1. Project name. 2. Specification section and paragraph submitted under. ' 3. Manufacturer. 4. Manufacturing materials,gauge,and finish. 5. Electrical requirements and characteristics. 6. Performance and operating characteristics. ' 7. List or denote all accessories and options included. 8. Delete all listed accessories and options not included. 9. Indicate all special equipment required for a complete system to be supplied by others, and by whom they will be supplied. ' 10. Indicate any deviations from specification and other constraints that may affect the work of any contractor. I. All related equipment necessary to comprise a complete system shall be submitted in a folder with ' each page identified. Indicate when submitting an incomplete system in which some components will be submitted under separate cover. J. The following procedures shall apply: ' 1. Transmit each submittal with form accepted by Architect/Engineer. 2. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with an alphabetic suffix. , 3. Identify Project, Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s),and specification Section number,as appropriate. 4. Apply Trade Contractor's or Supplier's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination ' of information,is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 5. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project,and deliver in accordance with the Project Manual. 6. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be ' detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. 7. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps. 8. Revise and resubmit submittals as required,identify all changes made since previous submittal. 9. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report ' any inability to comply with provisions. K. Within three (3) calendar days after date of Contractor Agreement and/or Purchase Order, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model ' number of each product. L. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog , designation,and reference standards. M. Within ten(10)calendar days atter date of Contractor Agreement and/or Purchase Order,submit shop drawings in the form of one reproducible transparency and one blue line reproduction,each item listed ' on the schedule. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK N. Within ten (10) calendar days after the date of Contractor Agreement and/or Purchase Order, submit ' product data as follows: 1. Submit only pages that are pertinent;mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, reference to Specification Section and Article number. Show reference standards, performance,and controls;component parts;finishes;dimension;and required clearances. ' 2. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the Work.Delete information not applicable. ' O. Review submittals and shop drawings prior to transmittal; determine and verify field measurements, field construction criteria, manufacturer's catalogs numbers, and conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor review and submission indicates that the Supplier ' certifies that it has investigated and verified all materials, and specification criteria and that he has checked and coordinated same with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents and that there are no deviations except as specifically noted in this submission, and hereby submits for review in accordance with requirements of the General Conditions. ' P. Coordinate submittals with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. Q. Sign or initial each sheet of shop drawings and product data.Each sample label to certify compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. Notify Owner in writing at time of submittal of any deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. R. Do not fabricate products or begin work that requires submittal until return of submittal with Architect/Engineer acceptance. S. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals; identify changes made since previous submittal. T. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's printed instructions for ' delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data U. Identify conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and Contract Documents. tV. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate to Architect/ Engineer for review,in quantities specified for Product Data. ' W. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date,affidavits,and certifications as appropriate. ' X. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Construction Manager. Y. Shop Drawings and Data indicated in Section 0133 00"Submittal Procedures" are to be provided for by the Electrical Contractor: Z. Shop drawings and submittals shall be reviewed and returned within ten (10) working days. The following meanings shall apply: I. "Approved" means that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed, providing submittal complies with Contract Documents. Supplier assumes sole responsibility for the required compliance.No response is required of the Supplier. 2. "Approved as Noted"means that fabrication,manufacture,or construction may proceed,provided submittal is amended and resubmitted to comply with Construction Manager's notations and the Contract Documents, or the Supplier confirms in writing that he will do so. If for any reason BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 1 contractor can not confirm compliance with notations, Supplier shall resubmit as described for submittals stamped Rejected. ' 3. "Rejected".means that submittal does not comply with Contract Documents,and that fabrication, manufacture,or construction as submitted must not proceed under any circumstances. Submittals stamped Rejected are not permitted on job site. 4. For transparencies stamped Approved, or Approved as Noted, or Comments Attached, Supplier shall provide the six(6)copies of the submittal as required for field distribution. 5. Supplier receipt of shop drawings or data stamped Rejected shall not be the basis of a claim for extension or delay,with regard to delivery of equipment or material. 1.08 WORKMANSHIP ' A. All work shall be done by competent Electricians, skilled in the portion of work they will be engaged ' in on this project. All work shall be.in accordance with the highest standards of established practice in the electrical trade,and shall produce the most stable,durable,and presentable results. B. All work under this Division,judged below standard by the Architect/Engineer, shall be brought up to , standard at no cost to the Owner. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION/INFORMATION ' A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship,to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturer's instructions,including each step in sequence. ' C. Should manufacturer's instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Owner before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances,codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. ' F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses; ' vibration,physical distortion or disfigurement. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces , and installation,quality of workmanship,start-up of equipment,test,adjust,and balance of equipment and as applicable,and to initiate instructions when necessary. H. All equipment provided under this Division shall be set up,and adjusted following the manufacturer's , instructions or requirements for proper operation and maintenance. 1. Where equipment manufacturer's instruction or requirements conflict with information on the ' Drawings or in the Specifications, the Architect/Engineer shall be advised. The Architect/Engineer shall resolve conflicts and the solution shall be instituted under the basic Contract with no additional cost to the Owner. J. The Owner,or his operating personnel,shall be instructed in the location and use of all equipment and systems installed under the Electrical Division of Work. This shall include the services of a man familiar with all equipment and systems for a minimum of two (2) days and maximum of one (1) ' week. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- 1 ' SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK K. Submit to the Architect/Engineer for approval, four copies of Maintenance Manuals for all major equipment and systems. Maintenance Manuals,when approved,will be turned over to the Owner for his use. The Manuals shall contain installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, and spare parts list. ' 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting,fitting,and patching to complete Work and to: ' 1. Fit the several parts together to integrate with other work. 2. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. 4. Remove sample of installed work for testing. ' S. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. B. Maintain weather tight conditions at all times, arrange temporary protection as required to provide same. C. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. ' D. After uncovering,inspect conditions affecting performance of work. E. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. ' F. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. ' G. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. ' H. Employ authorized and qualified installer to perform cutting and patching for moisture-resistant elements and sight exposed surfaces. ' I. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not allowed without prior approval. J. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. K. Fit work airtight to pipes,sleeves,ducts,conduit,and other penetrations through surfaces. L. At penetrations of fire rated wall, ceiling or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated ' material,full thickness of the construction element. M. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes; for continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; ' for an assembly,refinish entire unit. 1.11 FIRE STOPPING A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide fireproof firestopping materials and accessories for all electrical penetrations using fireproofing materials per ASTM E814 to achieve a fire rating as required by applicable codes. ' B. Submit product data: Provide data on product characteristics,performance and limitation criteria. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- I SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK t D. Submit manufacturer's certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. ' F. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60°F. G. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for three (3) days after installation of ' materials. H. Sequence Work to permit firestopping materials to be installed after adjacent and surrounding work is ' complete. I. The acceptable manufacturers are as follows: ' 1. 3M Fire Barrier Products. 2. Domtar Gypsum. 3. USG. 4. Dow. 5. Or approved equal. J. Firestopping Material: Single component caulk. 1. CP 25N/S for wall and ceiling applications(3M). , 2. CP 258S/L for floor applications(3M). 3. Fire Halt-Sealant(Domtar). 4. Fire Stop Foam and Sealant(Dow). t K. Penetrations: 1. FB-2000 for wall and floor penetrations(3M). 2. CP25WB Caulk(3M). 3. Fire Halt Sealant(Domtar). ' 4. Fire Stop Foam and Sealant(Dow). L. Cable Tray: 1. KBS Seal Bags as manufactured by International Protection Coatings. , M. Fire Safing Material: ' 1. Thermafiber(USG). 2. Mineral Wool(Dow). N. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter, which may affect ' bond of firestopping material. O. Remove incompatible materials that affect bond. P. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' Q. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating to uniform density and texture. ' R. Install material at walls or partition openings that contain penetrating sleeves, electrical duct, cable tray,conduit,and other items requiring firestopping. S. Clean Work under provisions of Division 01. T. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 NIIANII SHORES,FL -8- 1 ' SECTION 26 00,10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 1.12 UNLOADING AND RIGGING ' A. Execute unloading,rigging,and storage to complete work and to: 1. Fit the several parts together to integrate with other work. 2. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. ' 3. Remove materials and equipment used for operations, repair, replace and/or restore any items damaged as a result of operations. B. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during unloading and rigging. C. Beginning of unloading or rigging means acceptance of existing conditions. ' D. Provide insurance coverage sufficient to cover the cost for immediate replacement and all costs required,should any equipment or portion of the project be damaged during unloading and rigging. E. Provide insurance coverage for total replacement value of all products, materials and/or equipment stored. ' F. The contractor shall, to the fullest extent possible, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect/Engineer and landlord from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses resulting from the performance of the work. ' G. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings, and devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. ' H. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide proper support during rigging and unloading. 1. Contractor shall receive at tailgate,all designated products,material and/or equipment. ' J. Contractor shall unload products,material and/or equipment,and store until ready for rigging in place K. Contractor shall transport, move, and rig equipment to designated location, upon direction of ' Construction Manager. L. Contractor shall coordinate his work with other trade contractors as required, to ensure the proper placement and setting of equipment. M. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' N. Promptly inspect shipments to assure products are undamaged. Notify the Owner and transportation vendor in writing of any damage noted. ' O. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by method to prevent soiling,disfigurement and damage. P. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with seals and labels intact ' and legible. Store sensitive products in weather tight,climate controlled enclosures. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -9- SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 1.13 PRODUCTS A. Products:Means new material,machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the ' Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the Work.Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer,for similar components. ' C. Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' D. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by method to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or ' damage. F. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection.Periodically inspect to assure Products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. r 1.14 PROTECTION MAINTENANCE AND MAKING READY FOR ACCEPTANCE A. All equipment and systems provided under this Division shall be protected, maintained, and kept in , good repair until final acceptance by the Owner. Only first class, undamaged equipment in good operating condition will be accepted. ' B. Use of all equipment supplied under this Division is prohibited until Owner's final acceptance except for testing, by special permission, or as allowed by the "Temporary Services" section of the Specifications. ' C. All equipment supplied under this Division shall be freshly lubricated just before final inspection. Furnish to the Owner all necessary devices for lubrication of the equipment. D. All concealed hangers and supports shall be painted with rust inhibitive enamel. Finish painting of all exposed work will be by others. E. All materials subject to moisture damage shall be stored indoors in a controlled environment as ' necessary to prevent condensation in the materials. 1.15 STARTING SYSTEMS , A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Owner seven(7)days prior to start-up of each item. ' C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication,drive rotation, belt tension,control sequence,or other conditions that may cause damage. ' D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. ' E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible Contractor's personnel in accordance with , manufacturer's instructions. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL _10- SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to .provide authorized 1 representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up,and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning ' correctly. 1.16 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT 1 A. Arrange and conduct all requested testing necessary to demonstrate to the Architect/Engineer, the proper operation of all equipment supplied under this Division. Proper operation shall include the following: 1. Operating characteristics as specified. 2. All accessories and options installed and operational. 3. Total system and individual components operational as specified and per manufacturer's published ' information. 4. No excess noise and vibration,as judged by the Architect/Engineer. B. Provide all labor, materials, and instruments necessary to conduct all required testing. Test findings shall be recorded and neatly typed in a report and submitted to the Architect/Engineer in triplicate. C. All tests which must be witnessed by inspecting authorities shall be prearranged with the Inspector before notifying the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer not less ' than forty-eight (48) hours in advance of all tests. The Contractor shall be responsible for modifications or repairs necessary to satisfy all required testing. D. Preliminary tests and adjustments shall be conducted to minimize the amount of time required for adjustments and repairs during the actual final testing. E. Motor testing shall be conducted on all motors. Testing and data to be tabulated in the report shall be as follows: 1. Equipment name or description. 2. Motor manufacturer's available nameplate data including: RPM, HP, phase, voltage, full load amperes,safety factor,power factor,manufacturer's name,motor type and/or model number. ' 3. Motor test readings shall be taken at normal load and shall include amperes for each phase,phase- to-phase voltage at motor,and at starter or disconnect switch terminals. Percentage = load test amperes(average) ' full load amperes(nameplate) 4. Motor starter nameplate data shall include manufacturer, model, size, and ampere rating of overload heaters installed. 5. Motor feeder breaker and/or disconnect switch data shall include manufacturer of fuses installed, and branch circuit wire size. 1.17 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two (2)weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. ' B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation,perform demonstration for other season within six(6)months. ' C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2- DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled times,at designated location. ' E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.18 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES , A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, ' and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. ' 1.19 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. ' B. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. C. Remove waste and surplus materials,rubbish,and construction facilities from the site. , 1.20 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. , 1.21 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' A. Maintain on site,one set of the following record documents;record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings,Product data,and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products , installed,including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda or Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction ' including: 1. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. ' 2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Details not on original Contract Drawings. F. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 12- SECTION 26 0110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 1.22 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, bound with durable plastic covers. B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project,and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers,logically organized as described below;with tab titling clearly printer under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified by type. E. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses,and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors,and major equipment suppliers. F. Part II: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and ' suppliers.Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. ' 4. Operating instructions. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials ' and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. G. Part III: Project documents and certificates,including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data 2. Test and start-up reports. 3. Manufacturer's Certificates. 4. Photocopies of warranties. ' H. Submit one (1) copy of completed volume in final form three (3) days prior to final inspection. This copy will be returned, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. ' 1.23 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for replacing or repairing all work performed, or ' materials furnished under this Division that proved defective within a one (1)year guarantee period, unless otherwise noted. Responsibility shall include the cost of temporary services while repairs are made,and all consequential costs to other trades caused by the defective material or workmanship. B. Provide to the Owner a list of all guarantees and warranties on specific pieces of equipment supplied under this section. C. Provide duplicate notarized copies. D. Execute and assemble documents from subcontractors,suppliers,and manufacturers. ' E. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover. F. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25;2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -13- 1 SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK G. For items of work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten(10)days after acceptance,listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. ' PART 2—PRODUCTS-NOT USED PART 3—EXECUTION-NOT USED ' END OF SECTION 26 00 10 ' 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 14- SECTION 26 00 15-ELECTRICAL ALTERATION PROVISIONS ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical Alterations Procedures. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General g pp Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special conditions,and the following listed Sections. ' 2. 01 31 00"Project Management and Coordination." PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and Equipment for Patching and Extending Work:As specified in individual sections. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Field verify measurements and circuiting arrangements. ' B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. Maintain electrical continuity to remaining wiring and equipment. ' C. Demolition Drawings are based on cursory field observation and/or existing record documents.Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation. D. The Trade Contractor shall field check all existing conditions prior to bidding and shall include in his ' bid an allowance for the removal and relocation of existing conduit, wires, devices, fixtures or other equipment as indicated on the plans or as required to coordinate and adapt new and existing electrical systems to all other work required on this project. E. Beginning of removal means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION ' A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls,floors,and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate electrical utility service outages with electrical utility company. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Electrical Service, Fire Alarm System and Telephone System: Maintain existing systems stems in service throughout performance of the work except as specifically otherwise indicated. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY .BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 00 15 ELECTRICAL ALTERATION PROVISIONS 3.03 REMOVAL AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Divisions 1 and this Section. ' B. Remove,relocate,and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. , D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors,and patch surfaces. E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed.Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed. ' F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment servicing utilization equipment that has been ' removed. H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaries.Remove brackets,stems,hangers and other accessories. ' 1. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. Provide modifications to assure that circuits or systems wiring shall not pass through outlet or junction boxes that may be rendered inaccessible by changes made to the building. t J. Maintain access to existingelectrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide fl' accessanel as appropriate. P K. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified. L. Where the reuse of existing conduits,outlets,junction boxes, etc. is permissible,make certain that the wiring for them is continuous from outlet to outlet. M. Connect new work to existing work in a manner that will assure proper raceway grounding throughout in conformance with the National Electrical Code. ' N. Existing conduits,wire,devices,fixtures,etc.which shall be removed shall become the property of the Trade Contractor unless otherwise notes. , 3.04 ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD MANAGEMENT A. For any materials representing an environmental hazard requiring removal as part of the project,Trade ' Contractor shall remove and dispose of such materials in accordance with EPS (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency) standards and all other applicable environmental standards. Concerning such disposals: 1. Trade Contractor shall submit proof that all required permits; arrangement for transport and the ' like have been obtained. 2. Final Report:Trade Contractor shall submit a final report upon completion of the project including but not limited to, all documentation, EPA ID numbers, notices and letters to EPA and other agencies, disposal profiles, manifesting, certificates of disposal, laboratory analysis, and all appurtenant data.The report shall accurately depict the chain of events occurring during removal and disposal phases.The report shall demonstrate a"cradle-to-grave"history of the materials that t represent an environmental hazard. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- 1 SECTION 26 00 15 ELECTRICAL ALTERATION PROVISIONS 3.05 CLEANING AND REPAIR ' A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or are to be reused. B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged ' circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. The Trade Contractor shall perform all cutting, channeling, chasing,drilling,etc. as required to install or remove electrical equipment in areas of alteration. This work shall be performed so as to minimize ' damage to portions of wall finishes, surfaces, plastering, or the structures which are to be reused, resurfaced,plastered,or painted under another division of these specifications. B. Carefully coordinate with the required alteration work, cutting and patching, etc. performed by other ' trades. Remove or relocate existing electrical conduits, wires, devices, fixtures,and other equipment as necessary. ' END OF SECTION 26 00 15 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANII SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 05 00-COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL METHODS AND MATERIALS A. Provide complete wiring and p g raceway systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. All wire and raceway shall be continuous and in accordance with code requirements. ' B. Materials and installation shall be in accordance with NFPA codes and standards with special attention to NFPA-70,"National Electric Code"(NEC)latest accepted edition. ' 1.02 DRAWING INTERPRETATION A. Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and intended to outline basic engineering and systems design, therefore,do not show minor details and accessories. Because a minor component is not shown,shall ' not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for furnishing and installing all such items necessary to provide complete,operative, and properly installed systems to the Owner under the basic Contract. If there are any doubts as to work required, the Contractor shall obtain a clarification from the ' Architect/Engineer in the bid stage. B. The Contract Drawings show the intended location of equipment; however, the Contractor shall be responsible for any minor adjustments or relocations necessary due to choice of equipment and coordination conflicts. All equipment relocations must be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. C. The project drawings, specifications, and other documents are complimentary. Items required by one ' shall designate requirement by the other,whether explicitly stated or not. Where documents conflict, the work of the more stringent nature shall be required. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL WIRING MATERIALS rA. All electrical equipment shall be UL listed and labeled unless otherwise noted. B. All conductors shall be copper. C. Approved connectors for splices and joints in wiring 600 volts or less are as follows: 1. Number 10 AWG and smaller: UL approved,solderless connectors with nylon shell with internal ' spring,Ideal Industries Wing Nut connectors or approved equal. 2. Number 8 AWG and larger: UL approved clamp type terminals,Burndy"Quick link"or approved equal,with approved insulating method. D. Splices shall be permitted only for terminating wires to pig-tail leads. All splices shall be directly accessible. 2.02 RACEWAY MATERIALS A. All raceway products shall be UL listed and labeled for their intended use. B. Raceway products include conduit, cable tray, and busway systems. Refer to individual sections for more information. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART 3-INSTALLATION 3.01 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. Wiring on the Drawings is to show switching intent and circuit to panel.Exact device interconnections, routing,quality of conductors and code required raceway size,where not otherwise noted,shall be the 1 Contractor's responsibility with exact method being his option, provided methods comply with the intent of contract documents and all code regulations. B. Leave sufficient slack wire in outlet boxes to allow removal and necessary work room for device ' removal and replacement and per NEC requirements. C. Connections to electrical equipment shall be made using approved connecting devices. Screw or lug connections may be used for wire Number 8 AWG or larger.Lugs shall be rated for cable material and ' the cable size to be connected.It shall be the Contractor's responsibility for verifying that all electrical equipment,to which he must wire,is ordered with the proper size wiring lugs. D. Entire installation shall be in accordance with National Electrical Manufacturers Association ' recommended practices as a minimum. E. Equipment manufacturer's installation instructions shall be followed except where they conflict with , other installation instructions and/or"good practices."If there is a conflict,the Contractor shall include the most costly installation in his bid or request a resolution prior to bidding. 3.02 RACEWAY METHODS A. Prohibited Locations 1. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT)shall not be installed underground or in concrete. ' 2. PVC shall not be installed in air plenums. B. Required Locations 1. Rigid steel conduit or PVC conduit,schedule 40 or heavier,for all conduits installed underground or in concrete. Stub-ups from below concrete shall be rigid steel. 2. All outdoor feeder conduits and indoor exposed locations subject to damage or below 6-foot in vehicle or traffic areas shall be galvanized rigid steel,rigid aluminum,or IMC. ' 3. Exposed rigid non-metallic conduit shall be used only in locations where specifically noted. 4. Flexible conduit shall be used only for dry locations. 5. Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used in place of flexible conduit in damp or wet locations. This shall include all connections to pumps. 6. Surface metal raceways shall be used only in finished areas where surface raceways are required by building conditions,and where specifically noted on the drawings. 7. EMT shall be used in all locations not noted above. C. Installation ' 1. In general, all new raceways in finished areas shall be concealed unless specifically noted otherwise. ' 2. Where exposed conduits are specifically required,they shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to the building lines,and not installed diagonally. 3. Any minor changes in the location of raceways from those shown on the drawings shall be made without extra charge if so directed by the Architect/Engineer before installation. ' 4. Coordinate with other work including metal and concrete work, as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components. 5. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 6. For conduits one inch and larger,hickey bends are not acceptable.Either manufactured elbows or bends fabricated in a bending machine must be used. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 26 01 01 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK t 7. Where a conduit enters a box or other fitting through a knockout,an approved double locknut and ' insulating bushing must be provided.All conduits shall be equipped with insulating bushings at all outlets,pull boxes,panel,etc. 8. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires within raceways. 9. Install flexible conduit for motor connections and for other electrical equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration. 10. Install liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and for other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration, and also where subjected to one or more of the following conditions: a. Below raised floor throughout computer room and computer room ancillary rooms. b. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. c. Corrosive atmosphere. d. Subjected to water spray. e. Subjected to dripping oil,grease,or water. 11. Flexible conduit connections to motors shall include one 901 bend. 12. All conduits shall be cleaned by pulling a swab through the conduit before pulling in wires. 13. Branch raceway runs are shown schematically. Except where exact routing is indicated, branch circuit raceways may be grouped, and the actual routing of branch circuit raceways may be ' altered,providing actual locations are properly entered on the"As-Built"drawings. 14. Conduit connections between outlet boxes less than 24-inches apart on opposite sides of a wall shall be made with a loop of flexible conduit(no nipples). 15. Grout around all conduits at ceiling, floor, and wall penetrations to provide air-tight seal. All penetrations through slabs and fire rated walls shall be sealed using a fire rated material approved by the Engineer. 16. Provide roof jack at all penetrations. Coordinate roof jack type and installation with Construction Manager.Equipment must be compatible with required roof guarantee. ' 17. Conduits or raceways that penetrate the computer room boundary at any location other than through a RF line filter shall be bonded at the penetration. The bonds shall be #2 copper, unless detailed otherwise on the drawings,and connected to the equipment potential ground system. 18. Support conductors in vertical raceways in accordance with NEC 300-19. D. Cleaning 1. Upon completion of installation of raceways,inspect interiors of raceways,remove burrs,dirt,and ' construction debris. r END OF SECTION 26 05 00 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 05 10-ACCEPTANCE TESTING tPARTI -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY tA. Section Includes: 1. Application Publication: The publication listed below forms a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publication is referred to in the text by the basic designation only. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special conditions. 2. National Electrical Testing Association: Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems,Latest edition. ' PART 2-QUALIFICATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES ' 2.01 The Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing organization to provide final inspection, testing, calibration, and adjusting on the electrical distribution system as defined in this contract. The organization shall be independent of the supplier,producer,or installer of the equipment. 2.02 Testing, inspection,and calibration shall be performed by an Engineering Technician,certified by a national organization, with a minimum of five (5) years of experience inspecting, testing, and calibrating electrical distribution equipment, systems, and devices. Information on the testing organization and qualifications of the Certified Engineering Technician shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval prior to the start of work. 2.03 The Contractor shall supply to the testing organization complete sets of approved shop drawings, coordination study, settings of all adjustable devices, and other information necessary for an accurate inspection and evaluation of the system prior to the performance of any tests. The testing organization shall submit a test procedure for each item of equipment to be tested on this project for approval after the evaluation of the system and equipment has been determined.No testing shall be performed until after the test ' procedures have been submitted to and approved by the Architect/Engineer. PART 3-INSPECTIONS 3.01 An inspection of the installed equipment shall be performed by the testing organization to verify that the distribution equipment installed,and to be tested is the equipment as denoted on the approved shop drawings. ' The inspection shall check the equipment designations, device characteristics, special installation requirements, and applicable code of requirements and other conditions that may affect the successful, safe performance and operation of the system. 3.02 The installed equipment shall be compared to the approved shop drawings after the installation and a report developed stating any discrepancies. ' PART 4-TESTING 4.01 The testing organization shall perform tests on each item of distribution equipment contained in this contract ' in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Testing Association's (META) Acceptance Testing Specification for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems,dated 1987,as revised. BARRY UNIVERSITY. BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 05 10 ACCEPTANCE TESTING 4.02 Field Acceptance Testing shall be accomplished on each item of electrical distribution equipment installed or connected to a part of this contract. This shall include,but is not limited to: ' A. All medium voltage circuit breakers,switches,and assemblies. B. All adjustable trip low voltage circuit breakers. ' C. Grounding systems. D. Automatic transfer switch and other emergency connected devices. ' E. Generator. 4.03 Systems shall be energized or otherwise placed in service only after completion of all required tests and an ' evaluation of the test results has been completed. PART 5-SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS , 5.01 Each system provided in this contract,and covered by this section of specifications,shall be function tested to ensure total system operation. The Contractor shall verify that all systems interface correctly with all related , systems. 5.02 After the manufacturers complete their individual start-up checks, services and testing,the Contractor shall ' provide a total power system load test. 5.03 Load banks shall be provided with a minimum rating which equals or exceeds the redundant rating of the UPS system. The load banks shall be capable of continuous operation in the environment where it will be ' located. The load bank shall be provided with integral overcurrent and over temperature alarms. Controls shall be provided to select load levels of 0%,25%,50%,75%,and 100%of the ratings specified,without de- energizing the load bank. All cables and connectors shall be provided to connect the load bank to the UPS ' output switchboard.The contractor shall be responsible for connecting the load bank. 5.04 Recording type test equipment shall be connected to the output of the UPS system during the entire load test. Three phase output voltage and output frequency shall be monitored. Voltage sensitivity shall be less than ' 0.5%of nominal system frequency.Response time shall be 10 msec or less.Recorded test data shall indicate all voltage and frequency deviations from nominal values. The test data shall be summarized, certified, and provided to the engineer at the conclusion of the load test. All cables, sensors, and accessories shall be provided to accurately measure the specified parameters. The test equipment shall bear valid calibration data ' for the test equipment to the engineer for approval prior to the system load test. 5.05 A service representative of the manufacturer of the UPS system and the engine generator shall be present ' during the system load test. The representatives shall be qualified to service the equipment and make necessary checks and adjustments to ensure proper operation of their respective system. 5.06 The system load test shall be conducted at the direction of the Architect/Engineer. ' 5.07 Any failure during the system load test shall be corrected immediately. The test procedure in progress at the time of failure shall be restarted. The Contractor shall warrant that errors and omissions in the study or report shall be corrected without charge to the Owner when so found within twelve(12)months from acceptance of the report. 5.08 The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to accept or reject test data that does not conform to the , manufacturer's data or is not obtained in accordance with these specifications. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 26 0110 ACCEPTANCE TESTING PART 6-DOCUMENTATION 6.01 Provide certified test reports for review and approval under provisions of Division 01 6.02 Copies of the approved report shall be included in the manuals required in Division 01. END OF SECTION 26 05 10 1 i i 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES FL -3 - 1 ' SECTION 26 05 19-LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors,splices,and terminations rated 600 V and less. B. Related Sections: ' 1. Drawings and all provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 26 05 29"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" 3. 26 05 36"Cable Trays for Electrical Systems." ' 4. 26 05 44"Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 5. 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems." ' 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. VFC: Variable Frequency Controller. ' B. SER: Service Entrance. C. UF: Underground Feeder. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. ' PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following 1. Alcan Products Corporation;Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corp. ' 5. General Cable Technologies Corp. 6. Southwire Inc. ' B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA 5-95-658. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA 5-95-658 for Type THHN/THWN-2, Type 3 HHW-2,Type UF,and Type SO. D. Multi-conductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire. ' E. VFC Cable: 1. Comply with UL 1277,UL 1685,and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - i SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2. Type TC-ER with oversized cross linked polyethylene insulation, spiral wrapped foil plus 85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire and sunlight and oil resistant ' outer PVC jacket. 3. Comply with UL requirements for cables in Classes I and 11, Division 2 hazardous location applications. F. Wire and Cable(600V Installation): ' 1. Single conductor, annealed copper wire and cable shall be with insulation rated 600 V of sizes specified and scheduled on drawings and for secondary service, feeders, branch and system wiring. Wire insulated for 300 V may be used where voltage is less than 100 V, if isolated from ' higher voltages.Wire sizes shown and specified are American Wire Gauge(AWG)for copper. 2. Metal clad cable shall be galvanized steel Type MC 600 V copper with full sized insulated ground conductor.Minimum size shall be#12 AWG unless specified otherwise. ' 3. Wire #8 and larger shall be stranded; #10 and smaller shall be solid. Wire and cable shall have THWN/THHN insulation. 4. Motor control circuits and signal wiring may be#14 stranded if NEC requirements are met. 5. Wiring within light fixtures and other high temperature equipment shall have 150°C insulation as ' required by NEC. 6. Cable for direct burial shall be UF. 7. Insulation for General Use Wire and Cable: ANSI/NFPA 70; Type THHN/THWN insulation for alternating current feeders and branch circuits;and type RHH for direct current wiring. , 8. Wire for Use in Cable Tray(Interior Applications): Single conductor,annealed copper,NEC type XHHW rated for 90°C,600 volts. 9. Arc-proofing: a. Provide flexible,flame retardant,organic composition coated elastomer arc proofing tape on ' power cable in manholes and handholes, suitable to withstand 200 A arc for 30 seconds. Tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion. b. Apply tape in single, half-lapped layer as required by manufacturer's recommendations. ' Secure with strips of red plastic film tape on 208Y/120V conductors and yellow plastic film tape on 408Y/277V conductors. 10. Provide 3-ply marlin twine lacing or self-extinguishing nylon straps with -65 to 350°F range for bundling conductors. , G. Feeder Identification 1. Provide non-ferrous identifying tags or pressure sensitive labels for cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults,pull boxes, manholes and switchboard rooms, at cable termination and in other locations. 2. Tags or labels shall be stamped or printed to correspond with markings on Drawings or marked so that feeder or cable may be identified readily. If suspended tags are provided, attach with 1/32- ' inch diameter nylon 55-pound test monofilament line or slip-free plastic cable lacing unit. H. Color Coding 1. Color code secondary service,feeders,and branch circuit conductors as follows: t 208/120 Volts Phase 480/277 Volts Black A Brown ' Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Gray Green Ground Green 2. Colors shall be factory applied entire length of conductors by one of the following methods except as noted and limited below: a. Solid color compound. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- 1 SECTION 26 0119 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES b. Solid color coating. 1 C. Colored stripping(two(2)stripes 180°apart). d. Colored bands or hash marks with maximum spacing of 18-inches. e. Colored fibrous covering,or f. Surface printing every 12-inches,maximum spacing of 18-inches. 1 3. Branch circuit conductors #12 and #10 shall have solid color compound, solid color coating or colored fibrous covering. Neutrals and equipment grounds shall have solid compound or solid color coating(white,gray,and green),except that neutrals with colored stripe shall be used where ' required by NEC. Conductors #8 and larger with stripes, bands, or hash marks shall have background color other than white,green,and gray. 4. Solid color coating, stripes, bands, or hash marks shall be strongly adherent paint or dye, sufficiently wide and clear to be readily distinguishable after installation. 5. Alternative field-applied color coding methods may be used for wire#10 or larger,with color code specified in Subparagraph A: a. Apply 3/4-inch colored pressure sensitive plastic tape in half overlapping turns for 6-inches from all terminal points and in boxes in which splices or taps are made.Apply last two laps of tape with no tension.Do not cover cable identification markings. b. Identify with nylon, self-extinguishing, self-locking colored cable ties. Ties shall accommodate wire sizes 1/16-inch through 1-3/4-inch in diameter and shall be not less than ' 0.18-inches wide.Minimum tensile strength shall be at least 50 lbs Temperature range shall be-65°F to+350°F.Provide three ties to each wire at each terminal point starting 3-inches from terminal and spaced 3-inches apart and three ties to each wire in boxes where splices or taps are made with special tool or pliers and cut off excess. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: ' 1. AFC Cable Systems,Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems,Inc. ' 4. Ideal Industries,Inc. 5. Ilsco;a branch of Bardes Corp. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney;a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. ' 8. 3M;Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics. B. Description: Factory fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. C. Connectors for splicing copper conductors: ' 1. Connectors for straight splicing: a. For Conductors 8 AWG and Smaller: Insulated solderless compression type, Burndy "Hylink"or Thomas&Betts"Sta-Kon." b. For Conductors 6 AWG and Larger: Solderless compression 2-way type,Burndy Type YS-L or Thomas&Betts 54500 Series. 2. Connectors for Pigtail Splicing Conductors(8 AWG and Smaller): Soldieries type with a metallic insert connector within a plastic insulating cover having a temperature rating of 105°C,600 volts; Buchanan,Ideal,or Scotchlok. 3. Connectors for Three-Way Splicing Conductors (6 AWG and Larger): Solderless compression type,Bumdy or Thomas&Betts. D. Lugs for terminating copper conductors: ' 1. Power Conductors 8 AWG and Smaller: Solderless type, manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise specified. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2. Power Conductors 6 AWG and Larger: Solderless compression type, with two-hole tongue, Burndy or Thomas&Betts. 3. Control and Switchboard Wiring: Solderless compression type with tinned ring tongue, Burndy "Hylug"or Thomas&Betts"Sta-Kon." E. Terminal blocks , 1. Terminal Blocks for use in control wiring panels and terminal cabinets:Molded barrier type rated 30 Amps, 600 Volts with washer head binding screws and white marking strip. Acceptable products are: a. Cutler-Hammer,Bulletin 10987. ' b. General Electric EB-S. C. Marathorr200 HB.Series. 2.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70� Y a b P qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. ' B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS ' A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller;stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, ' except VFC cable,which shall be extra flexible stranded. 3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING ' METHODS A. Service Entrance:Type THHN-2-THWN-2,single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders:Type THHN-2-THWN-2,single conductors in raceway. ' C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. ' D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring:Type THHN-2-THWN-2,single conductors in raceway. F. Feeders in Cable Tray:Type XIHW-2,single conductors larger than No. 1/0 AWG. G. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including.in Cmwlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings,Walls,and Partitions:Metal-clad cable,Type MC. I. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2- ' THWN-2,single conductors in raceway. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 26 0119 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES J. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. K. Branch Circuits in Cable Type Tray:T e XHHW-2,single conductors larger than No. 1/0 AWG. L. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO,hard service cord with stainless steel,wire mesh,strain relief device at terminations to suit application. ' M. VFC Output Circuits:Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal installation in finished walls,ceilings,and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 ' 05 33"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems"prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. ' E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,and follow surface contours where possible. ' F. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 26 05 36 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems"prior to installing conductors and cables. H. Critical control systems such as EPO systems etc.shall utilize building wire in EMT.Flexible conduit is not allowed. ' 1. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. ' J. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. . K. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 amp, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75-feet and for 20 amp,277 volt branch circuits longer than 200-feet. ' L. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. ' M. Clean all conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. N. Lace or clip groups of conductors at distribution centers, panelboards, pull boxes, wireways, control panels and similar conditions. O. Install phase and neutral conductors of each branch or feeder circuit in a single conduit, except where paralleling circuits are indicated. Install paralleling circuits of identical make-up and length as the paralleled circuit,and terminate conductors at the same location,mechanically and electrically,at both ' ends,to ensure equal division of the total current between conductors. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES P. Install conductors in such a manner that the bending radius of any wire or cable is not less than the minimum recommended by ICEA and/or the manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's ' recommended values for maximum pulling tension applied to any wire or cable. Q. Connect all power wiring to equipment such that phasing will be A-B-C-N left to right,top to bottom, and front to back, where possible; and permanently identify phasing on the structure or housing adjacent to bus.Phase identification A-B-C is equivalent to transformer phase identification Xl-X2-X3 and Hl-H2-H3. R. Provide copper grounding conductors and straps,as required. ' 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening ' values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess , equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet,with at least 6-inches of slack. D. Splices and Terminations: 1. Make splices in branch circuit wiring with UL-listed, solderless connectors rated 600 V,of sizes and types required by manufacturer's recommendations with temperature ratings equal to those of , wires. Splice connectors shall be screw-on.Insulate splices with integral covers or with plastic or rubber friction tape to preserve characteristics of wire and cable insulation. 2. Provide standard bolt-on lugs with hex screws to attach copper wire and cable to panelboards, switchboards,disconnect switches and electrical equipment. 3. Make terminations and splices for conductors #6 and larger with corrosion resistant, high ' conductivity pressure indent, hex screw or bolt-clamp connectors, with or without tongues, designed specifically for intended service. Connectors for cables 250 MCM and larger shall have t two clamping elements or compression indents. Terminals for bus connections shall have two(2) bolt holes. 4. Ampacity of splices and connectors shall be equal to those of associated wires and cables. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION ' A. Identify and color code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems"and as specified. ' B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.06 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS ' A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with ' requirements in Section 26 05 44"Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: , 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. - I BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 210119 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than sixty (60) days after Final ' Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No.3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan. a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice eleven(11)months after date of Substantial Completion. b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. C. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken,and observations after remedial action. 3. Inspect wire for physical damage and proper connection. 4. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values. 5. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor. B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. ' 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3.08 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems." ' B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION 26 05 19 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- SECTION 26 05 23-CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Multimode optical fiber cabling. 2. UTP cabling. 3. RS485 cabling. 4. Identification products. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary. Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this.Section. ' 2. 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." 3. 09 90 00'Painting&Finishing." 4. 26 05 26"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." ' 5. 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" 6. 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 7. 26 27 26"Wiring Devices." ' 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. ' B. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from heating, ventilating,or air-conditioning equipment. ' C. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1 A. Field quality control reports. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. ' 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products according to ' NFPA 262 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame Travel Distance: 60-inches or less. 2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less. ' 3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL 1 SECTION 26 05 23 CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666. ' C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685. 2.03 BACKBOARDS ' A. Description: Plywood,fire-retardant treated,3/4 by 48 by 96-inches. B. Painting: Paint plywood on all sides and edges with eggshell black latex paint. Comply with requirements in Section 09 90 00"Painting&Finishing." 2.04 OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Belden Inc. 2. CommScope,Inc. ' 3. Corning Incorporated. 4. Emerson Connectivity Solutions. t 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Mohawk;a division of Belden Inc. 7. Nexans;Berk-Tek Products. 8. Siemon Company(The). ' 9. Superior Essex Inc. 10. SYSTIMAX Solutions;a CommScope,Inc.brand. 11. 3M. 12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect;Tyco International Ltd. ' B. Description: Multimode, 62.5/125-micrometer, 24-fiber, nonconductive,tight-buffer, optical-fiber cable. ' 1. Comply with ILEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA492AAAB-A for detailed specifications. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with ' UL 444,UL 1651,and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Plenum Rated,Nonconductive: Type OFNP in listed plenum communications raceway. b. Riser Rated,Nonconductive:Type OFNR,complying with UL 1666. C. General Purpose,Nonconductive: Type OFN or Type OFNG. ' 5. Conductive cable shall be steel or aluminum armored type. 6. Maximum Attenuation:3.5 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm. 7. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm;500 MHz-km at 1300 nm. C. Jacket: t 1. Jacketolor: Orange for 62.5/125-micrometer cable. C 2. Cable cordage jacket,fiber,unit,and group color shall be according to TIA-598-C. ' 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40- inches. 2.05 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE , A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries,Inc. ' 3. Belden Inc. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 26 05 23 CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 4. Corning Incorporated. 5. Dynacom Inc. 6. Hubbell Incorporated. 7. Molex Premise Networks;a division of Molex,Inc. 8. Panduit Corp. ' 9. Siemon Company(The). B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors. 1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria. ' C. Patch Cords: Factory-made,dual-fiber cables in 36-inch lengths. D. Cable Connecting Hardware: 1. Comply with Optical-Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA- ' 604-2-B,TIA-604-3-B,and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA-568-C.3. 2. Quick connect,simplex and duplex,Type LC connectors. Insertion loss of not more than 0.75 dB. 3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks,panels,and equipment packages. ' 2.06 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. Alpha Wire Company;a division of Belden Inc. 3. Belden Inc. ' 4. CommScope,Inc. 5. Draka Cableteq USA. 6. Genesis Cable Products;Honeywell International,Inc. 7. Mohawk;a division of Belden Inc. ' 8. Nexans;Berk-Tek Products. 9. Siemon Company(The). 10. Superior Essex Inc. 11. SYSTIMAX Solutions;a CommScope,Inc.brand. ' 12. 3M. 13. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect;Tyco International Ltd. B. Description: 100-ohm,four-pair UTP,25-pair UTP covered with a thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA 5-102-700 for mechanical properties of Category 6 cables. 2. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA-568-C.2,Category 6. ' 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with NEMA WC 66,and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with UL 1685 or Type CMP in listed plenum communications raceway. ' b. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMP, or Type CMR in listed plenum or riser communications raceway. C. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or Type CMG;or Type CM, Type CMG, Type CMP,or Type CMR in listed communications raceways. 2.07 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries,Inc. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 05 23 CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 3. Belden Inc. 4. Dynacom Inc. 5. Hubbell Incorporated. 6. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 7. Molex Premise Networks;a division of Molex,Inc. 8. Panduit Corp. 9. Siemon Company(The). 10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect;Tyco International Ltd. B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated. D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit ' interconnection between cables. 1. Number of Terminals per Field:One for each conductor in assigned cables. , E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Number of Jacks per Field:One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated. F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; 4-pair, 8-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1. G. Patch Cords: Factory made,4-pair cables in 36-inch lengths;terminated with 8-position modular plug ' at each end. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 , performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. H. Workstation Outlets:Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in single or multi-gang faceplate. 1. Faceplates: ' 1. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, complying with requirements in Section 26 27 26 "Wiring Devices." 2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords. a. Flush mounted jacks,positioning the cord at a 451 angle. J. Legend: ' 1. Factory labeled by silk-screening or engraving for stainless steel faceplates. 2.08 RS485 CABLE ' A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70,Type CMG. 1. Paired,two(2)pairs,twisted,No.22 AWG,stranded(7x30)tinned-copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685. ' B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70,Type CMP. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 26'05 23 CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 1. Paired,two(2)pairs,No.22 AWG,stranded(700)tinned-copper conductors. 2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for ' raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as supplemented or modified in this Section. 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2-inches wide,3-inches high,and 2-1/2 inches deep. ' 2. Outlet boxes for optical-fiber cables shall be no smaller than 4-inches square by 2-1/8-inches deep with extension ring sized to bring edge of ring to within 1/8-inch of the finished wall surface. 3. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. ' B. Comply with TIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible. D. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is installed, ' or in the comer of the room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of the room. 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 3-inches above finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and form smooth gap free corners and joints. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIlVIM, Ch.5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch.6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." ' 3. Terminate all conductors and optical fibers; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets,terminals,and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. 5. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30-inches and not more than 6-inches from cabinets,boxes,fittings,outlets,racks,frames,and terminals. 6. Bundle,lace,and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch.5, "Copper Structured ' Cabling Systems" and Ch.6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- 1 SECTION 26 05 23 CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 7. Do not install bruised,kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination,tap,or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and ' replace it with new cable. 8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use heat lamps for heating. 9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch.5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch.6,"Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions. 10. Support: Do not allow cables to lay on removable ceiling tiles. 11. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as to not damage cables. ' C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2. ' 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than ''/i-inch at the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. D. Optical-Fiber Cable Installation: ' 1. Comply with TIA-568-C.3. 2. Terminate cable on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted. E. Open-Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8-inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 30-inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through or on structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Do not run cables between structural members and corrugated panels. F. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors: ' 1. Install plenum-rated cable only. 2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas. ' 3. Below each feed point, neatly coil a minimum of 72-inches of cable in a coil not less than 12- inches in diameter. G. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper ' voice and data communications cable from potential EMI sources including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and ' unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Ratmg.Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5-inches. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12-inches , (300-mm). C. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24-inches. 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: ' a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2-inches. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6-inches. C. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12-inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and , electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3-inches. C. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6-inches. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- ' SECTION 26 0123 CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers,5 kVA or 5 ' HP and Larger: A minimum of 48-inches. 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5-inches. 3.03 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables are those installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified for future use with a tag. ' 3.04 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." B. Comply with TIA-569-B,Annex A,"Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM,"Firestopping"Chapter. 3.05 GROUNDING ' A. For data communication wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Bonding and Grounding(Earthing)"Chapter. B. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling,comply with requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.06 IDENTIFICATION ' A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify data and communications system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA-606-A; label printers shall use label stocks,laminating adhesives,and inks complying with UL 969. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical-fiber cable jacket materials for UL certification markings. ' Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement,cable termination,grounding and bonding,equipment and patch cords,and labeling of all components. ' 3. Test UTP cabling for direct current loop resistance, shorts,opens, intermittent faults,and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not after cross connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirementsin "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy(Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 4. Optical-Fiber Cable Tests: a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.0. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- I SECTION 26 05 23 CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 1) Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one direction according to TLA/EIA-526-14-A,Method B,One Reference Jumper. , 2) Attenuation test results for links shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA-568-C.0. B. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted ' using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide,or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files,print,and submit. C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. ' D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 26 05 23 ' 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -8- ' SECTION 26 05 26-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: a. Underground distribution grounding. b. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system. c. Foundation steel electrodes. d. The building electrical system shall be a grounded wye supplemented with equipment grounding.All shall be in accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ' A. As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control'Article. B. Field quality control reports. ' 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ' A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation,and maintenance manuals. 1. Include the following: a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells based on ' NFPA 70B. 1) Tests shall determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums,and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not. 2) Include recommended testing intervals. ' 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01. MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Burndy;Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2. Dossert;AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corp. 4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. ' 5. Galvan Industries,Inc.;Electrical Products Division,LLC. 6. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 7. ILSCO. ' 8. O-Z/Gedney;A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 9. Robbins Lightning,Inc. 10. Siemens Power Transmission&Distribution,Inc. 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. ' B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.03 CONDUCTORS ' A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned copper wire or cable type THHN with green color insulated for ' 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. ' 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor,1/4-inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No.4 or No.6 AWG,stranded conductor. ' 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8-inches wide and 1/16-inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape,braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; ' 1-5/8-inches wide and 1/16-inch thick. C. Grounding Bar: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4-inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8-inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 , for use in switchboards,600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC,impulse tested at 5000 V. 2.04 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which ' used and for specific types,sizes,and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy. , C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. ' D. Bus Bar Connectors: Mechanical type,cast silicon bronze,solderless compression type wire terminals, and long barrel,two(2)bolt connection to ground bus bar. ' 2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods:Copper-clad;3/4-inch by 10-feet. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 26 0126 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No.8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No.6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Grounding Bar: Install in computer room. 1. Install bar horizontally on insulated spacers 2-inches minimum from wall 6-inches above finished floor unless,otherwise indicated. C. Conductor Terminations and Connections: ' 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. Use UL listed grounding clamps. 3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. ' B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items,in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Receptacle circuits. 2. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. ' 3. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 4. Flexible raceway runs. 5. Armored and metal clad cable runs. ' 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain,impact,or damage. B. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: ' 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from grounding bar to metal water pipe in computer room. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug type connector to a pipe flange by ' using one of the lug bolts of the flange. C. Computer Room Raised Floor: Bond and ground stringers, building steel, electrical equipment, and incoming cooling piping. ' D. All electrically operated equipment shall be bonded to the ground conduit system. Install all grounding conductors in conduit and make connections readily accessible for inspection. ' E. Raised computer room floor shall be grounded to stringers, building steel, electrical equipment and incoming cooling piping as indicated on drawing details and plan drawings. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25 2014 MIAMI SHORES FL -3- SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1 B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, ' test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground resistance level is specified,at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. 4. Signal Reference Ground Grid(SRG): Test Computer Room and Data Center grounding system below raised floors. a. AC current measurements on at least two grounding and four bonding conductors. ' b. Impedance measurements of equipment grounding conductors on a.c. branch circuits and equipment enclosures. C. Resistance measurements between the building grounding electrodes and the SRG tie-in ' pints using an earth ground tester in a two-point configuration. d. The Computer Room/Data Center grounding system,below raised floor,shall be tested using a Fluke or equal digital multi-meter and a Biddle null-megger or equal instrument. e. The following measurements shall be recorded and test results forwarded to the Owner's ' field representative for the Owner's records: 1) AC current measurements on at least two grounding and four bonding conductors for the SRG. The AC current on any portion of the SRG shall be less than 250 Ma. If greater,notify owner's field representative for direction. ' 2) Impedance measurements of the equipment grounding conductors on AC branch circuits and equipment enclosures (minimum five from each PDU/CPC - coordinated with owner's field representative for additional measurement requirements, if any). ' The impedance of any equipment grounding conductor shall be less than 0.1 OHM. If greater,notify owner's field representative for direction. 3) Resistance measurements between the building grounding electrodes and the SRG (minimum two tie-in points - coordinated with owner's field representative for , additional measurement requirements, if any). Measurements shall be made using an earth ground tester in a two point configuration. Resistance shall be less than 0.1 OHM. If greater,notify owner's field representative for direction. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. t D. Prepare test and inspection reports for submission approval prior to Final approval. , E. Report measured ground resistances to Owner,Field Inspector, and Engineer in wiring that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. , 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA:3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm. 5. SRG a.c.current greater than 250 Ma. ' 6. SRG impedance greater than 0.1 ohm. 7. SRG resistance greater than 0.1 ohm. F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify ' Architect/Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. G. Excessive SRG testing values: If a.c.current,impedance,or resistance exceeds specified values,notify , Architect promptly and include recommendations to bring the system into conformance. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 26 05 29-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Adjust list below to suit Project. 2. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. ' 3. Construction requirements for concrete bases. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 26 05 48"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems"for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria. 3. Division 09. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. ' B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. ' 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering ' analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. ' B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment ' and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project,with a minimum structural safety factor of five(5)rimes the applied force. 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. ' B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. ' 4. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS , 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS Dl.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding , Code-Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. t PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 SUPPORT,ANCHORAGE,AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to the following: P Y rP � :g 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube&Conduit b. Cooper B-Line,Inc.;a division of Cooper Industries c. ERICO International Corp. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas&Betts Corp. f. Unistrut;Tyco International,Ltd. ' g. Wesanco,Inc. 3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. , 5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to M17MA-4. 6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Non-Metallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural grade, factory formed, glass fiber resin channels ' and angles with 9/16-inch diameter holes at a maximum of 8-inches o.c.,in at least 1 surface. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: ' 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube&Conduit. b: Cooper B-Line,Inc.;a division of Cooper Industries. C. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Ltd. d. Seasafe,Inc. 3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. , 4. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles,except metal items may be stainless steel. 5. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria. ' C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable iron hangers,clamps,and associated fittings, ' designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body , and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual ' conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36K steel plates, shapes,and bars;black and galvanized. G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Threaded steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head;a division of Illinois Too]Works,Inc. 3) MKT Fastening,LLC. ' 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co.,Inc.;Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical Expansion Anchors: Insert wedge type, zinc coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ' following: 1) Cooper B-Line,Inc.;a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co.,Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. ' 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head;a division of Illinois Tool Works,Inc. 5) MKT Fastening,LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type,hex head,and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC,and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be'/4-inch in diameter. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY . BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in fixture without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. D. Supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving ' branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1,EMT may be supported by openings through structure members,as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be ' adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. , 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry:Approved toggle type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors,powder actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard weight concrete 4-inches thick of greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4-inches thick. 6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M,with lock washers and nuts. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. ' 3.04 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after ' erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. 'Comply with SSPC- PA 1 requirements for touching up field painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. ' END OF SECTION 26 05 29 1 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIANII SHORES,FL -5- ' SECTION 26 05 33-RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits,tubing,and fittings. 2. Non-metal conduits,tubing,and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface raceways. ' 5. Boxes,enclosures,and cabinets. B. Related Sections: ' 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section 2. 07 84 13"Penetration Fireproofing." 3. 26 05 29"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." ' 4. 26 05 44"Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 5. 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems." 1.02 DEFINITIONS aA. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. ' B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. E. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. ' F. RNC: Rigid non-metallic conduit. G. MC Cable: Metal clad cable. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways,wireways and fittings, floor boxes,hinged cover enclosures,and cabinets. Include specifications,installation instructions,and general recommendations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installer:A firm or individual with not less than three(3)years of successful experience in installation f o raceways similar to those required for this project. ' C. NEMA Compliance:Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - 1 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES'FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS D. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceways systems; and provide products and components that have been UL listed and ' labeled. E. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUITS,TUBING,AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following 1. AFC Cable Systems,Inc. 2. Allied Tube&Conduit;a Tyco International Ltd.Co. 3. Anamet Electrical,Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Co. ' 5. O-Z/Gedney;a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. Picoma Industries,a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products,Inc. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. , 9. Southwire Co. 10. Thomas&Betts Corp. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corp. 12. Wheatland Tube Company;a division of John Maneely Co. B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. C. GRC: With threaded couplings,comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. IMC: With threaded couplings,comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.' E. EMT: With screw type and compression type couplings,comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. F. FMC: Comply with UL 1;zinc coated steel. , 1. Galvanized steel.Provide ground bonding conductor full length of circuit inside conduit. Fittings shall be of same manufacture as conduit. G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. t 1. Bonded type,constructed of single strip,continuous interlocked double wrapped steel,galvanized inside and out, with copper bonding tape ground bonding conductor inside conduit in addition to integral bonding tape.Flex conduit below computer raised flooring shall be Electri-flex"Liquitite" type LA(or equivalent)with blue outer jacket. H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous(Classified)Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type:Screw Type and Compression Type. ' 3. Expansion Fittings: Steel to match conduit type,complying with UL 651,rated for environmental conditions where installed,and including flexible external bonding jumper. 4. Couplings and Connectors (EMT): Extruded steel, Compression Type to be used below raised ' floor systems or in wet locations use rain tight type, employing a split corrugated ring and BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 26 OS 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS tightening nut. Provide pre-insulated bushings in all connectors. Screw Type can be used in all ' other areas. 5. Unions: Erickson couplings. Running threads will not be allowed. I. Joint Compound for IMC or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70 b Po PP � y authorities having ' jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.02 NON-METALLIC CONDUITS,TUBING,AND FITTINGS 1 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems,Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical,Inc. 3. Amco Corporation 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp. 6. Condux International,Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Co. 8. Kraloy. ' 9. Lamson&Sessions;Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA,Inc. 11. RACO;a Hubbell Co. 12. Thomas&Betts Corp. B. Listing and Labeling: Non-metallic conduits,tubing,and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. D. RNC:Type EPC-40-PVC,complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. ' E. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3;match to conduit or tubing type and material. F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, ' respectively,when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,Subpart D(EPA Method 24). 2.03 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following: 1. Cooper B-Line,Inc. 2. Hoffman;a Pentair Co. ' 3. Mono-Systems,Inc. 4. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Description: Sheet metal,complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250,Type 4 unless otherwise indicated, ' and sized according to NFPA 70. C. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. D. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings,offsets,elbows,expansion joints,adapters,hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete ' system. 1. Wireway Covers: Screw cover type unless otherwise indicated. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.04 SURFACE RACEWAYS ' A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. ' B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by the Owner. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ' following: a. Wiremold/Legrand. b. Walkerduct. 2.05 TELE-POWER POLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following: 1. Mono-Systems,Inc. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Wiremold/Legrand. , B. Material: Galvanized steel with ivory baked enamel finish C. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices, mounting ' materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as required for complete system. 2.06 BOXES,ENCLOSURES,AND CABINETS ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following:' 1. Adalet ' 2. Cooper Technologies Company;Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 5. FSR Inc. ' 6. Hoffman;a Pentair Co. 7. Hubbell Incorporated;Killark Division. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. , 10. Mono-Systems,Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney;a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO;a Hubbell Co. , 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures;a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas&Betts Corp. 17. Wiremold/Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes,Enclosures,and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures,and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1,aluminum, Type FD,with gasketed , cover. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. ' F. Cast-Metal Access,Pull,and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,cast aluminum with gasketed cover. ' G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. H. Device Box Dimensions:4-inches square by 2-1/8-inches deep. I. Gangable boxes are prohibited. J. Hinged Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250,Type 1 with continuous hinge cover ' with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION ' A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit:GRC or IMC. 2. Concealed Conduit,Aboveground:GRC or IMC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC,Type EPC-40-PVC,direct buried or concrete encased. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid,or Motor Driven Equipment):LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures,Aboveground: NEMA 250,Type 3R. t B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed,Not Subject to Physical Damage:EMT. 2. Exposed,Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage:EMT. ' 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts,forklifts,and pallet handling units. ' c. Mechanical rooms. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions:EMT and MC cable 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric ' Solenoid,or Motor Driven Equipment): FMC,except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations:GRC or IMC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. ' 8. Surface Metal Raceway: In finished areas,where shown on drawings. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. ' D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. ' 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints,nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. ' 3. EMT: Use screw type,steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS E. Do not install aluminum conduits,boxes,or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. ' G. Do not install non-metallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120°F. 3.02 INSTALLATION ' A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with ' NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep raceways at least 6-inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install ' horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for , hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. ' F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls,ceilings,and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. t G. Support conduit within 12-inches of enclosures to which attached. H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: ' 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size,parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. ' 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2-inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved b Architect for each P Y PP Y specific location. t 5. Change from ENT to GRC or IMC before rising above floor. I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT,IMC,or RMC for raceways. ' 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to ' protect conductors including conductors smaller than No.4 AWG. K. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or ' cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. , L. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. M. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the t locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MAW SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS N. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a ' guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-1b. tensile strength. Leave at least 12-inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground ' raceways designated.as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. P. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor type devices at intervals not exceeding 48- inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support ' methods. Q. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover ' plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. ' R. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations,such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. S. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. T. Expansion Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change ' may exceed 30°F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25-feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100°F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100-feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the ' following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125°F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155°F temperature change. C. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125°F temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s)that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041-inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s)that provide ' expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078-inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. ' 5. Install each expansion joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. 6. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. ' U. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72-inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires,equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement;and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. ' 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS V. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box ' unless otherwise indicated. W. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a rain tight , connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. ' Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. Z. Support boxes of three (3) gangs or more from more than one (1) side by spanning two (2) framing ' members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. , BB. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. CC. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. , 3.03 SPECIFIC INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Any minor changes in the location of raceways from those shown on the drawings shall be made without extra charge if so directed by the Architect/Engineer before installation. B. Coordinate with other work including metal and concrete work,as necessary to interface installation of ' electrical raceways and components. C. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. ' D. Where a conduit enters a box or other fitting through a knockout, an approved double lock nut and insulating bushing must be provided. All conduits shall be equipped with insulating bushings at all outlets,pull boxes,panel,etc. E. Install liquid tight flexible conduit for connection where subjected to one or more of the following conditions: 1. Below raised floor throughout computer room and computer room ancillary rooms. 2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. 3. Corrosive atmosphere. 4. Subjected to water spray. ' 5. Subjected to dripping oil,grease,or water. F. Flexible conduit connections to motors shall include one 90°bend. G. All conduits shall be cleaned by pulling a swab through the conduit before pulling in wires. ' H. Branch raceway runs are shown schematically. Except where exact routing is indicated,branch circuit ' raceways may be altered,providing actual locations are properly entered on the"As-built"drawings. I. Conduit connections between outlet boxes less than 24-inches apart on opposite sides of a wall shall be made with a loop of flexible conduit(no nipples). ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -8- 1 ' SECTION 26 0133 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS J. Provide roof jack at all roof penetrations. Coordinate roof jack type and installation with General ' Contractor.Equipment must be compatible with required roof guarantee. K. Conduits or raceways that penetrate the computer room boundary at any location other than through an RF line filter shall be bonded at the penetration.The bonds shall be#2 copper,unless detailed otherwise on the drawings,and connected to the equipment potential ground systems. L. Support conductors in vertical raceways in accordance with NEC 300-19. ' M. Flexible Conduit: 1. General Equipment: Flexible plastic jacketed with liquid tight connectors(3/4-inch minimum). 2. Below raised floor computer equipment Branch wiring flexible liquid tight metallic conduit for computer grade identification(1/2 minimum). Feeders to UPSs or PDUs shall be EMT. N. Where groups of vertical and horizontal exposed parallel conduits occur, they shall be braced with ' clamps and brackets equal in quality to those manufactured by Unistrut. O. The end of all conduits shall be carefully reamed, and shall be made to butt in the center of the coupling. The use of running threads for conduit connections at couplings, fittings, or boxes shall be ' prohibited. P. Make galvanized conduit joints and connections thoroughly water tight and rustproof using "KOPR/Shield",as manufactured by Thomas&Betts Co.,Inc.,or equal. Q. All conduit work in areas where hung ceilings are provided shall be run concealed in the ceilings. All vertical conduit drops to switches, receptacles, or outlets shall be run in the walls, unless specifically noted otherwise on the plans or specified herein. R. Conduit work in areas where no hung ceiling is provided shall be run exposed unless specifically noted otherwise.In exposed and hung ceilings,all lighting,receptacle and switch branch circuits shall be run in EMT.A six foot whip of"MC" flexible conduit shall be connected to lighting fixtures.In stud walls, vertical drops shall be"MC"flexible conduit.In finished or unfinished block walls,vertical drops shall be EMT conduit run in the walls. ' S. Conduits entering outlet boxes,cabinets,and sheet metal enclosures when not terminated in a threaded hub,shall be secured in place by two(2)locknuts and terminated with an insulated bushing. t T. All conduit fittings, unless specified otherwise herein, shall be manufactured by Appleton Electric Company,or equal.Conduit fittings to liquid tight conduit shall be liquid tight,compression fittings. U. All metal conduit enclosures, and raceways for conductors shall be mechanically jointed together to form a continuous electrical conductor, and shall be so connected to all electrical boxes, cabinets,and fittings as to provide effective electrical continuity,and firm mechanical assembly. V. All conduits and fittings shall be carefully examined before being installed,and all pieces having splits, ' breaks,blisters,or other defects,shall not be used. W. All conduits shall be so installed so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, ceiling mounted lighting ' fixtures, etc. A minimum separation of 6-inches shall be required where conduit is run parallel to or across steam,hot waxer,or condensate pipes. X. In no case shall conduit be fastened to other pipes or installed in such a manner as to prevent the ready ' removal of other pipes for repair or replacement. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MANII SHORES,FL -9- SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Y. Spacing of straps, clamps or hangers for supporting rigid conduits from ceiling or walls shall not be greater than distance specified: ' Conduit Size Spacing of Supports Up to 1-inch 6-feet ' 1'/a to 1%2-inches 8-feet 2,2%z,3,and 4-inches 10-feet Z. Supports for electrical metallic tubing shall be as per Article 342.30 of NEC. ' A.A. All conduit fittings 2-inches and larger shall be the Mogul type. BB. Liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit shall be "Sealtite" type UA, or "O.Z." type UAG, or approved equal for general equipment. Computer grade "blue" liquid - tight flexible metal conduit shall be Anaconda Sealtite, Type CW, or approved equal for*general equipment. Computer grade, liquid tight, , flexible metal conduit shall be Anaconda Sealtight, type CW blue, or approved equal. Underfloor sealtite and watertight receptacle shall be a complete assembly that is UL (ULC) Listed and conform with NEC 645. , CC. All bending of conduit shall be done with an approved bending device, and any conduit crushed or deformed in bending shall be replaced.All bends shall be avoided so far as possible and all unavoidable bends and offsets shall be made with the largest radius possible. All 90° bends in conduit larger than one inch size shall be manufactured elbow and when four inch size and larger shall be long radius elbows.No more than three 90°bends shall be allowed in any one conduit run.When more bends are necessary,a pull box shall be installed.Pull boxes shall be installed every 100-feet. DD. Critical control systems such as EPO systems, etc. shall not utilize flexible conduit.EMT only shall be ' used-no substitutes shall be allowed. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES , A. Mount outlet boxes flush in areas other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms,and above removable ceilings. ' B. Adjust position of outlets in finished masonry walls to suit masonry course lines. C. Do not install boxes back-to-back in same wall. Coordinate cutting of masonry walls to achieve neat ' openings for boxes. Use rotary cutting equipment to cut masonry work for installation of electrical fittings. D. Locate boxes in masonry walls so that only a corner need be cut from masonry units. ' E. Do not use sectional or handy boxes unless specifically requested.For boxes mounted in exterior walls, make sure that there is insulation behind outlet boxes to prevent condensation in boxes. ' F. For below raised floor boxes,use UL approved,liquid tight,threaded EMT,Compression fittings. 3.05 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS ' A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 44"Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL _ 10- ' SECTION 26 0133 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3.06 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13"Penetration Fireproofing." ' 3.07 PROTECTION t A. Protect coatings,finishes,and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. ' 3.08 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways, remove burrs, dirt, and ' construction debris. ' END OF SECTION 26 05 33 t ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL ' PART 1 -GENERAL SECTION 26 05 36-CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Ladder cable trays. 2. Trough cable trays. B. Related Sections: ' 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 26 05 26"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." ' 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. ' 1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray. 1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays,including plans,elevations,and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice plate connectors, expansion joint assemblies,straight lengths,and fittings. ' C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ' A. Field quality control reports. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design cable tray supports and seismic bracing. B. Seismic Performance: Cable trays and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "cable trays will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes in cable tray installed outdoors. 1. Temperature Change: 120°F,ambient; 180°F,material surfaces. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS t 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS ' A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location, application,and grounding. 1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer. ' B. Sizes and Configurations: See the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements for types,materials,sizes,and configurations. C. Structural Performance: See articles on individual cable tray types for specific values for the following parameters: 1. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the indicated ' support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to NEMA VE 1. 2. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray. 3. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities. 2.03 LADDER CABLE TRAYS , A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Allied Tube&Conduit;a Tyco International Ltd.Co. 2. Chalfant Manufacturing Co. 3. Cooper B-Line,Inc. 4. Mono-Systems,Inc. ' 5. MP Husky. 6. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA,Inc. 7. GS Metals. B. Description: ' 1. Configuration: Two I-beam side rails with transverse rungs welded to side rails. 2. Rung Spacing:6-inches o.c. , 3. Radius Fitting Rung Spacing: 9-inches(at center of tray's width). 4. Minimum Cable-Bearing Surface for Rungs: 7/8-inch width with radius edges. 5. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of side rails. 6. Structural Performance of Each Rung: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load, with a ' safety factor of 1.5,plus a 200-1b concentrated load,when tested according to NEMA VE 1. 7. Minimum Usable Load Depth: As indicated. 8. Straight Section Lengths: As indicated except where shorter lengths are required to facilitate tray assembly. ' 9. Width: As indicated. 10. Fitting Minimum Radius:24-inches. 11. Class Designation: Comply with NEMA VE 1 Class 20C. gn P Y ' 12. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts. 13. Hardware and Fasteners: Steel,zinc plated according to ASTM B 633. 14. Splice Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading capacity of cable tray. ' 2.04 TROUGH CABLE TRAYS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: , 1. Allied Tube&Conduit;a Tyco International Ltd.Co. 2. Chalfant Manufacturing Co. 3. Cooper B-Line,Inc. ' 4. Mono-Systems,Inc. 5. MP Husky. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW:.JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS a 6. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA,Inc. 7. GS Metals. B. Description: 1. Configuration: Two (2) longitudinal members (side rails) with a solid sheet over rungs exposed on the interior of the trough,or corrugated sheet with both edges welded to the side rails. 2. Rung Spacing: Rungs or corrugations shall be spaced a maximum of 6-inches o.c. and have a minimum flat bearing surface of 2-inches. ' 3. Radius Fitting Rung Spacing: 9-inches at center of tray's width. 4. Structural Performance: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load,with a safety factor of 1.5, plus a 200-1b concentrated load,when tested according to NEMA VE 1. 5. Minimum Usable Load Depth: As indicated. ' 6. Straight Section Lengths: As indicated except where shorter lengths are required to facilitate tray assembly. 7. Width: As indicated. 8. Fitting Minimum Radius:24-inches. ' 9. Class Designation: Comply with NEMA VE 1,Class 20C. 10. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange lockouts. 11. Splicing Assembly Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading t capacity of cable tray. 12. Hardware and Fasteners: Steel,zinc plated according to ASTM B 633. 2.05 MATERIALS AND FINISHES ' A. Steel: 1. Straight Section and Fitting Side Rails and Rungs: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical ' properties of ASTM A 1011/A 1011M,SS,Grade 33. 2. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A 1011/A I0I IM,HSLAS,Grade 50,Class 1. 3. Fasteners: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 510/A 510M, Grade 1008. ' 4. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. a. Standard: Comply with ASTM A123/A123 M,Class B2. b. Hardware:Chromium zinc plated,ASTM F 1136. B. Aluminum: 1. Materials: Alloy 6063-T6 according to ANSI H35.1/H 35.1M for extruded components, and Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-T6 according to ANSI H35.1/H 35.1M for fabricated parts. 2. Hardware:Chromium zinc plated steel,ASTM F 1136. ' 3. Hardware for Aluminum Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel,Type 316,ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594. ' 2.06 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: Tees,crosses,risers, elbows,and other fittings as indicated,of same materials and finishes as cable tray. ' B. Covers:Solid type made of same materials and with same finishes as cable tray. ' C. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray. D. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2. ' B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners,hold down clips, support systems,barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers,tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters,covers,and bonding. ' C. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible for inspection and adjustment. ' D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays. E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates;use four square neck carriage bolts and locknuts. ' F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints. G. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide clearances shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load carrying capacity of the tray rungs. H. Construct supports from channel members,threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by cable , tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall bracket form,as required by application. I. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading. ' J. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 2. Do not install more than one cable tray splice between supports. ' K. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard. ' L. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings. M. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings. , N. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables. O. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data , processing;or of different insulation levels,such as 600,5000,and 15 000 V. P. Install permanent covers,if used,after installing cable. Install cover clamps according to NEMA VE 2. Q. Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy duty clamps. R Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation. , BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 26 0136 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ' 3.02 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 26"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Cable trays with electrical power conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers. C. Cable trays with single conductor power conductors shall be bonded together with a grounding conductor run in the tray along with the power conductors and bonded to the tray at 72-inch intervals. The grounding conductor shall be sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors,"and Article 392,"Cable Trays." D. When using epoxy or powder coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely remove ' coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing splice-to- grounding-bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials recommended by cable tray manufacturer. ' E. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized according to NFPA 70,Article 250.122"Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors." 3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected. ' B. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18-inches. C. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables ' independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 72-inches. D. Tie MI cables down every 36-inches where required to provide a 2-hour fire rating and every 72-inches elsewhere. E. In existing construction,remove inactive or dead cables from cable trays. ' 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the connections ' are completed. B. Connect raceways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: ' 1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized,survey for compliance with requirements. 2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp comers,protuberances in cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- iL SECTION 26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data processing circuits are separated from power ' circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays. 4. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the cable tray. 5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials,trash of any description, and any blockage of ' tray ventilation. 6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas. 7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers. 8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware. 9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding;verify that all takeoff ' raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1-ohm. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. ' 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed cable trays and cables. , 1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk of damage is over. ' 2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer. 3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable tray manufacturer. ' END OF SECTION 26 05 36 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- ' SECTION 26 05 44-SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve seal systems. 3. Silicone sealants. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 07 84 13"Penetration Firestopping." 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SLEEVES A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Cast Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. 1 B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw fastening the sleeve to the board. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. ' 2. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50-inches and with no side larger than 16-inches,thickness shall be 0.052-inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50-inches or more and one or more sides larger ' than 16-inches,thickness shall be 0.138-inch. 2.02 SLEEVE SEAL SYSTEMS A. Description: Modular sealing device,designed for field assembly,to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products&Systems,Inc. b. CALPICO,Inc. C. Metraflex Company(The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator,Inc. e. Proco Products,Inc. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING r 2. Sealing Elements:EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. ' 3. Pressure Plates:Carbon steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.03 SILICONE SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealants: Single component, silicone based, neutral curing eiastomeric sealants of grade r indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone based liquid elastomers that,when mixed,expand and cure in place to produce a flexible,non-shrinking foam. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations. ' C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable,using joint sealant appropriate for size,depth,and location of joint. b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while r curing. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2-inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: ' 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. E. Roof Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot type ' flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. F. Aboveground,Exterior Wall Penetrations:Seal penetrations using cast iron pipe sleeves and mechanical r sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve-seals. r BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 , MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- r ' SECTION 26 0144 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING G. Underground, Exterior Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve seal system. 3.02 SLEEVE SEAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building. B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that ' cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. END OF SECTION 26 05 44 r BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- ' SECTION 26 05 48-VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1—GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Spring isolators. 3. Restrained spring isolators. 4. Channel support systems. 5. Restraint cables. 6. Hanger rod stiffeners. 7. Anchorage bushings and washers. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. The IBC: International Building Code. B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: F. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: III. a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. ' b. Component Response Modification Factor: 5.0. C. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5. 3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods(0.2 Second). ' 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Include rated load,rated deflection,and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. 3. Restrained Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal,vertical,and combined loads. B. Delegated Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation,seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints. 1 a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other electrical Sections for equipment mounted outdoors. 2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices. 3. Field fabricated supports. 4. Seismic Restraint Details: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include ' calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. ' Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. C. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member.of ICC-ES, ' showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval(tests or calculations). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more , stringent. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,"Structural Welding Code ' -Steel." C. Seismic restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear ' anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD,preapproval by ICC-ES,or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If pre-approved ratings are not available,submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations(including ' combining shear and tensile loads)to support seismic restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. D. Comply with NFPA 70. ' PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: ' 1. Ace Mountings Co.,Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company,Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation. 4. Isolation Technology,Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co.,Inc. 8. Vibration Isolation. 9. Vibration Mountings&Controls,Inc. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 26 0148 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS B. Pads Types 8,9,and 10: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Type 8: Resilient Material: Oil and water resistant hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass. 2. Type 9: Resilient Material: Oil and water resistant neoprene or rubber. Use only neoprene in oily ' areas. 3. Type 10: Multiple layers. C. Spring Isolators Type 2: Freestanding,laterally stable,open spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load,fully compressed,without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch thick, rubber isolator ' pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. ' D. Restrained Spring Isolators Type 3: Freestanding,steel,open spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being ' removed; factory drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. ' 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,without deformation or failure. ' 2.02 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company,Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Cooper B-Line,Inc.;a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Hilti Inc. ' 5. Loos&Co.;Seismic Earthquake Division. 6. Mason Industries. 7. TOLCO Incorporated;a brand of NIBCO Inc. 8. Unistrut;Tyco International,Ltd. B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop or field fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel ' channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion resistant coating;and rated in tension, compression,and torsion forces. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles,brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service, and with a minimum 1 of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted support system sleeve with internally bolted connections or reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods. ' F. Bushings for Floor Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings,and matched to type and size of anchors and studs. 1 G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices. 1 H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One piece,molded,oil and water resistant neoprene,with a flat washer face. 1. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled in and stud wedge or female wedge type in zinc coated steel for interior 1 applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight(8)times diameter. 1 J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. , Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. 2.03 FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory assembled and tested equipment before ' shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 1 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic control devices to indicate capacity range. 1 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic control devices for compliance ' with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. 1 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 APPLICATIONS ' A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES. 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 1 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- 1 ' ' SECTION 26 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to ' receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support and Seismic Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated,select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 3.03 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints: 1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment. 2. Install resilient,bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125-inch. 3. Install seismic restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC- ES providing required submittals for component. ' B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall mounted equipment,arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment mounting channels are attached to wall. ' C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated,anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams,at upper truss chords of bar joists,or at concrete members. D. Drilled-in Anchors: ' 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. ' Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons,electrical and telecommunications conduit,and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete,mortar,or grout has achieved full design strength 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward ' the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque,using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior applications. ' 3.04 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways,cables,wireways,cable trays,and busways where they cross seismic joints,where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight. ' B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete,adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 26 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. ' D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION 26 05 48 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 26 05 53-IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ' PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways 2. Identification of power and control cables 3. Identification for conductors 4. Underground line warning tape 5. Warning labels and signs 6. Instruction signs 7. Equipment identification labels B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Identification Schedule: -An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. t 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. ' B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers,shall comply with UL 969. 1.04 COORDINATION ' A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25 2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2.01 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color ' field for each raceway size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: ' 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible ' label laminated with a clear, weather and chemical resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. D. Snap Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, ' preprinted, color coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 2.02 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS ' A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. ' C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. , 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING"with 3-inch high letters on 20- inch centers. D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather and chemical resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2-inches wide; compounded for outdoor use. 2.03 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color t field for each raceway and cable size. B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Pre-printed, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather and chemical resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Snap Around Labels: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color coded acrylic sleeve, with ' diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 2.04 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3-mils thick by 1 to 2- ' inches wide. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 26 01 11 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Pre-printed,flexible,label laminated with a clear,weather and chemical resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Snap Around Labels:Slit,pre-tensioned,flexible,preprinted,color coded acrylic sleeve,with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. D. Snap Around,Color Coding Bands: Slit,pre-tensioned,flexible,solid colored acrylic sleeve,2-inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by ' gripping action. 2.05 FLOOR MARKING TAPE A. 2-inches wide,5-mil pressure sensitive vinyl tape,with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 2.06 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical utility lines. ' 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids,alkalis,and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE,HIGH VOLTAGE. ' C. Tag: 1. Pigmented polyolefin, bright colored, continuous printed on one side with the inscription of the utility,compounded for direct burial service. ' 2. Thickness: 4 mils. 3. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq.ft. 4. 3-inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 301bf,and 2500 psi. ' 2.07 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover,door,or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. ' C. Warning label and sign shall include,but are not limited to,the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: 'DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION-AREA IN FRONT OF ' ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.08 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed,in black,by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8-inch. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE-25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2.09 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Self-Adhesive,Engraved,Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed,with white letters on a dark gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8-inch. B. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White ' letters on a dark gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8-inch. C. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1- ' inch. 2.10 CABLE TIES ' A. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing,UV stabilized,one piece,self-locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16-inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73°F(23°C),According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. ' 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284'F. 5. Color: Black. , 2.11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of marker): 1. W.H.Brady Co. 2. National Band and Tag Company 3. Seton Name Plate Company ' 4. Or approved equal. 2.12 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in electrical identification ' work with corresponding designations shown,specified,or scheduled. Provide numbers,lettering,and wording as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/ ' maintenance of electrical systems and equipment. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. , B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. , C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application,using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to , the location and substrate. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 26 0111 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS F. System Identification Color Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color coding band shall ' completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs,and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. ' G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general purpose type,except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. H. Underground Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8-inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16-inches overall. ' 1. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. ' J. Provide new nameplates for existing equipment(if any)to conform to requirements for new. K. Nameplate Mounting: 1 1. Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: Mount at top in center of line-up. 2. Panelboards: Mount inside door, on dead front in center, above circuit breakers, unless panelboard is located in a utility type room, then install nameplate on outside of panelboard in center above door. 3. Disconnect switches,relays, contactors, and time clocks: mount nameplate on outside of cabinet, in center near top. 4. Other:Install nameplate in location as directed. ' L. Install circuit directories in all panelboards affected by this contract. 1. Panelboards: Mount in frame under plastic cover, on backside of door. Schedule shall show circuit service for each circuit breaker using"Owner's"room numbers. Spares and spaces shall be ' written in pencil. M. Apply cable/conductor identification on each cable and conductor in each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or communication/signal system are present,except where another form of identification (such as color coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar field established identification for project electrical work. ' N. Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical systems and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets, and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed,provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes. ' O. Install signs at locations indicated or,where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to surface with fasteners,except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate the surface. ' P. Warning signs shall be installed at the entrances to rooms and spaces in which electrical systems or equipment is installed. BARRY UNIVERSITY _ RS TY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707 2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE ' A. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl or Snap around labels. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals. B. Accessible Raceways and Metal Clad Cables,600 V or Less,for Service,Feeder,and Branch Circuits ' More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label or self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals. C. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: ' 1. Emergency Power 2. Power 3. UPS D. Power Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction ' boxes,manholes,and handholes,use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below ' for ungrounded service,feeder and branch circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG,if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. ' 3) Phase C: Blue. c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: , 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. ' d. Field Applied, Color Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6-inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. ' E. Power Circuit Conductor Identification,More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults,pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation. ' F. Install instructional sign including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive film type labels. G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field installed alarm, control, and ' signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull ' points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. H. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground line warning tape for power, lighting, , communication,and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Limit use of underground line warning tape to direct buried cables. , 2. Install underground line warning tape for both direct buried cables and cables in raceway. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- ' SECTION 26 0111 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS I. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access ' to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive ' warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. ' 3. Apply to exterior of door,cover,or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including,but not limited to,the following: a. Power transfer switches. ' b. Controls with external control power connections. K. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. L. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red ' background with minimum 3/8-inch high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer or load shedding. M. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams,schedules,and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, ' communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required,use labels 2-inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label or Stenciled legend 4- inches high. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. ' 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. ' e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder,and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. ' h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. i. Motor control centers. j. Enclosed switches. ' k. Enclosed circuit breakers. 1. Enclosed controllers. m. Variable speed controllers. n. Push button stations. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7- SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS t o. Power transfer equipment. p. Contactors. ' q. Remote controlled switches,dimmer modules,and control devices. r. Battery inverter units. s. Battery racks. t. Power generating units. u. Monitoring and control equipment. v. UPS equipment. END OF SECTION 26 05 53 , 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 , DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -8- 1 SECTION 26 05 73-OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Services of a qualified professional engineer to perform computer based,fault current,overcurrent ' protective device coordination and Arc Flash studies with labels. Protective-devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study. 2. Coordination of series rated devices is permitted where indicated on Drawings. 3. The short circuit study to be based on two scenarios: a. The normal worst case(generator or utility). b. The worst case combined generator and utility in closed transition. 4. The complete study,when submitted,shall be signed and sealed by the Performing Engineer. The ' Contractor shall also provide the appropriate Arc Flash signage for all electrical panels and switchboards. B. Related Sections: ' 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems." ' 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS t A. Product Data: Computer software program to be used for studies. 1. Report shall be submitted for review and approval at the completion of the short circuit and coordination study. The report shall contain all of the items required by these specifications. 2. Time current coordination curve sheets may be reduced to 8Y2-inches x 11-inches size for ' inclusion in the report. However, full size curve sheets shall be provided,not necessarily bound, with each copy of the report. 3. The contractor shall warrant that errors and omissions in the study or report shall be corrected without charge to the Owner when so found within twelve (12) months from acceptance of the ' report. 4. Copies of the approved study shall be included in the manuals required by.Division 01,Section 01 77 00"Closeout Procedures." ' B. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for system protective devices has been completed. Submittals shall be in digital form. 1. Coordination study input data,including completed computer program input data sheets. ' 2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports. 3. Coordination Study Report. 4. Arc Flash Study Report. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For coordination study specialist. ' B. Product Certificates: For coordination study and fault current study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399. 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 05 73 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software ' algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable. B. Coordination Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer ' software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices. 1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the ' study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer. C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short circuit currents and coordination time intervals. , D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS , A. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: , 1. CGI CYME 2. EDSA Micro Corporation 3. ESA Inc. 4. Operation Technology,Inc. ' 5. SKM Systems Analysis,Inc. 2.02 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS ' A. Comply with IEEE 399. B. Analytical features of fault current study computer software program shall include"mandatory," "very ' desirable,"and"desirable"features as listed in IEEE 399. C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time current characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all ' overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer generated, time current coordination plots. 1. Optional Features: ' a. Arcing faults. b. Simultaneous faults. c. Explicit negative sequence. d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMIINATION ' A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution ' system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 26 0171 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study. 3.02 POWER SYSTEM DATA ' A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study: 1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other electrical Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation_tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data,and recommended device settings. 2. Impedance of utility service entrance. ' 3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard copy and electronic copy formats, showing the following: a. Circuit breaker and fuse current ratings and types. b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. ' C. Transformer kilovolt amperes,primary and secondary voltages,connection type,impedance, and X/R ratios. d. Generator kilovolt amperes,size,voltage,and source impedance. e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material, insulation, and length. f. Busway ampacity and impedance. g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1. ' 4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross referenced with tag numbers on diagram,showing the following: a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping. ' b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability. C. Motor full load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time,type of start, and ' thermal damage curve. d. Generator thermal damage curve. e. Ratings,types,and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility company. ' g. Time current characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. h. Manufacturer,frame size,interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical,ampere or current sensor rating, long time adjustment range, short time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers. ' i. Manufacturer and type, ampere .tap adjustment range, time delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays. ' j. Panelboards,switchboards,motor control center ampacity,and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical. 3.03 FAULT CURRENT STUDY(SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY) A. The Contractor shall provide a short circuit study for the electrical distribution system.The study shall include the calculation of three phase bolted fault values and phase-to-ground fault values at every point of application of a protective device on the system.Momentary and interrupting duty values shall be calculated. The study shall be for short circuit current at each of the following: 1. Switchgear and switchboard bus. 2. Medium voltage controller. ' 3. Motor control center. 4. Distribution panelboard. 5. Branch circuit panelboard. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 05 73 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY li 6. Protective device. 7. UPS system. ' 8. UPS module. 9. PDU B. The short circuit study report must include a complete index of fault bus identifications. A system ' diagram indicating system configuration and the fault bus locations shall be provided in the study. C. Provide a complete print out of the results of the calculations. ' 1. Momentary duty fault values shall be tabulated for both three phase and phase-to-ground faults including:bus identification,bus L-L voltage,symmetrical fault current values, symmetrical fault kVA values,and X/R ratio at each fault bus. 2. Interrupting duty fault values shall be tabulated for both three phase and phase-to-ground faults ' including:bus values,symmetrical fault kVA values,X/R ratio at each fault bus,asymmetry factor at each fault bus,and the associated asymmetrical fault value at the.bus. D. Manufacturer's published interrupting/withstand capabilities shall be compared to calculated fault , current values to determine acceptability of each protective device installed in the system. Tabulation shall be provided detailing the comparison. E. The. short circuit study shall report any deficiencies in interrupting capabilities and include recommendations for correcting such deficiencies. F. The intention of the design of the generator/utility transfers at the MS switchboards is to provide ' closed transition soft loading.The calculated fault current must be made at the worst case of the utility and both generators in parallel. G. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 141,IEEE 241,and IEEE 242. ' 1. Transformers: a. ANSI C57.12.10. ' b. IEEE C57.12.00. 2. Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010. 3. Low Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1. 4. Low Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46. , H. Study Report: 1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram. , I. Equipment Evaluation Report: 1. For overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than ' calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current,apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground fault currents. Ensure that short circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 3.04 COORDINATION STUDY(PROTECTIVE DEVICES) ' A. The contractor shall provide a protective device coordination study for all protective devices installed , on the electrical distribution system. BARRY UNIVERSITY _ BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' SECTION 26 0173 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY B. The coordination study shall begin with the first upstream utility protective device and continue down ' through the distribution system to the first device on each feeder that does not have adjustable trip characteristics. C. All generator and utility protective relay settings must also be provided. These settings must be coordinated and approved by the local Utilities. D. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written report using ' results of fault current study. Comply with IEEE 399. 1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short circuit currents. 2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short circuit currents. ' 3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground fault currents. E. Comply with IEEE 141,IEEE 241,IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals. F. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. Device shall not operate in response to the following: a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full load current or forced air cooled, full load current, whichever is specified for that transformer. C. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusual loading or emergency conditions. ' 2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00,for fault currents. G. Motors served by voltages more than 480V or 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620. ' H. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay ' protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short circuit current. ' 1. Coordination Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study: 1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices: ' a. Device tag. b. Relay current transformer ratios;and tap,time dial,and instantaneous pickup values. C. Circuit breaker sensor rating;and long time,short time,and instantaneous settings. d. Fuse current rating and type. e. Ground fault relay pickup and time delay settings. 2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information: a. Device tag. b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. ' C. Three phase and single phase damage points for each transformer. d. No damage,melting,and clearing curves for fuses. e. Cable damage curves. £ Transformer inrush points. g. Maximum fault current cutoff point. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- i 1 SECTION 26 05 73 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 1 J. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices. 3.05 ARC FLASH STUDY A. The resultant data from the short circuit coordination study should be fed into the equations described by either NFPA 70E-2000 or IEEE Standard 1584-2002..These equations will produce the necessary ' flash protection boundary distances and incident energy to determine the minimum PPE requirement. B. Perform an NFPA 70E arc flash analysis of the entire range of possible short circuit values and all likely operating conditions. 1 C. Determine the worst case values for each component or bus. D. Arc Flash Study Report: Prepare a written report in tabular format indicating the following results of 1 arc flash study: 1. Device tag. 2. Available short circuit current used. 1 3. Available arc flash energy. 4. Category of PPE required to safely work on the equipment. 5. Which set of equations was used to determine the available energy. 6. Working distance used in the calculation. 1 7. Flash protection boundary(the threshold where the available energy exceeds 1.2 cal/cm2). E. Warning Labels: Refer to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Provide labels to the following equipment: 1. Switchboards. 2. Panelboards. 3. Industrial control panels. 1 4. Meter socket enclosures. 5. Motor control centers. END OF SECTION 26 05 73 1 1 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 1 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- 1 1 SECTION 26 24 16-PANELBOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. ' 2. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. B. Section Includes: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems." ' 3. 26 05 48"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 4. 26 05 73"Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study." ' 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and ' manufacturers'technical data on features,performance,electrical characteristics,ratings,and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. ' C. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features,and ratings. ' D. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250,Type 1. E. Detail bus configuration,current,and voltage ratings. ' F. Short circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 1.03 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS ' A. Fumish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys:Two(2)spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection(GFEP)Types:Two(2) spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Power Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,but no fewer than three(3)of each size and type. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Construct panelboards to UL standards and provide UL labels. B. Comply with NEMA PB 1. ' C. Comply with NFPA 70. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: ' 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry,work above panelboards is complete,and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels ' during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23°F to plus 104°F. ' b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600-feet. B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by ' Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two (2) days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. ' 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.06 COORDINATION ' A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that , penetrates walls or is supported by them,including electrical and other types of equipment,raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 1 PART 2-WARRANTY 2.01 WARRANTY PERIOD ' A. Five(5)years from date of Substantial Completion. PART3-PRODUCTS 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS ' A. Enclosures: Flush and surface mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250,Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 3R C. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 4. 2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim ' cover. 3. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two (2) coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and ' thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim. 4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door,mounted in transparent card holder. ' B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 t DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS C. Phase,Neutral,and Ground Buses: ' 1. Material: Hard drawn copper,98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. ' D. Service Equipment Label,where specified or required: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. ' E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. ' F. Panelboards shall be dead front with front accessibility only. The framework is to be code gauge steel rigidly welded and bolted together to support the cover and installation. Ventilating louvers shall be provided when required. The panelboards will have adequate lifting means and be capable of being rolled or moved into its installation position. Exterior and interior metal surfaces of the panelboards ' shall be finished with acrylic baked enamel over an iron phosphate pre-treatment. The enamel finish shall be medium light gray,ANSI#49. ' G. The circuit breaker's connections to the distribution panel bussing shall be of a "bolt-on" design such that the connections grip the bus bars firmly under heavy fault current conditions. The branch circuit breakers shall be removed by unbolting them from the bus after the disconnection of the load side cable terminations. ' H. All Distribution (DP), Power (PP) and Receptacle (RP) panels shall be furnished with uninsulated copper ground bus, drilled and tapped for a minimum of six(6) 1/4-20 ground screws, complete with ' screws. 1. Keys: Provide two(2)keys for each panel. Make keys interchangeable for panels of same voltage. ' 3.02 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. ' 2. General Electric Company;GE Consumer&Industrial-Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc. 4. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric. ' B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1,power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault type latch with tumbler lock;keyed alike. ' 1. For doors more than 36-inches high,provide two(2)latches,keyed alike. 3.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one ofthe following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company;GE Consumer&Industrial-Electrical Distribution. ' 3. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc. 4. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1,lighting and appliance branch circuit type. ' C. Doors: Concealed hinges;secured with flush latch with tumbler lock;keyed alike. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS D. Column Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. ' PART 4-EXECUTION 4.01 EXAMINATION t A. Receive,inspect,handle,and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and ' other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 4.02 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. ' B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. t C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Mount top of trim 90-inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. ' E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. ' F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field adjustable,circuit breaker trip ranges. ' G. Install filler plates in unused spaces. H. Stub four(4) 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space ' designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four(4) 1-inch(27-GRC)empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. 1 J. Comply with NECA 1. K. Panelboards shall be installed surface mounted on walls where indicated on the drawings. Provide ' skirts and cap from panelboard to floor and/or ceiling to conceal conduit and wiring. Cap and skirt shall be same gauge and match panelboard in width,depth,and finish. ' L. Panelboards shall be mounted with top circuit breaker handle not more than 6-feet 6-inches above finished floor. M. Conductors within panels shall be grouped and laced with nylon tie straps. Only one(1)conductor shall ' be installed under terminal of individual circuit breaker. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- 1 SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS N. Each circuit protective device shall be identified with numeral designation, cross-referenced with t typewritten circuit directory on interior of panel door. Multi-section panels shall be consecutively numbered;it is not acceptable to restart numbering each section of multi-section panels with the number one(1). Revise any existing panel directory with typewritten information. ' O. Where multi-section panelboards are required, all sections shall have fully rated bus and shall be interconnected by copper conductor with total ampacity equal to main bus rating. Aluminum conductors will not be acceptable. ' P. Provide all night light,fire alarm panel, or associated 120 Volt power, emergency(battery pack) light, and elevator cab light circuit breakers with handle lock-offs. ' Q. Panelboard enclosures of multi-section panelboards shall be of the same dimensions. 4.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." ' B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems." ' D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 4.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components,assemblies,and equipment installations,including connections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: ' 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning' units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise,replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than sixty (60) days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard eleven(11)months after date of Substantial Completion. C. Instruments and Equipment: ' 1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS D. Panelboards will be considered defective,if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and ' that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action. 4.05 ADJUSTING ' A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by ' manufacturer. B. Set field adjustable circuit breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 26 05 73 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study." ' 4.06 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written ' instructions. 4.07 SHORT CIRCUIT RATING A. Fusible panelboards shall be UL listed and labeled for use on a system capable of delivering not more p y p oe g than the true RMS symmetrical amps as indicated on the drawings. B. Circuit breaker panelboards shall be fully rated or series rated with its upstream overcurrent device for i the available fault current scheduled on the drawings. END OF SECTION 26 24 16 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 26 27 26-WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles,receptacles with integral GFCI,and associated device plates. ' 2. Twist locking receptacles. 3. Receptacles with integral surge suppression units. 4. Isolated ground receptacles. 5. Hospital grade receptacles. ' 6. Tamper resistant receptacles. 7. Weather resistant receptacles. 8. Snap switches and wall box dimmers. 9. Solid state fan speed controls. ' 10. Wall switch and exterior occupancy sensors. 11. Communications outlets. 12. Pendant cord connector devices. ' 13. Cord and plug sets. 14. Floor service. B. Related Sections: 1 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems." ' 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. ' B. GFCI: Ground fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch circuit conductor. ' D. RFI: Radio frequency interference. ' E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. t1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. ' 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: ' 1. Cooper Wiring Devices;Division of Cooper Industries,Inc.(Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated;Wiring Device-Kellems(Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg.Company Inc.(Leviton). 4. Pass&Seymour/Legrand(Pass&Seymour). ' B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. t 2.02 GENERAL WIRING DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a ' qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Devices that are manufactured for use.with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. 2.03 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125V, 20A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5- 1 20R,UL 498,and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Cooper;5351 (single),CR5362(duplex). b. Hubbell;BBL5351 (single),HBL5352(duplex). c. Leviton;5891 (single),5352(duplex). d. Pass&Seymour;5361 (single),5362(duplex). B. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125V, 20A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R,UL 498,and FS W-C-596. C. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125V, 20A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 ' Configuration 5-20R,UL 498 Supplement and FS W-C-59.6. 2.04 GFCI RECEPTACLES , A. General Description: 1. Straight blade,non-feed-through type. , 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1,NEMA WD 6,UL 498,UL 943 Class A,and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125V,20A: ' 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following a. Cooper;VGF20. , b. Hubbell;GFR5352L. c. Pass&Seymour;2095. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES ' d. Leviton;7590. ' 2.05 TWIST LOCKING RECEPTACLES A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: g ' 1. Cooper;CWL520K 2. Hubbell;HBL2310. 3. Leviton;2310. 4. Pass&Seymour;L520-R. 2.06 TOGGLE SWITCHES ' A. Comply with NEMA WD 1,UL 20,and FS W-S-896. B. Switches, 120/277V,20A: 1. Single Pole: a. Cooper;AH1221. b. Hubbell;HBL1221. c. Leviton; 1221-2. ' d. Pass&Seymour;CSB20AC1. 2. Three Way: a. Cooper,AH1223. b. Hubbell;HBL1223. ' c. Leviton; 1223-2. d. Pass&Seymour;CSB20AC3. 3. Four Way: a. Cooper;AH1224. t b. Hubbell;HBL1224. c. Leviton; 1224-2. d. Pass&Seymour;CSB20AC4. ' 4. Pilot-Light Switches,20A: a. Cooper;AH1221PL for 120 and 277V. b. Hubbell;BBL1201PL for 120 and 277V. c. Leviton; 1221-LH1. ' d. Pass&Seymour;PS20ACIRPL for 120V,PS20AC1RPL7 for 277V. 5. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277V,20A: a. Cooper;AH1221L. b. Hubbell;HBL1221L. c. Leviton; 1221-2L. d. Pass&Seymour;PS20AC1-L. ' 2.07 DECORATOR STYLE DEVICES A. Convenience receptacles in this article are commercial grade, 15A,duplex. ' B. Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125V, 15A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R,and UL 498. 1. Cooper;6252. 2. Hubbell;DR15. t 3. Leviton; 16252. 4. Pass&Seymour;26252 C. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125V, 15A; comply with NEMA WD 1, ' NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R,and UL 498. 1. Cooper,TR6252. 2. Hubbell;DR15TR- BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3 - 1 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 3. Pass&Seymour;TR26252. , D. GFCI, Feed Through Type,, Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125V, 15A; comply with ' NEMA WD 1,NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R,UL 498,and UL 943 Class A. 1. Cooper,VGF15. 2. Hubbell;GF15LA. 3. Leviton;8599. ' 4. Pass&Seymour; 1594 E. Toggle Switches,Square Face, 120/277V, 15A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,UL 20,and FS W-S-896. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available ' products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Cooper;7621 (single pole),7623(three way). b. Hubbell;DS115(single pole),DS315(three way). ' c. Leviton;5621-2(single pole),5623-2(three way). d. Pass&Seymour;2621 (single pole),2623(three way). F. Fan Speed Controls: ' 1. Modular, 120-V, full wave, solid state units with integral, quiet on-off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. 2. Comply with UL 1917. G. Telephone Outlet: , 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: ' a. Cooper;3560-6. b. Leviton;40649. 2. Description: Single RJ45 jack for terminating 100 ohm, balanced, 4-pair UTP; TLA./EIA-568- B.1;complying with UL 1863. ' 2.08 WALL BOX DIMMERS A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full wave, solid state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with ' audible frequency and EMURFI suppression filters. B. Four-way switching may be added to "Control' Paragraph below after verifying availability with , manufacturers. C. Control: Continuously adjustable slider with single pole or three way switching. Comply with UL 1472. ' D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular;compatible with dimmer ballasts;trim potentiometer to adjust low end dimming; dimmer ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not , greater than 20 percent of full brightness. 2.09 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. , 1. Plate Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch thick,satin finished,Type 302 stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces:Galvanized steel. ' 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring loaded lift cover,and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- 1 ' SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 2.10 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS ' A. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-2011,gray finish,unless otherwise indicated. B. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two (2) modular, keyed, color coded, RJ-45 jacks for UTP cable. 2.11 FINISHES A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System:Red. 3. Wiring Devices (Wall receptacles not underfloor power whips) Connected to UPS System: Orange. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1,including mounting heights listed in that standard,unless otherwise indicated. ' B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. ' 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system,conductors,and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. ' 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation,including painting,is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on ' devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. ' 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail,or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pig tailing existing conductors is permitted,provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: ' 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers,until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6-inches in length. 5. When there is a choice,use side wiring with binding head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise,two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -5- SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15A or 20A circuits, splice , No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. ' 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes,allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: ' 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet ' boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and ' with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates. 3.02 GFCI RECEPTACLES ' A. Install non feed through type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems." ' B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use ho� stamped, or engraved machine printing with black filled lettering on face of plate,and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. ' C. Nameplates: Provide engraved or embossed plastic for receptacles other than standard duplex receptacles indicating voltage,phase,and amperes. ' 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: ' 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. ' 5. Using the test plug,verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions,remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones,and retest as specified , above. B. Wiring device will be considered defective,if it does not pass tests and inspections. ' C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 26 27 26 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- 1 ' SECTION 26 28 16-ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Non-fusible switches. 3. Enclosures. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 2. 26 05 48"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 3. 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems." 1.02 REFERENCES ' A. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the latest issue of all industry standards, publications. Or regulations referenced in this section and with the following references as applicable. Refer to listing of issuing organizations or agencies. 1. NECA-Standard of Installation(published by the National electrical Contractors Association). 2. NEMA FUl -Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 3. NEMA KS 1 -Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches(600 Volts Maximum). ' 4. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems(published by the International Electrical Testing Association). 5. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. ' 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. ' 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ' A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation,and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in 01 77 00"Closeout Procedures," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit ' breakers. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. ' C. Comply with NFPA 70 and listed by Underwriters Laboratories,Inc. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. ' 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22°F and not exceeding 104°F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600-feet. , B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: ' 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches,circuit breakers,and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART2-PRODUCTS , 2.01 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. All disconnect switches shall be heavy duty type, quick make, quick break, fusible or non-fusible as ' called for,with defeatable door lock interlock which prevents the door from opening when the switch is "ON" and all shall have provision for padlocking in the "OFF" position. Fusible switches shall have rejection type fuse clips. ' B. Switches shall be of sizes and voltage as called for on the drawings or required by the system. All switches shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts. C. All fuses required by switches shall be furnished and installed by the Subcontractor. Fuses shall be of the sizes shown on the drawings and shall be similar to Bussman"Low Peak"current limiting dual element type of motor circuits and similar to Bussman"Limitron"for non-motor circuits. 2.02 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: ' 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit 2. General Electric Company;GE Consumer&Industrial-Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc. , 4. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with , capability to accept three padlocks,and interlocked with cover in closed position. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- 1 SECTION 26 2116 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS C. Accessories: 1. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 2.03 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.;Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company;GE Consumer&Industrial-Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc. ' 4. Square D;a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, ' horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three (3) padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 2.04 ENCLOSURES ' A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor,Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250,Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 3R. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXANIINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION ' A. Install individual wall mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. ' B. Install and connect all disconnect switches called for on the drawing,or not shown on the drawings but required by the NEC or authorities having jurisdiction and which are not indicated as being furnished by others. C. Switches shall be securely attached to surface on which they were mounted. Mount disconnect on wall with unistrut or plywood back panel attached to wall studs. Do not use expansion type sheet rock anchors. D. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. E. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic ' Controls for Electrical Systems." F. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary liftingeyes, channels, and brackets and temporary es Y p rary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. G. Install fuses in fusible devices. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- 1 SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS H. Comply with NECA 1. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION ' A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning ' signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated plastic nameplate. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect ' components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: ' 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply,feeder,and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. ' C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. ' 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise,replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than sixty (60) days ' after Final Acceptance,perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker eleven(11)months after date of Substantial Completion. , c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. ' 4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and ' inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken,and observations after remedial action. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 28 16 , BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 ' DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- 1 SECTION 26 43 13-LIGHTNING&SURGE PROTECTION UNIT ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY tA. Section Includes: 1. This specification defines the electrical mechanical characteristics and requirements for a Parallel Design Surge Suppression System.The Distribution Panel Protector,hereafter referred to as TVSS ' (Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor)or SPD(Surge Protective Device), shall include everything required to properly interface with the service entrance or distribution panel. The units shall also have integral disconnect switches. ' 2. General Characteristics: a. One (1) each SPD shall be provided for existing panel EM and new UPSDPA with the following characteristics(similar to Liebert ACCUVAR): 1) Non-Service entrance rated. 2) Nominal Line Voltage: 208v,3 ph,4 wire from grounded neutral upstream transformer. 3) Category—B3. 4) Maximum surge current per mode=80 ka,L-G. 5) Maximum surge current per phase= 160 ka. ' 6) Minimum repetitive surge current capacity/mode=3,000. B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. System electrical requirements. B. Voltage: System voltage shall be 208 volts AC, 3 — Phase, 4 - wire, plus ground. Upstream transformer is a 208V source. C. Frequency: Nominal system operating frequency shall be 60 Hz. 1.03 SYSTEM ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Operating Temperature: The TVSS shall be designed for operation in ambient temperatures of 400 F to 185°F(-40°C to 85°C). B. Relative Humidity: The relative humidity of the environment for the TVSS shall be within the range of 5%to 95%non-condensing. ' C. Operating Altitude: The TVSS shall operate at an altitude of up to 12,000-feet(3657-m). 1.04 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. The TVSS shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the following standards: ' 1. Underwriters Laboratories(UL) 2. National Electrical Code(NEC) 3. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA). 4. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers(IEEE). 6. Military Standards(MIL-STD-220A). 7. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94(FIDS Pub 94). BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 43 13 LIGHTNING&SURGE PROTECTION UNIT 8. Local codes havingjurisdiction. B. Testing Standards: The TVSS shall be tested to and comply with the following: ' 1. UL 1449—Second Edition;effective February 16, 1998. 2. ANSI/EEE C62.41, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits. ' 3. NEMA LS-1, Specification Format for Low Voltage AC Surge Protective Devices (1000 volts or less). 4. Total system shall be tested to MIL-STD-220A. C. UL: The TVSS shall use only UL-recognized protection modules and components. System shall be , UL listed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows: 1. L.E.A.International. 2. Leviton. , 3. Liebert. 4. Current Technology. 2.02 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. General: The TVSS shall be of a parallel,multi-staged hybrid design. The TVSS shall use fast acting, high energy dissipaters and transient energy protectors that will divert and dissipate the surge energy. The TVSS shall be self-restoring and fully automatic,with a total system response time not to exceed 5 nanoseconds. The TVSS shall include an integrated status alarm monitor circuit, surge counter, and audible alarm to facilitate a positive diagnosis of continuous operation. B. High Energy Dissipater (HED): The primary Protection shall be high energy associated with a , lightning strike. The HED shall be connected Phase to Ground, providing maximum lightning protection with a surge current capacity of 200,000 amps/module with an 8 x 20 microsecond test waveform.The HED shall incorporate fuse links that,if the surge capacity of the module is exceeded, will disconnect the HED from the AC source without interrupting power to the load. C. Transient Energy Protector(TEP): The secondary protection shall be a solid-state clamping network, ' capable of clamping impulse voltages,regardless of their origin,to the specified safe level. The TEP shall be installed'phase to phase(delta),providing maximum protection against surges and spikes with a surge current capacity of 200,000 amperes/module with an 8 x 20 microsecond test waveform. Component response time shall be 1 picosecond. Total module response time not to exceed 5 ' nanoseconds. D. Status Indicators: The TVSS shall include redundant status indicators,providing a continuous positive indication of TVSS protection module status. ' E. Status Alarm Monitor (SAM): The TVSS shall include a status alarm monitor system, which will continuously monitor each phase of the incoming power as well as the status of the TEP and HED , modules. The SAM shall include Normally Open(N/O)or Normally Closed(N/C)dry contacts. The SAM shall also serve as the single monitoring device for connection to all other monitoring devices as listed below. The SAM shall incorporate its own transient voltage suppression network to protect itself from damage due to surge and transient energy. Two(2)SAM modules are required. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- SECTION 26 43 13 LIGHTNING&SURGE PROTECTION UNIT F. Surge Counter Option(SCO): The TVSS shall include a surge counter, on the face of the enclosure, which will count all transients occurring above the system clamping voltage threshold. The SCO shall interface with the SAM system and be independently powered without using an external power supply. The SCO shall maintain data in the event of a power failure or disconnection from the AC power source. The SCO system shall provide a visual count of all surges and transients through LCD readout. The SCO circuitry shall prevent incorrect counting of ringing transients by registering all surges and transients occurring within 20 milliseconds as a single event. The SCO shall be capable of being reset by a push button switch on the surge counter meter face plate. ' G. Audible Alarm (AAO): the TVSS shall include a solid-state audible alarm, which will sound in the event that any protection module fails.. The AAO shall include an enclosure mounted transducer and lighted on/off alarm silence switch with visual indication of silence selection. The AAO will interface ' and derive its power solely from the SAM board. No additional power supply source will be used. 2.03 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS A. The TVSS shall meet or exceed the following specifications: 1. Voltage Configuration: 208 volts AC,3—Phase,4-wire plus ground. 2. Protection Configuration: Phase to phase(delta)and phase to utility common point earth ground. 3. Maximum Surge Current/Phase: 200,000 amps. 4. Response Time: total system response time not to exceed 5 nanoseconds. 5. Minimum Energy Handling Capability/Phase: 10,000 joules. 6. EMI/RFI Noise Rejection: 50 dB(50 Ohm insertion loss measurement method). 7. Clamping Voltage Ratio: Maximum clamping voltage ratio shall be 27:1 under test procedures outlined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1980,Category C,8 x 20 uS at 10,000 amperes. 8. Performance: The TVSS shall be tested in accordance with procedures outlined in ANSMEEE c62.41-1980. Surges will be applied in all possible combinations; common mode to common ' mode, normal mode to common mode, normal mode to normal mode, and common mode to normal mode. The manufacturer shall provide certified test data consisting of specified clamp voltages and surge current capacity for category"C." Test shall be conducted as follows: Category C-Biwave 8 x 20 uS at 10,000 amperes 1.2 x 50 uS at 6,000 volts ' In addition,the system design shall be life tested to withstand 6,000 sequential category C surges without internal failure. The TVSS shall also be tested to MIL-STD-220A for noise insertion loss in a 50 Ohm system for RF frequencies up to 400 MHz. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Termination: The TVSS shall include provisions for input termination. The method of wire connection shall utilize ANSI/NFPA 70-1987,NEC standard wiring practices. ' B. Factory Testing: The TVSS shall be completely factory tested before shipment. Testing shall include, but not be restricted to,the following: 1. Quality Control Checks. ' 2. MIL-STD-220A. 3. ANSMEEE C62.41-1980: Category A,CategoryB,Category C. 3.02 DRAWINGS A. The manufacturer shall provide detailed mechanical and electrical drawings, showing component location and electrical connections for installation. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- I�� 1 SECTION 26 43 13 LIGHTNING&SURGE PROTECTION UNIT 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install TVSS plumb and level where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, 1 applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. 1 END OF SECTION 26 43 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 1 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- ' PART1 -GENERAL SECTION 26 5100-INTERIOR LIGHTING 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Interior lighting fixtures,lamps,and ballasts. 2. Exit signs. 3. Lighting fixture supports. I B. Related Sections: 1. Drawings related to work of this Section includes all of the applicable General Requirements of Division 01,any Supplementary and/or Special conditions,and the following listed Sections. 2. 26 05 19"Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." ' 3. 26 05 29"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 4. 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. BF: Ballast factor. B. CCT: Correlated color temperature. C. CRI: Color rendering index. 1 D. HID: High intensity discharge. E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire,or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture,including ballast housing if provided. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features,accessories,finishes,and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Ballast,including BF. 3. Energy efficiency data. 4. Life,output(lumens,CCT,and CRI),and energy efficiency data for lamps. 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps,ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. 1 BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL - 1 - SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. ' 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS , A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,product(s)indicated on Drawings. B. Acceptable fixture manufacturers: Lithoni�Columbia,Da brite or Mercury 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with UL NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to ' NEMA LE 5A. C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified,test according to NEMA LE 5 , and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified,test according to NEMA LE 5B. ' E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions,and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors,frames, lenses,diffusers,and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. H. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging,exposure to heat,and UV radiation. , a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum,unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -2- ' SECTION 26 1100 INTERIOR LIGHTING I. Factory Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal ' viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. "USE ONLY"and include specific lamp type. 1 b. Lamp diameter code(T4, T-5, T-8, T-12,etc.),tube configuration(twin, quad,triple,etc.), base type,and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. C. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID ' luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type(M98,M57,etc.)for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. J. Electromagnetic Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter. K. All light fixtures shall be UL listed and labeled,comply with all applicable code requirements and CSA standards. 2.03 2.03 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A except Class B for T12/HO and T12/Slimline lamp ballasts. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. ' 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2,Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency:42 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 9. BF:0.88 or higher. ' 10. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed start ballasts. ' C. Electronic Programmed Start Ballasts for T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. D. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C,for limitations on electromagnetic and radio frequency interference for consumer equipment. ' E. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high and low level and off. a. High Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp type indicated. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -3- SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 2.04 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS ' A. Description: Electronic programmed rapid start type,complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: ' 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. ' 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2,Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. ' 8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment. , 2.05 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ballast Circuit: Constant wattage autotransformer or regulating high power factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22°F for single lamp ballasts. 3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104°F. 4. Open circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 5. Low Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise. B. Electronic Ballast for Metal Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20°F for single lamp ballasts. ' 2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130°F. 3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 4. Sound Raring: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. ' 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2,Category A or better. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and , radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment. 10. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. C. High Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid state igniter/starter. Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter case temperature of 90°C. 1. Instant Restrike Device: Integral with ballast,or solid state potted module,factory installed within ' fixture and compatible with lamps,ballasts,and mogul sockets up to 150 W. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40°F. 2.06 QUARTZ LAMP LIGHTING CONTROLLER A. General Requirements for Controllers: Factory installed by lighting fixture manufacturer. Comply with UL 1598. ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -4- SECTION 26 1100 INTERIOR LIGHTING B. Standby(Quartz Restrike): Automatically switches quartz lamp on when a HID lamp in the fixture is initially energized and during the HID lamp restrike period after brief power outages. C. Connections: Designed for a single branch—circuit connection. ' D. Switching Off: Automatically switches quartz lamp off when HID lamp strikes.. E. Switching Off: Automatically switches quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output. 2.07 EXIT SIGNS A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors,visibility,luminance, and lettering size,comply with authorities having jurisdiction. ' B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent,two for each fixture,20,000 hours of rated lamp life. 2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs,50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power ' pack. a. Battery: Sealed,maintenance free,nickel cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic,solid state type with sealed transfer relay. C. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to ' 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored,relay disconnects lamps from battery,and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and ' demonstrates unit operability. e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. ' 2.08 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. T8 rapid start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48-inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. B. T8 rapid start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24-inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. C. T5 rapid start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2-inches, 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3000 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. D. 775HO rapid start,high output lamps,rated 54 W maximum,nominal length of 45.2-inches,5000 initial ' lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. E. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start and suitable for use with dimming ballasts unless otherwise indicated. 1. 13 W: T4,double or triple tube,rated 900 initial lumens,(minimum). 2. 18 W: T4,double or triple tube,rated 1200 initial lumens(minimum). 3. 26 W: T4,double or triple tube,rated 1800 initial lumens(minimum). 4. 32 W: T4,triple tube,rated 2400 initial lumens(minimum). BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2. DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 259 2014 SHORE MIAMI S FL - 5- SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 5. 42 W: T4,triple tube,rated 3200 initial lumens(minimum). 6. 57 W: T4,triple tube,rated 4300 initial lumens(minimum). ' 7. 70 W: T4,triple tube,rated 5200 initial lumens(minimum). 2.09 HID LAMPS A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K, and , average rated life of 24,000 hours,minimum. 1. Dual Arc Tube Lamps: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and,when ' power is restored after an outage,the cooler arc tube,with lower internal pressure,lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output. B. Metal Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43,with minimum CRI 65,and color temperature 4000 K. C. Pulse Start,Metal Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65,and color temperature 4000 K. D. Ceramic,Pulse Start,Metal Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80,and color temperature 4000 K. , E. Low Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI 78.41,CRI 0,and color temperature 1800 K. 2.10 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. , B. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two (2) 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Lighting fixtures: 1. Set level,plumb,and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect/Engineer, to use permanent ' luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly,install new lamps,and reinstall. C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that , recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify,with ballast manufacturers,maximum distance between ballast and luminaire. D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element. ' 1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires,independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6-inches from lighting fixture comers. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture comer with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two (2) 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -6- SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3. E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48-inches,brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted,Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis,including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. F. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19"Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with ' requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.03 ADJUSTING ' A. Occupancy Adjustments:When requested within twelve(12)months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two(2)visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this, work may be required after dark. 1. Adjust aimable luminaires,in the presence of Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION 26 5100 ' BARRY UNIVERSITY BRUNS-PAK PROJECT 9707-2 DATA CENTER RENOVATION OWNER REVIEW: JUNE 25,2014 MIAMI SHORES,FL -7-